JP2015228903A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can suppress interests in a game from lowering.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention comprises: start storage means which can store passage of a game medium through a predetermined area within a game area, as a start memory; lottery game execution means which executes a lottery game in which a game state can be shifted to an advantageous game state on the basis of the start memory; unclear mode setting means which can set a mode to an unclear mode in which the game state is not clearly notified; advance notification means which can notify result information of the lottery game in advance before execution of the lottery game; and notification mode selection means which selects one mode from a plurality of modes suggesting an expectation degree gradually which is to be the result information advantageous to a player, as a mode of advance notification.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In recent years, an advantageous gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state triggered by the fact that a variable display game executed based on the passing of a gaming medium through a predetermined area within the gaming region has become a specific result There is a pachinko machine that shifts to or maintains the normal gaming state.

  In such a pachinko machine, when the result of the variable display game is the specific result for maintaining the normal gaming state or the specific result for giving the advantageous gaming state, the gaming state is not notified to the player (confidential state) Is continued until a predetermined number of variable display games have passed, and the player is expected to have an advantageous gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-135700 A

  However, in the case of a specific result that maintains the normal gaming state, it is unlikely that a highly reliable performance can be acquired as long as the internal probability state is normal when the player is expected On the contrary, there was a risk that the interest of the game would be reduced.

  The problem to be solved by the present invention is made in view of the above circumstances, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In a typical embodiment of the present invention, start memory storage means capable of storing, as a start memory, that a game medium has passed through a predetermined area in the game area, and a game state based on the start memory is more than a game state than a normal game state. A lottery game execution means for executing a lottery game that can be shifted to an advantageous game state advantageous to a player, an ambiguity mode setting means that can be set in an indistinct mode that does not clearly notify the game state in the game state, and the lottery As prior notification means capable of informing game result information before execution of the lottery game, and as a prior notification mode by the prior notification means, the degree of expectation to be the result information advantageous to the player is suggested step by step. A notification mode selection unit that selects one mode from a plurality of modes, and a mode selection probability change unit that sets a probability of selecting the mode having a higher expectation level than the notification mode selection unit. An execution rate changing means for changing an execution rate of the prior notification; and the execution rate changing means and the mode selection probability changing when the game state is the normal gaming state in the unclear mode. Probability changing means for executing at least one of the means.

  Examples of “normal game state” and “advantageous game state” include a state in which the winning probability of the variable display game is low (normal state) and a state in which the win probability of the variable display game is high (probability change state, high probability state). . In addition, not only the winning probability of the variable display game but also a probability of executing a specific effect, a probability of notifying game information useful to the player, or the like may be used.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can solve the above-described problems and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right effect unit of FIG.34 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front with the upper tray ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is a rear view with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board from back. It is a front view of the game board which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the game ball guide path unit front side. FIG. 51A is an enlarged view of the game ball guiding path unit, and FIG. 51B is a cross-sectional view in the longitudinal direction of the game ball guiding path unit. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the form which the movable accessory is operating. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the other form where the movable accessory is operating. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the further another form where the movable accessory is operating. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the falling movable accessory as seen from the front, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the falling movable accessory as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the falling combination object from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the falling combination object from the back. It is a front view which shows the 1st operation | movement of a fall combination. It is a front view which shows the 2nd operation | movement of a fall movable combination. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the other form where the movable accessory is operating. It is a figure which shows an example of the schematic diagram of the information management apparatus and network for managing various information from a pachinko game machine and CR unit. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 61B is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 61B. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 61B is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 61B. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 67. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 74 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 73. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 80 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 79. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a table | surface which shows each characteristic for every kind of jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table which can be selected in a normal external disadvantageous game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process (step S1210). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225a) of the stop symbol in 1st production mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225b) of the stop symbol in 2nd production mode. (A) is a figure explaining the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (b) is a figure explaining the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (c) is a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating, (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. (A) is a table | surface which shows the jackpot expectation degree etc. when in the 1st production mode according to each production content series, respectively, (b) is a challenge bonus rush expectation degree in the 2nd production mode. It is a table | surface which shows each etc. according to each production content series. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "01H" in the 1st production mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "02H" in the 1st production mode. It is an example of the effect display screen which synchronized the upper plate side liquid crystal display device and the game board side liquid crystal display device. It is the table | surface which illustrated the command of various variation numbers, the variation content, the winning and the variation time. It is a time chart of the production | presentation in various fluctuation patterns. It is the table | surface which showed an example of distribution conditions of the generation probability of the variation pattern of each winning type. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an operation value improvement effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an operation value improvement element determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time limit determination process A. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation effect process. It is the table | surface which showed an example of distribution conditions of an effect pattern. (A) thru | or (c) are the table | surfaces which illustrated the allocation conditions of the time limit in the variation numbers 30-32, respectively. It is the screen figure which illustrated the initial screen displayed in the introduction effect of the operation value improvement effect. (A) thru | or (d) is a screen figure which illustrated the series of screens displayed in an operation value improvement effect. (E) thru | or (h) are the screen figures which illustrated the series of screens displayed in an operational value improvement effect. It is the screen figure which illustrated another screen displayed at the time of the end of production gate passage production. It is the screen figure which illustrated the screen displayed when the operation medium was not operated in the operation effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an operation value improvement effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect gate passage effect pattern setting process. It is the table | surface which illustrated the correspondence of required number and effective time. (A) thru | or (c) is a screen figure which illustrated the series of screens displayed in an operation value improvement effect. It is a time chart of the production | presentation in the fluctuation pattern in which production | presentation gate passage production | presentation is performed. It is a time chart of production gate passage production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an operation value improvement effect process. It is the table | surface which illustrated the correspondence of required number and effective time. (A) thru | or (d) is a screen figure which illustrated the series of screens displayed in an operation value improvement effect. (E) And (f) is a screen figure which illustrated a series of screens displayed in operational value improvement production. It is a time chart of production gate passage production. (A) thru | or (d) is a screen figure which illustrated the series of screens displayed in an operation value improvement effect. (E) And (f) is a screen figure which illustrated a series of screens displayed in operational value improvement production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the indistinct mode setting process in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state ambiguity effect in ambiguity mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state alerting | reporting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state alerting | reporting notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state alerting | reporting effect, (A) is an example of a screen which shows that the present game state is a probable change state, (B) is the present game state being a normal game state. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information management apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of game machine information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state alerting | reporting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state alerting | reporting effect, (A) shows the example of a screen of unclear mode, (B) shows the example of a screen of a gaming state alerting effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state alerting | reporting effect, (A) is an example of a screen which shows that the present game state is a probable change state, (B) is the present game state being a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of a game system. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an effect management apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of production management information. It is a sequence diagram explaining the procedure for making another game machine perform a gaming state alerting effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen which alert | reports the game state of another game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a member management apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of member information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a game state alerting | reporting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state alerting | reporting effect performed when a specific condition is satisfied. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an indistinct mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state alerting | reporting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a privilege distribution table. (A) thru | or (C) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting. (A) thru | or (B2) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting. (A) thru | or (C) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of the big hit and the small hit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an indistinct mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding display mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state alerting | reporting process. (A) thru | or (C) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting. (A) thru | or (C) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting. (A) thru | or (D) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting. (A) thru | or (C) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch effect setting process according to a first modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change start process of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an alerting | reporting setting table. (A) thru | or (D) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing according to Modification 1; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state alerting | reporting process. (A) thru | or (C) are figures which show an example of the production | presentation concerning game state alerting | reporting.

(First embodiment)
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board accommodated in the payout control board box 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout apparatus 830 are guided downward. And an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200, and the payout unit base 801 A game ball which is attached to the lower end and is released from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 is guided forward and released from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharged from the full tank discharge port. Lower full tank path unit having a full tank guide path that guides the played game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the full tank receiving port 528 of the door frame 3 Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. Interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and contains a payout control board for controlling the dispensing of game balls. 950.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having a guide rail 1001 for guiding, a flat gaming panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear side of the game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part and opened upward, and a main control board housed inside the main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 A table unit having a board box 1300 and a plurality of winning holes for receiving game balls that are attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and are driven into the game area 5a ( And a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the main control board box 1300 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back after being disassembled as the main member.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction with a vertically long rectangle as shown in FIGS. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. Is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate (side) liquid crystal display that is attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and can display an image. A device 244, a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player, and a production operation unit 220 having an upper plate production button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a front view upper plate 201. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that rotates in accordance with the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 on the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300 that covers the upper plate 201, an upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a game ball stored in the lower plate 202. And a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall. And an upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 attached to the left and right center on the front surface of 360, and a top speaker that is attached within the top decorative member 370 and outputs a high-frequency sound. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and is attached to the handle main body 502 to detect the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor attached to the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and opened on the front side, as shown in FIGS. And a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, etc., the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit body 542 and the box-shaped unit body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for discharging the game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball that has entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism that switches between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

  The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear after being decomposed into the main members. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit touch unit as seen from above and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from above with the button unit disassembled, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 31 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is the effect operation in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the door lower right effect unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the door lower right effect unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in the lower right door production unit of FIG. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the back. FIG. 42A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit in a state where the door lower right rotating body faces forward, and FIG. 42B is a front view of the door right lower rotating body facing rearward.

  FIG. 43A is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 43B is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges greatly forward, and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate body 212 of the dish unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. In the upper plate body 212, the bottom surface is inclined so as to lower the right end as a whole. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 in the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 to be transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and an upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 33). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through-hole 230b of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237b forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220 </ b> B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from the upper side, A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. Is a shallow box-shaped base member 243 opened from above, an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 inserted into the base member 243 from above and controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device A frame-shaped grounding metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery of 244, and a transparent touch covering the upper surface of the grounding metal fitting 245 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. A panel 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from the upper side and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. A screw hole 243c penetrating vertically at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension portion 243b and formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. And a C-chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 32) having a diameter that increases toward the lower end.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  In addition, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Further, since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rear side of the touch unit 220B, when liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid is prevented from entering the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the button unit 220 </ b> C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit mounting portion 231 g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the bottom surface of the disk-like main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253. A plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Thus, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment has the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240 c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220 </ b> B in an assembled state from the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, the production operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be received, so that an image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation buttons, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and the touch unit 220B is lowered to the front support pin 231c. The supported damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. Thereby, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and an image displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, a touch effect using the touch panel 246, and the like can be enjoyed. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to decorate the back plate decoration member 236 disposed on the back side of the touch panel 246 (back side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper plate lower cover portion of the plate unit cover 260 described later by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. While being arranged at a position higher than the upper surface of 262, a waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends in the left and right directions, and the left and right centers bulge forward, and is formed in a shell shape that is open to the rear. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 220, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between a door lower rotary body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) to be described later. .

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. A heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  40 and 41, the rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotary body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 278 include a rotation position where the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42A) and a rotation position where the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 42B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward according to the gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably, so that the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotated while the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower right door rotation body 270A in the lower right door production unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The entire production unit cover 300 is translucent in a container shape with the rear opened. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

  43 to 45, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 43B, the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by slider support portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 through the first guide path 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214 is attached. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324 and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 against the biasing force of the spring member 324 in a position where the opening 321a is opened. It is equipped with a.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 214, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 214 in a lateral direction. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding projection 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325b and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding projection 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, and the holding projection 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower plate 202 do not come out downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding protrusion 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projections 322a are released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface in the vicinity of the right end of the rendering operation unit 220 and has translucency, A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes a ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending operation unit 330 receives a predetermined number of game balls. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion and the prepaid card are returned after being drawn. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 220, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

  The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that changes by driving in, along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the belt-like linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish top decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight ( It is possible to notice light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from outside the field of view, and attracts the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper side liquid crystal display device 244 side. Rukoto can. Therefore, in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image in accordance with the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby allowing the player to play the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. The presentation of the effect by 244 can be noticed, and the effect by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 is provided with the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, it is outside the gaming area 5a. Since the arrangement of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 indicates the arrival of a chance, the player can play the game in the game area 5a and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. Both can be made to care about the production at. Therefore, by taking care of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and to reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image that suggests the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby allowing the player to display the upper plate side liquid crystal display. The device 244 can be noticed, and the player can be entertained by reliably recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, it is possible to enjoy the effects on the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 244, and it is possible to make the game sharp and hard to get bored.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 that bulges to the player side below the game area 5a is provided with the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. It will be. As a result, the player on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 easily hides the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is difficult to see from other players next to or behind. Therefore, only the player can enjoy the presentation presented by the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable and to reduce the interest by being looked at by other players, and the upper plate side liquid crystal is reduced. When the display device 244 presents an effect, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, so that it is difficult to overlook the effect of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, etc. Can be suppressed. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are disposed at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer periphery of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light. The light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed and the production of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed. it can.

  In addition, the stage operation unit 220 having the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since a player for confirming the amount of game balls to be shot turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 are turned when the line of sight is turned to the upper plate 201. And the like easily enter the field of view, and the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is easily noticed. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the effect operation unit 220 is arranged below the game area 5a, and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, so that it is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the player, it is easy for the player to notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely focused on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, It is possible to entertain the production by the production operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from being lowered.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 220 (top plate side liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the position of the player's line of sight is in any position in the game area 5a. Even so, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely focused on the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 220 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper plate lower covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since it is arranged at a position higher than the upper surface and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate body 212 and the surface of the game ball can be touched in the upper plate 201 by touching the outside air. Even if the water (water droplets) condensed in (1) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering part 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. The vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and is attached to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and a variety of effects can be handled. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by various effects and to reduce the interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed, and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

  According to the pachinko machine 1, the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are provided on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 bulging forward under the game area 5a. An effect (operation effect) using the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 is presented to the player in accordance with the game state that changes by hitting a ball, and the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are displayed to the player during the effect. By operating, the player can be actively involved in the production, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained. And the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper side of the lower dish opening 261 (upper dish lower covering part 262) in the dish unit cover 260 provided with the touch panel 246 are within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by the player's hand. Since the thickness is set, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the player can operate the touch panel 246 while grasping the space between the touch panel 246 and the upper dish covering portion 262, so that the touch panel 246 is accurately operated. be able to.

  Specifically, since the thickness between the upper surface of the touch panel 246 and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is a thickness within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by hand, for example, fingers excluding the thumb When the thumb is positioned on the upper side of the touch panel 246 in a state where it is in contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 is positioned within the range of movement of the thumb, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb. Is possible. In this state, since the fingers excluding the thumb are in contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, it is possible to stabilize the thumb, and a desired position of the touch panel 246 can be touched by the thumb or on the touch panel 246. The finger can be moved in a desired direction, the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved, and the touch panel 246 can be accurately operated. Further, when the thumb is brought into contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 can be operated with other fingers, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Accordingly, since the touch panel 246 is easy to operate, the touch panel 246 can be easily and accurately operated during the production using the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by the production by the operation of the touch panel 246. It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, the touch panel 246 is provided within a range of 60 mm from the front end of the dish unit cover 260 to the rear, and is operated when the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 are gripped from the front end side and the touch panel 246 is operated. Since the touch panel 246 is arranged within the reach of the finger to be touched, the touch panel 246 can be operated with the finger stabilized, and the entertainment using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. can do.

  Furthermore, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 is inclined so as to increase from the front side toward the rear side, the surface of the touch panel 246 faces the player side so that the touch panel 246 is easy to see, and the player operates the touch panel 246. It is possible to improve the properties, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 becomes higher toward the rear side, the thickness between the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 becomes thicker toward the rear side. Therefore, the dish unit 200 increases toward the rear side. Strength and rigidity of the Therefore, even if the touch panel 246 is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the touch panel 246, the dish unit cover 260, and the like can be made difficult to break, and the game is interrupted by the game being interrupted due to breakage of the touch panel 246 or the like. Can be reduced.

  In addition, since the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 that is visible from the upper side through the touch panel 246 is provided, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 operates the touch panel 246. By displaying an image according to the purpose, the player can operate the touch panel 246 according to the content of the displayed image without knowing the operation method of the touch panel 246, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved. it can.

  Further, since the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is provided, by displaying the effect image according to the game state, the player can be entertained by the effect image in addition to the operation effect of the touch panel 246, It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since the touch panel 246 is arranged in the center of the left and right, the touch panel 246 is easy to see and the distance is the same from both sides of the player's left and right hands, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the hand that is easy for the player to use. The operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved by operating the touch panel 246 with an easy-to-use hand. Therefore, when an effect using the touch panel 246 is performed, the touch panel 246 can be immediately recognized and operated, and it is possible to quickly respond to the operation effect, thereby suppressing the entertaining of the player and reducing the interest. can do.

  In addition, an upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player is provided, and in an operation effect presented according to the game state, in addition to a touch operation by the touch panel 246, a press operation by the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Therefore, various operation effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Further, since a part (guide passage portion 212a) of the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) for storing game balls along the rear side of the touch panel 246 is opened upward, for example, the guide passage of the upper plate 201 The finger except the thumb is locked to the portion 212a and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb, so that the thumb can be stabilized by the finger locked to the guide passage portion 212a, and the operability of the touch panel 246 is improved. In addition, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved, and the touch panel 246 is operated by grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 or by locking a finger to the guide passage portion 212a. Since the finger can be stabilized and the operability can be improved, it is possible to select how to place the hand to stabilize the finger according to the player's habit and preference, and more diverse players It becomes possible corresponding, it may be easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine for a game.

  Subsequently, a configuration example of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. 47 is a front view of the game board 5, FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 has an outer rail 6002 and an inner rail 6003, and a frame-shaped front component member 6001 that defines an outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are driven, and a front component member A gaming panel 1100 arranged to close the gaming area 5a on the rear side of 6001, a function display unit 6040 arranged on the lower side of the front structural member 6001 on the left side of the out port 6006 outside the gaming area 5a, An attacker unit 2000 disposed on the right side in the left and right direction in the area 5a and above the out port 6006 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and disposed on the right area in the game area 5a and on the front surface of the game panel 1100. And a game ball guiding path unit 6010 supported by the game panel 5100 and a game panel 1100 disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 5a. The frame-shaped center accessory 2300 to be played, the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped decorative body) 2300 are passed through the rear side of the back unit 3000. It mainly includes a liquid crystal display device (game board side liquid crystal display device) 1400 as an effect display means attached so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image.

  The attacker unit 2000 is inserted into the opening formed in the lower right portion of the gaming panel 1100 from the front side and then fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of receiving ports through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a can be received. Specifically, a first start port 2001 that is arranged at substantially the center in the left-right direction and obtains a special lottery result, and a rectangular large winning opening 2003 that is arranged on the right side of the first start port 2001 and extends greatly in the left-right direction. And a second winning opening provided with a general winning opening 2004 arranged on the left side of the grand prize winning opening 2003 and on the right side of the first starting opening 2001, and a second starting opening for obtaining a special lottery result in the same manner as the first starting opening. Unit 2005. The second start port unit 2005 exists almost directly above the grand prize winning port 2003.

  The second start opening unit 2005 has a normal gate 2005a from which a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn in response to the passing of the game ball, a second start opening 2005c, and a second start opening according to the normal lottery result of the normal gate. A movable piece 2005b that opens and closes, and a game ball discharge route 2005d that discharges the game ball 2006a that cannot pass to the second start opening 2005c after passing through the normal gate 2005a and is closed to the second winning opening 2005c. The game ball guide route 2005e that can guide the game ball to the second starting port 2005c by opening the movable piece 2005b after passing through the normal gate 2005a is integrated. The start end of the second starter unit 2005 communicates with the end of the above-described game ball guiding path unit 6010. When the game ball is hit to the right and enters the game ball guiding path unit 6010, the inside of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 Falls to the second starter unit 2005. Next, the game ball passes through the normal gate 2005a of the second starter unit as it is to reach the movable piece 2005b, and when the movable piece 2005b is open, it passes through the game ball guide route 2005e and passes through the second starter port 2005c. On the other hand, when the movable piece 2005b is closed, it passes through the game ball discharge route 2005d and falls toward the big winning opening 2003. The movable piece 2005b is opened and closed by a solenoid.

  The first starting port 2001 and the general winning port 2004 are open on the upper side so that game balls can be received at all times. The special winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported so that the lower side is pivotable. In a substantially vertical state, the prize winning port 2003 is closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and when the upper side is pivoted so as to tilt forward, The big prize opening 2003 is opened so that game balls can be received. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big winning opening 2003 is closed in a normal gaming state, and is performed by receiving a game ball (starting winning) at the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c. Depending on the result of the special lottery (big hit lottery) (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), the actuator is opened and closed. However, as will be described later, when the result of the special lottery is “big hit (special hit)”, the opening / closing member 2006 according to the present embodiment can accept the game ball to the effective gate (described later) after the condition device is activated. On the condition that there was, it can be opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid. The effective gate is a special gate for enabling the continuous object operating device after the condition device is operated. The effective gate is prepared so that the pachinko machine 1 has a function capable of delaying the timing at which the accessory continuous operation device operates when the jackpot is won.

  Next, details of the game ball guiding path unit 6000 will be described. The game ball guiding path unit 6000 is made of a resin part product formed in the form of a hollow tube, and is attached to the game panel 1100 up and down on the right side of the game area 5a as described above. FIG. 50 shows the internal structure of the hollow tube with the illustration of the front side portion of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 omitted. 51A is an enlarged view of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 in FIG. 50, and FIG. 51B is a cross-sectional view in the longitudinal direction of the game ball guiding path unit 6010.

  The start end 6010a of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 is configured to be opened at a substantially uppermost position on the right side of the game area, and is played to the right and bounced off by the reflector 6010b to flow down the right side of the game area. All of the balls are supplied from the start end 6010a into the game ball guide path unit 6010. A first half region having a predetermined width following the start end 6010a of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 is formed of a straight portion 6010c that is substantially perpendicular and a bent portion 6010d that is bent subsequently. An effect gate 6011 is formed at the end of the straight part 6010c and at the start of the bent part 6010d. When the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, the passing information of the game ball is supplied to the peripheral control board (or the main control board), and the peripheral control board triggers the right hand of the game ball when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011. The predetermined effect information of the effect device including the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed in the gaming state to be enabled. The game ball that has passed the effect gate 6011 is guided to the straight portion 6010e after passing through the bending portion 6010d while reciprocating in the left-right direction. The bending portion 6010d reduces the falling speed of the game ball by bending the progress of the game ball.

  A straight line portion 6010e following the bent portion 6010d of the game ball guiding path unit is formed in a straight line having a relatively long width and descending substantially vertically. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the front side 6010f of the game ball guiding path unit in the straight part 6010e is provided with a plurality of convex bodies 6010h having a semispherical cross section that protrude toward the rear side 6010g. Also, a convex body 6010h that protrudes from the rear surface portion toward the front surface portion is provided. Since the convex body on the front side 6010f and the convex body on the rear side 6010g are formed in a staggered pattern, the gaming machine balls 6010i flowing down in the straight portion 6010e have a plurality of convex bodies arranged in a staggered pattern. Since the game balls are in contact with each other in order and bend while moving forward and backward, the falling speed of the game ball is reduced. The height in the front-rear direction of the convex body 6010h is set in a range that does not impair the progress of the game ball passing through the game ball guiding path unit. In order to adjust the falling speed of the game balls, the width in the direction of travel of the game balls of some of the convex bodies may be increased as indicated by reference numeral 6010j. In order to avoid a human head-type movable accessory, the straight portion 6010e is formed in a straight shape without being bent like the bent portion 6010d.

  A bulging portion 6010k following the straight portion 6010e is formed in a lower region of the game region of the game ball guiding path unit 6010. An internal tube 6010m is formed in the bulging portion 6010k, and the internal tube 6010m communicates with the above-described second starter port unit 2005. The above-mentioned effective gate 6010n is provided at the starting end of the internal tube 6010m, and the game ball that proceeds while falling in the straight portion 6010e is directed to the internal tube 6010m and passes through the effective gate 6010n, and then the second start port. Unit 2005 is reached. The falling speed of the game ball passing through the game ball guiding path unit 6000 is reduced particularly in the process of passing through the bent portion 6010d and the straight portion 6010e. Therefore, it is possible to gain time until the game ball passes through the effect gate 6010n after passing through the effect gate 6011 as compared to the case where the game ball falls freely without its speed being reduced. Therefore, since the peripheral control board can have a margin for the time required for the production on the liquid crystal display device or the like, an effective production can be provided to the player. Details of this will be described later. The normal gate 2005a, the effect gate 6011, and the effective gate 6010n are provided with a gate switch (gate sensor) that detects the passage of the game ball.

  The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1100, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1100. FIG. As shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 52, a logo movable accessory 6200 simulating a logo is provided on the upper portion of the center accessory 2300 so as to be able to reciprocally tilt counterclockwise from the right side toward the center of the game board in front view. Further, as shown in FIG. 53, a zombie movable accessory 6201 imitating the head of a person (zombie) is placed in a straight line from the right side of the game panel 1100 toward the center on the right side of the center accessory 2300. As shown in FIG. 53, a rectangular movable accessory 6202 is provided on the left side of the center accessory so as to be able to reciprocate clockwise around the lower side. The peripheral control board controls the movable mode of the movable accessory according to the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and mainly the back box 3001 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 1100 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In a back box 3001, a shutter-type movable accessory described later disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a drop movable accessory (described later) simulating a claw capable of dropping in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided. It is prepared for. A board substrate holder 6023 is fixed below the back box 3001. The board substrate holder 6023 is provided with a main control board box 6024 for housing a main control board for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof. Further, a peripheral board box 6022 for storing a peripheral control board is attached to the back surface of the back box 3001.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the shutter-type movable accessory 6301 includes an upper shutter body 6302 and a lower shutter body 6303. The upper shutter body 6302 is supported by the back box 3001 so that it can be moved back and forth between the back of the upper part of the center accessory 2300 and the center of the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400 at the front surface of the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400, and the lower shutter body 6303 is supported by the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400. Is supported in such a manner that it can be moved back and forth between the back side of the lower part of the center accessory and the central part of the liquid crystal display device. The peripheral control board moves the upper shutter body 6020 and the lower shutter body 6303 separately or simultaneously according to the gaming state, and the upper shutter body 6302 and the lower shutter body 6303 are combined on the front surface of the image 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The integrated shutter body is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the drop movable accessory 6250 suddenly drops a relatively large width from the non-opening region on the top of the game panel 1100 to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, the gaming machine has a liquid crystal on the gaming panel 1100 side (game area 5a side) when the player's attention is directed to the above-described upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (touch panel 246). It can be directed to a display device. Next, the details of the drop movable accessory 6250 will be described. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the falling movable object as viewed from the front, FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the falling object as viewed from the back, and FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view of the falling combination as viewed from the front. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the falling combination as seen from the back, FIG. 58 is a front view showing a first operation of the falling combination, and FIG. 59 is a second view of the falling movable combination. It is a front view which shows operation | movement.

  The falling movable accessory includes a falling body 6250a imitating a claw, an arm body 6250b that supports the falling body, and a folder 6250c that supports the base 6251 of the arm body 6250b and controls the falling behavior of the falling body 6250a. Configured. The folder 6250c is fixed to the back box 3001 so as to be behind the center accessory 2300 on the right side of the game area 5a.

  The folder 6250c is configured such that the drive mechanism 6250f of the arm body 6250b is accommodated by the front cover 6250d and the rear cover 6253e. The drive mechanism 6250f includes a cam 6251f that contacts the bottom surface of the taper portion 6250e of the base 6251, a first motor 6250g that rotationally drives the cam 6251f, a first rail 6250h that guides the vertical movement of the base 6251, and The second rail 6250i, the rack 6250j that moves up and down along the second rail 6250i, the pinion 6250k that meshes with the rack 6250j and moves the rack 6250j up and down, and the second motor 6250m that rotationally drives the pinion And. The first rail 6250h is formed to be approximately half the height of the folder 6250c, and the lower end of the first rail 6250h is fitted into and supported by a rib 6250r on the inner surface of the rear cover 6253e. When the falling body 6250a descends, the lower end of the base 6251 abuts against the rib 6250r, so that the lowest descending position of the falling body 6250a is regulated at substantially the center of the folder.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the cam 6251f is in contact with the tapered portion 6250e of the base 6251 and the tapered portion 6250e is supported by the maximum diameter of the cam 6251f (FIG. 58 (a)), the falling body 6250a is It is supported at its uppermost position. When the cam 6251f reciprocates in the clockwise direction within a small angle range by the first motor 6250g, the contact position between the cam 6251f and the bottom surface of the tapered portion 6250e slightly moves up and down as shown in FIG. Along with this, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line, the falling body 6250a also moves up and down so as to be slightly exposed from the upper end position of the center accessory 2300. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the cam 6251f is increased and the engagement state between the cam 6251f and the bottom surface of the tapered portion 6250e is finally released, the dropping body 6250a freely falls and the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the back side of the center accessory 2300. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), FIG.

  From this state, when the second motor 6250m rotates the pinion 6250k to raise the rack 6250j (FIG. 59 (b)), the falling body 6250a also rises as if pushed by the rack 6250j. After the falling body 6250a is raised to the uppermost position, the first motor 6250g rotates until the cam 6251f contacts the bottom surface of the tapered portion 6250e, whereby the falling body 6250a is supported by the cam 6251f and returns to the uppermost position. . Next, the second motor 6250m rotates the pinion 6250k in the reverse direction to lower the rack 6250j to the lowermost position. Unlike the first rail 6250h, the second rail 6250i has a length substantially equal to the vertical length of the folder 6250c in order to guide the vertical movement of the rack. Note that the position of the cam 6251f and the position of the rack 6250j are detected by the photosensors 6250p and 6250q, and the peripheral control board is rotated according to the output from the photosensor. To control.

  Next, an information management device 5000 and a network for managing various information of a plurality of gaming machines installed in a game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 61A. FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an example of a schematic diagram of an information management apparatus and a network for managing various information from a pachinko gaming machine and a CR unit. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to communicate with other pachinko gaming machines 1 and external devices such as an information management device 5000 (so-called hall computer) described later.

  On the game hall (hall) side, an information management device 5000, a member management device 5100, a relay device 5200, and a network 5250 are provided. The information management device 5000, the member management device 5100, and the relay device 5200 are LAN cables or the like. As a result, the network 5250 is formed.

  The information management device 5000 collects various information from the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed in the hall and the CR unit 6 installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the relay device 5200 and the network 5250. , Monitor the player's game. The various information collected includes the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The member management apparatus 5100 manages member information of players who have registered as members. Member information includes the player's personal information and information on the money stored. When a prepaid card (member card, one-day card) is inserted into the CR unit 6 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, member information is acquired from the member management device 5100. At this time, the number of visits to the game hall may be updated as member information.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 61A, two pachinko gaming machines 1 and two CR units 6 are connected to the relay device 5200, and various information from the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 is stored in a network 5250. To the information management device 5000. The information management device 5000 counts various information received for each machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed in the hall.

  When the information management device 5000 receives request information from the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the relay device 5200 and the network 5250, the information management device 5000 transmits information to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is the request source. At this time, the information management device 5000 analyzes the received request information, determines whether or not it is normal, and if it is not normal (abnormal), requests to retransmit the request information. Respond to the original pachinko machine 1. If the request information is not normal, for example, the signal may have changed due to the influence of noise or the like.

  On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to acquire information from the information management device 5000 via the relay device 5200 and the network 5250. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can transmit / receive information to / from other pachinko gaming machines 1 in addition to the information management device 5000. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be configured to execute various effects based on information acquired from the outside. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires information from the outside, only the peripheral control board 4140 (so-called sub-board) that controls the production so as not to affect the game is acquired by the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside. You may be able to do it.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, communication is performed with an external device via an external terminal board 784 connected to the payout control board 4110 and an external information transmission / reception board 5500 connected to the peripheral control board 4140. Communication from the external terminal board 784 is unidirectional communication for transmitting information from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and communication from the external information transmission / reception board 5500 is bidirectional communication.

  In addition to the information management device 5000 and other pachinko gaming machines, the external device from which the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires information may acquire the individual member's gaming information from a member management device that manages member information. . Furthermore, by connecting an effect management device (effect control server) for managing the effect control information to the network 5250, the effect contents may be controlled on the game hall (hall) side. Furthermore, a network 5250 may be connected to the Internet or the like, and an effect management device that can be used in a plurality of game halls may be provided.

  Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61B to 66. 61B, 62, and 64 are block diagrams of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board. 61B shows the configuration of the main control board, FIG. 62 shows the configuration of the payout control board and the power supply board, and FIG. 64 shows the configuration of the peripheral control board. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal plate such as a game ball that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU. FIG. 66 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 61B, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

  The main control board 4100 controls the progress of the game, and mainly includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Yes.

  The main control MPU 4100a is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The ROM stores, for example, a main control program that controls a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on and that controls a gaming operation.

  The main control input circuit 4100b receives detection signals from various detection switches. The main control output circuit 4100c outputs various signals to an external substrate or the like. The main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d drives various solenoids for a movable accessory. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors a sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a predetermined voltage.

  In addition to RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 4100a includes a watch for monitoring the operation (system). It also has a dock timer and functions for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various detection switches are input to various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). The main control output circuit 4100c includes a main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function and a main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function has a reset function in which a reset terminal is provided for forcibly resetting information in which various signals are input to various input terminals to output various signals to an external substrate or the like. .

  The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals.

  On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function is based on the information because the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured to output signals from various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the start port switch 3022 and the general winning port switch 3020 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. The start port switch 3022 is a generic term for the first start port switch and the second start port switch, and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2005c. The general winning opening switch 3020 detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2104.

  In addition, detection signals from the gate switch 2352, the count switch 2110, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 are input to the main control MPU 4100a via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. Input to the input terminal of the port. The gate switch 2352 is a general term for the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the normal gate 2005a and the valid gate 6010n. The count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2003. The magnetic detection switch 3024 is attached to the back unit 3000 and detects fraud using a magnet.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function is output. Outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid (movable piece 2005b drive solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. To do.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that the panel relay terminal plate 4161 and the function display are displayed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Signals are output to various displays via the substrate 1191. The various displays include a first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol display 1186, a first special symbol storage display 1184, a second special symbol storage display 1187, a normal symbol display 1189, and a normal symbol storage display. A device 1188, a gaming status indicator 1183, and a round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that the payout control board is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Various information (game information) is output to 4110. Further, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. ) Is output.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the start opening switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110, whereas the general winning opening switch 3020 is used. The contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2005c, and the gate also passes frequently, so that the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 is also frequent. Occur. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352.

  In addition, when a big hit gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2003 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so that the count switch 2110 also frequently detects the game balls. To do. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, since game balls do not frequently enter the general winning opening 2004, detection by the general winning opening switch 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening switch 3020.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of a predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby providing a payout control board from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to 4110 as serial data.

  When the payout control board 4110 has successfully received various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. The payer ACK signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data at the input terminal.

  When the control MPU 4100a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, it sends a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Output to 4100ca. The main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined serial output port. Then, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, is connected to the bus 4100ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 71).

  The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (see FIG. 71).

  The main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. Then, the serial management unit 4100aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 4100aea and starts transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 67). Capacitor BC0 allows main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM in power-off processing even when power is shut off.

  Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when an operation switch 860a of a payout control board 4110 (to be described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110. The RAM clear signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. The main control MPU 4100a completely erases (clears) the contents of the main control built-in RAM, triggered by the input of the RAM clear signal.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like includes a payout control unit 4120, an operation switch 860a, and an error LED indicator 860b. The payout control unit 4120 performs various controls related to payout. The operation switch 860a also has various functions. The operation switch 860a also has a function as a RAM clear switch, and is based on a detection signal output by the operation, and is incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”). The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in is output. The error LED display 860b displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control input circuit 4120b, a payout control output circuit 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. The payout control MPU 4120a is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The various control programs include a payout control program for controlling a power-on process executed when the power is turned on and controlling a game medium payout operation executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on.

  The payout control input circuit 4120b receives detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout. The payout control output circuit 4120c outputs various signals to an external substrate or the like. The payout motor drive circuit 4120d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 744. The CR unit input / output circuit 4120e exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). A watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud are also built-in.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control program serializes various information related to games (game information) from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payouts as payer serial data transmission signals via the payout control I / O ports. Serial data is received by the method.

  Also, the payout control program generates an error occurrence command and an error release navigation command, and sends each of them as a payer serial data transmission signal to the reception port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port. Output as serial data (command transmission means).

  The error occurrence command includes a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) generated when an error has occurred in the game ball payout operation. The error cancellation navigation command includes a 16-bit (2-byte) command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) created based on an operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 860a as an error cancellation unit. It is.

  In addition, the payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 860a, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program outputs a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying a closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, and the main body When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various detection switches are input to various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 4120b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are output to the various output terminals. It is comprised as a circuit output from.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and includes a payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function and a payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function. It is configured. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function has a reset function in which a reset terminal is provided for forcibly resetting information in which various signals are input to various input terminals to output various signals to an external substrate or the like. . The payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is not provided with a reset terminal and does not have a reset function.

  The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal based on various output terminals.

  On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function is based on the information because the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. The circuit is configured to output signals from various output terminals.

  The detection signals from the ball break switch 750 and the counting switch 751 are first input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payball case inner substrate of the prize ball device and the payout control input circuit 4120b. Yes. The ball break switch 750 detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path of the prize ball device, and the counting switch 751 detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball path of the prize ball device.

  The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is first input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device, the board in the prize ball case, and the payout control input circuit 4120b. Has been. The rotation angle switch 752 detects a detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The door frame opening switch 618 detects opening of the door frame with respect to the main body frame, and the main body frame opening switch 619 detects opening of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame.

  The detection signal from the full switch 550 is first input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 192, the power supply board 851, and the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 860a. ) To the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  When the payout control MPU 4120a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a payout control output circuit with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to that effect (payer ACK signal). By outputting to 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the main control board 4100.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, thereby providing the payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100.

  When the main control board 4100 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. The main payment ACK signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a is driven from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The signal is output to the dispensing motor drive circuit. The drive signal input to the payout motor drive circuit is output to the payout motor via the prize ball case substrate. Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the error LED display 860b from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following.

  For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, the fact that it is “normal” is notified. Further, when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is notified that “connection is abnormal”. Specifically, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110.

  When the number “1” is displayed, the fact that it is “out of ball” is notified. Specifically, the fact that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is informed based on the detection signal from the ball break switch 750. When the number “2” is displayed, it is informed that it is “sphere”. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, so that the payout rotator is Notifying that rotation is difficult.

  When the numeral “3” is displayed, it is informed that it is a “counting switch error”. Specifically, the fact that a malfunction has occurred in the counting switch 751 is reported based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751. When the number “5” is displayed, it is notified that a “retry error” has occurred. Specifically, it is notified that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value. When the number “6” is displayed, the fact that it is “full” is notified. Specifically, it is informed that the game balls stored are full based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550.

  When the numeral “7” is displayed, it is notified that “CR is not connected”. It is informed that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6. When the number “9” is displayed, it is informed that it is “in stock (the prize ball stock (unpaid) is present)”. Specifically, it is notified that the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number.

  The payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 is output via a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 to an external terminal board via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The hall computer (information management device 5000, FIG. 61A) installed in the center is informed of the number of game balls and various information (game information, error contents related to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error), respectively. ing.

  The external terminal board and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to cause the hall computer to Does not malfunction or fail. In addition, an abnormal voltage may be applied from the hall computer to the main control board 4100 that advances the game via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout, resulting in malfunction or failure. I am trying to do it. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, a frequency display plate 365, a main door relay terminal plate 880, and a lending device connection terminal such as a game ball The data is input to the CR unit 6 through the plate 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. A signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls. Further, a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining degree indicator 365c is output to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the degree display plate 365, and the signal is output to the remaining degree indicator. It is input to 365c. The CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Yes.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 67) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is turned off.

  Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Input to the input terminal of the port. The payout control MPU 4120a determines a RAM clear signal for completely erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and using this as a trigger, completely erases (clears) various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. ) This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function.

  Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected).

  Between the board of CR unit 6 and gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and payout control board 4110, gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869.

  The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are supplied to the frequency display plate 365. .

  A ball rental switch 365a and a return switch 365b are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and a remaining frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted.

  The ball LG switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (the ball lending switch 365a is turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 365b is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The data is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three digit segment indicators, one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be turned on. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6.

  Digit signals DG0 to DG2 (3 signals in total) and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) are rented from the CR unit 6 to the remaining frequency indicator 365c. It is input via the device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Digit signals DG0 to DG2 are signals for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are signals for designating contents to be displayed by lighting a designated one-digit segment display.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c sequentially emits the one-digit segment indicator according to the digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and the contents of the light emission of these three-digit segment indicators are lent out. It can be visually recognized through the display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d.

  The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by a built-in voltage creation circuit. When the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending state, the logic of the ball lending possible signal TDL is controlled to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission is the remaining lending display unit 363. Can be seen through. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, when the ball rental button is pressed, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental switch 365a is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Is input. When the ball lending operation signal TDS is input, the CR unit 6 outputs the ball rental request signal BRDY to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. .

  The CR unit 6 then issues a single payout operation start request for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ as a signal is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. To the CR unit 6 via Also, PRDY, which is a signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. To do.

  In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return switch 365 b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

  Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 includes a power switch 852, a power supply control unit 855, and a launch control unit 857. The power switch 852 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and electrically connects or disconnects AC 24 volts (AC 24 V). The power control unit 855 generates various power sources. The launch control unit 857 performs launch control by the launch solenoid of the hit ball launcher and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid.

  The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor improvement circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, and a power supply generation circuit 855d. The synchronous rectifier circuit 855a operates the power switch 852 to rectify AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 855b improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. The smoothing circuit 855c smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 855b. The power generation circuit 855d generates various DC power supplies for supplying various substrates from the electric power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c.

  The launch control unit 857 has a launch control circuit 857a as a main component, and performs launch control by a launch solenoid and ball feed control by ball feed. An operation signal from the potentiometer 512, a detection signal from the touch switch 516, and a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 are input to the firing control circuit 857a via the handle relay terminal plate 192.

  The potentiometer 512 electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a. The touch switch 516 detects whether a palm or a finger is touching. The firing stop switch 518 detects whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped at the will of the player.

  In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 857a, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 4110.

  The firing control circuit 857a performs control to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and to output it to the firing solenoid 654.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150, a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165, and a volume adjustment volume 4140a. .

  Peripheral control unit 4150 performs effect control based on various commands from main control board 4100. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 controls the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and controls the detection of the touch state of the touch panel 246, and is housed in a speaker box provided on the main body frame. Sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame is performed.

  The RTC control unit 4165 is a time measuring unit that holds calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second. The volume adjustment volume 4140a adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by rotating the knob portion.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control”). Are described as “peripheral control external WDT4150e”.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Also, it stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power-on and controls the rendering operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c stores various information (for example, on the game board side) that is continued across the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed every time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input. Information for managing schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400, schedule data for defining light emission modes such as various LEDs, and the like) are stored.

  The peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing a special performance flag, etc.). The peripheral control external WDT 4150e monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally.

  Further, the peripheral control unit 4150 controls the effect operation by receiving the passing information of the game ball by the switch of the effect gate 6011 and the input information of the operation of the effect operation means such as the upper plate effect button 257.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ) Cannot hold the stored content. On the other hand, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d receives the backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board, and stores the stored contents in 50%. It can be held for about an hour.

  Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. As a result, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d cannot retain the stored content and loses the content.

The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset in hardware.
That is, the reset is performed when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e by outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, and can be prevented from being reset.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, control signals are transmitted to various boards for effect control such as the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 based on the received various commands. .

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a drives the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 by lamp driving. The data is transmitted from the board serial I / O port to the lamp driving board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). In addition, game board side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the motor drive board to the periphery. It transmits to the motor drive board | substrate 4180 via a control output circuit.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor provided on the door frame from a peripheral I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The signal is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate. Further, the door side emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame is output from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. The signal is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch provided on the handle unit 500 for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit, and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Then, the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit via the peripheral door relay terminal plate, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I / O for operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is input to the port.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies (movable accessories) provided on the game board 5, and further, a gate switch of the effect gate 6011 The detection signal from the switch and the detection signal from the push switch such as an effect button are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 or the like. The serialized detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to be able to transmit and receive various types of information to and from an external device via the external information transmission / reception board 5500. The external information transmission / reception board 5500 is attached to the game board 5 similarly to the lamp drive board 4170 and the motor drive board 4180, and is provided via the relay device 5200 and the network 5250 provided on the game hall (hall) side. Sends and receives various information with external devices. The external device is, for example, an information management device 5000 that is a hall computer installed in a management room of a game hall (hall). Further, it may be another gaming machine or a device other than the information management device 5000.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to be able to transmit and receive various types of information via the external information transmission and reception substrate 5500 by bidirectionally transmitting and receiving various types of information between the external information transmission and reception substrate 5500 and the external device. As described above, the communication between the external information transmission / reception board 5500 and the external device is two-way communication, whereas the connection between the external terminal board 784 connected to the payout control board 4110 and the relay device 5200. This is different in that it is unidirectional communication from the external terminal board 784 to the relay device 5200.

  Since the communication between the peripheral control board 4140 and the main control board 4100 is unidirectional communication from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, the probability of jackpot is changed even if information received from an external device is used. For example, the game value given to the player cannot be changed. As will be described later, since it is possible to configure an effect based on information received from an external device, it is possible to execute an effect rich in variations.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, peripheral control various serial I / Os. Port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah. On the other hand, for the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, Various data are read and written via the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h. On the other hand, various data is read from and written to the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between various storage devices and various input / output devices without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The various storage devices include a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and the like. The various input / output devices include various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, a built-in peripheral control WDT 4150af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag, a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, and the like. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac has four channels (DMA0 to DMA3).

  More specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and various input / output devices built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Data is transferred independently without going through. Therefore, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac reads / writes from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac Read and write via bus 4150ai. Various input / output devices incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a include various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, and the like. It is.

  Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac does not pass through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the various storage devices externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a and various input / output devices built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. , Perform data transfer independently. Therefore, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac reads / writes data from / to various storage devices externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h, while the various types of built-in peripheral control MPU 4150a. Data is read from and written to the input / output device via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  Note that various storage devices externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a include a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and the like. The input / output devices built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a include various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, and the like. included.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad is a dedicated controller that controls various buses and exchanges various data between various devices such as various storage devices and various input / output devices. The various buses include an internal bus 4150ah, a peripheral bus 4150ai, and an external bus 4150h. The various storage devices include a central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and the like. The various input / output devices include various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, the hardware reset is performed. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa outputs a clear signal for clearing the peripheral control built-in WDT timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period (until the timer expires). If not, it will be reset. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count by outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, and can be prevented from being reset.

  The various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Further, the detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output.

  Further, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output the lighting signals of the LEDs mounted on the upper decorative board of the upper decorative unit in the door frame 3. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume, and is divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion. The pressed voltage is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6.

  The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame are provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from the speakers. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is more likely to be changed to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player). The notification sound for this is also output from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame 3. The notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source to be described later) is set by the program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. The built-in VDP 4160a) can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages.

  By configuring as described above, for example, even if a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume to set the volume to a low level, the hall is accommodated in the speaker box provided on the main body frame. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker units 430 and 480 provided on the door frame and the speaker frame is reduced, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or the player is cheating. Sometimes a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging time-series screen data for defining the screen configuration, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series.

  The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is defined.

  The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. Also, some data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. A brightness correction program is included. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is mounted with an LED type, the luminance correction program corrects a decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. Specifically, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on, the current date and time, luminance setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is corrected. Correct based on information. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 that is set is included. For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, Corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Further, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, 80% which is further added by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to light up.

  If 12 months have already passed since the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Further, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, the correction information acquired for this 75% is further increased by 10% to 85%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to light up.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc, various control program copy areas 4150cd, and various types. A control data copy area 4150ce and a backup unmanaged object work area 4150cf are provided.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca specially stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc store a dedicated copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca.

  The various control program copy area 4150cd specially stores a copy of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. The various control data copy area 4150ce specially stores a copy of various data, various control data, various schedule data, and the like stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. The backup non-management target work area 4150cf exclusively stores information that is not to be backed up among various types of information that are updated by executing various control programs.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. On the other hand, for the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect and the respective states. It is cleared to zero when it is an instruction to start the effect (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 61B is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on).

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is composed of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms). Bank0 (1fr) is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input. Is stored exclusively as a backup target. Bank 0 (1 ms) stores effect information (1 ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated, as a backup target.

  Here, the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information. “0” following “Bank” is various information updated by executing various control programs. It means that it is a storage area normally used for storing. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size.

  As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control MPU 4150a A V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Therefore, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame), so that “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1fr) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is stored. A storage area to be set. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is a door side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. This is a storage area in which STL-DAT is set.

  The received command storage area 4150cac is a storage area in which various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are set. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is a storage area in which various types of information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) are set.

  The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It has been.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is set with door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Storage area. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, game board side motor drive data SM- for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 is provided. This is a storage area in which DAT is set.

  The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is a memory in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set. It is an area. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is a variety of information (for example, an operation unit) that acquires the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit and the operation of the pressing operation unit based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit. Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit, operation history information of the press operation unit 405, and the like) are set.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas (first area and second area).

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The Furthermore, when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. That is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the peripheral control part steady process, the lamp is displayed when the previous peripheral control part steady process is executed. The processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set. Furthermore, when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. That is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. For example, when the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the peripheral control section steady process, the previous peripheral control section steady process is executed. At this time, the processing proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. Side motor drive data STM-DAT is set. Furthermore, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. ing. That is, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Is done. For example, when the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process, the previous peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt is set. When the process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Is done. Furthermore, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. That is, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. For example, when the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag in the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process, the previous peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. At this time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page.

  Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is output by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc are copied at high speed as production backup information (1fr). In addition, the production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is displayed every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The control DMA controller 4150ac is copied at high speed as production backup information (1 ms) to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc.

  Also, the consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match. Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing.

  The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). (1fr) is copied at high speed. Further, the memory stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are copied at high speed. The consistency of the page is determined based on whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair.

  The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). (1fr) is copied at high speed. Further, the memory stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) are copied at high speed. The consistency of the page is determined based on whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). This is an area for managing pages. The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing a total of two pairs as one page, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. . Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Each time the steady process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed. Further, the production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the production backup information (1 ms), and every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process. Is executed at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. A program for executing high-speed copying by these peripheral control DMA controllers 4150ac is shared. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

  The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is provided with a backup management target work area 4150da, a backup first area 4150db, and a backup second area 4150dc. The backup management target work area 4150da exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da.

  The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is that the power-on command from the main control board 4100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including power recovery due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (For example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 61B is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). However, it is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero.

  Further, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the handle unit 500 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the handle unit 500 in accordance with the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target.

  Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size.

  Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page.

  The production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the production backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). (SRAM) is copied at high speed. The consistency of the page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). (SRAM) is copied at high speed. Page consistency is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area that manages Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and manages this one pair as one page. The backup second area 4150dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair and managing this pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

  The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 controls the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the music stored in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the music flowing from the speaker provided in the door frame. Sound control such as sound effects is performed. As shown in FIG. 64, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 includes a sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a, a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, and an audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  The built-in sound source VDP 4160a has a built-in sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”) and a game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Control drawing. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b stores various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits serialized music, sound effects and the like as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) and an operation menu background image described later are displayed as sprite data used for displaying a screen or image described later. Operation menu background image data, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and display of a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for the main body frame rear image data used for displaying the main body frame rear surface image where the position of each part on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player, the service mode screen is displayed. Service mode screen image data used, break tie used to display break timer setting screen Over setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display an suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit (operation unit) of the operation unit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Furthermore, the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Output. Thereafter, in response to the input of a V blank signal, which will be described later, the next screen data following the first screen data in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150. Extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Furthermore, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Output to. Thereafter, in response to the input of the V blank signal, the next sound command data following the head sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150. Extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  As described above, in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

  In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a has a built-in VRAM for storing drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. (Hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”).

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, based on the input screen data, from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and the game board side character data and the upper plate side character data as shown in FIG. To create sprite data. Then, based on the created sprite data, drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from the channel CH1 and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are synchronized.

  Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a detection signal corresponding to the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 246, and when the detection signal is received, outputs it to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, so that the effect control program can output the contact surface of the touch panel 246. The contact state can be grasped.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and the upper plate side The image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 is moved up from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 244. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. This is the data to generate above.

  The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a is acceptable is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. Sound data such as sound and sound effects are extracted to control the built-in sound source. Then, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Further, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker units 430 and 480 provided in the door frame 3 are serialized. Audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  Note that the sound command data includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition, the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include the sound data of effect sounds such as music and sound effects and sub-volume values for adjusting the sound volume, as well as the occurrence of problems with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pachinko games. The sound data of the notification sound for notifying the clerk or the like of the hall 1 of the illegal act on the machine 1 and the sub volume value for adjusting the sound volume are incorporated.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value. For the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode to be described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the handle unit 500.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. As sound output control, first,
Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized. Then, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually amplified to a master volume value that is a volume that flows from the speakers housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker units 430 and 480 provided in the door frame 3. Furthermore, the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and sound is output from a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined performance sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value, so that it is accommodated in the speaker box provided on the main body frame. The volume that flows from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame is set to an allowable maximum volume.

  Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized. Then, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. Further, the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  On the other hand, for the notification sound, a knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the unit. Then, the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, and the amplified notification sound is serialized. And output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 A control for playing a notification sound for notification to a store clerk will be briefly described.

  First, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound are incorporated. The sound data of the recorded track is synthesized with the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume. The volume of the synthesized production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame. The effect sound and the notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. At this time, since the production sound is muted, although the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the production sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. doing.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from a speaker housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame and a speaker provided in the door frame for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. Is set again as the sub-volume value. Set to a value) and flows from a speaker housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame and a speaker provided in the door frame.

  Thus, while the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. When a notification sound flows for notification to a hall clerk or the like, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame. . However, since the silenced production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data, the speaker is provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame after a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but starts to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts flowing until it has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined time has elapsed. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used for drawing on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

  When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speakers provided on the door frame.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of a differential method between the left and right sides between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Thus, for example, even if the plus and minus signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal are synthesized by the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Therefore, when the left audio data is converted into one left audio data, noise components are canceled and noise components are removed, so that noise countermeasures can be taken.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured with the RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above. Furthermore, effects based on the acquired calendar information and time information can be developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, or the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED luminance setting information when an LED type backlight is mounted on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to control the backlight ON / OFF or only ON when the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, input date and time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is mounted with an LED type, etc. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  In addition, the luminance setting information stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance.

  When the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, when the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit is operated during a period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is being demonstrated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board. It is also displayed on the side liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Then, the calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the handle unit 500 according to the setting mode screen, and the backlight luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is set to a desired luminance. Can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1400 is corrected.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 and specifies the date / time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on. Furthermore, the current date and time are specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second. Then, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5% and the currently set game board side liquid crystal display The brightness setting information including the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the device 1400 is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, Corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Further, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, 80% which is further added by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to light up.

  If 12 months have already passed since the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Further, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, the correction information acquired for this 75% is further increased by 10% to 85%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to light up.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later, the current set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 Calendar information and current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

  As described above, the volume adjustment volume adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame by rotating the knob portion. Can be done. As described above, the volume adjustment volume is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak can rotate the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music is received from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. And sound effects.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announces contents related to game effects (for example, an announcement that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 will be rendered more powerful, or that it is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player) Notification sound for the sound etc. also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. However, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source) The built-in VDP 4160a) can be controlled and adjusted.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume low, the speaker and the door frame accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided on the main body frame Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker is reduced, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the loud sound (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to hinder music and sound effects. On the other hand, in addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the advertisement sound, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is rendered more powerful, It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state is advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume, the dial operation section and the press operation section of the operation unit are adjusted. By operating, you can switch to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, when the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit is operated during a period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is being demonstrated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board. It is displayed on the side liquid crystal display device 1400.

  The volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation section or the press operation section of the operation unit in accordance with the setting mode screen. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150akZ converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume from an analog value to a digital value, The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, and the effect sound Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the above-described notification sound or notification sound.

  Thus, in this embodiment, two methods for adjusting the volume are prepared. One is a method of adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume. On the other hand, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section or the pressing operation section of the operation unit. It is a method to do.

  Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame must be opened from the outer frame. Therefore, only the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume control volume. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect.

  Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 in a waiting state. When a dial operation unit or a pressing operation unit of the operation unit is operated within a certain period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation section and the pressing operation section of the operation unit according to the setting mode screen.

  This allows the player to adjust the volume of music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, the operation unit dial You can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the operation unit or the press operation unit, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk loud and feel noisy music or sound effects, The pressing operation unit can be operated to reduce the sound volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, and when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is repeatedly demonstrated (for example, 10 times). ) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized.
In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit. In addition, if the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and felt the loudness adjusted by the player, the music or sound effects would be noisy. Thus, the player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Next, a power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 and 68 are block diagrams showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 67 shows details of the power supply board, the main control board, and the payout board. 68A shows the details of the peripheral control board, and FIG. 68B shows the details of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 851 and are the same ground (GND).

  The power board is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the power supply board includes a power supply control unit 855 and a launch control unit 857. The power supply control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The unit is a circuit for driving and controlling the launch solenoid and the ball feed unit ball feed solenoid of the ball hitting device.

  The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power supply generation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 and to the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 855a rectifies 24 volt (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor improving circuit 855b. The power factor improvement circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the firing control circuit 857a and the power generation circuit 855d, respectively.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. The capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110.

  The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 launches a game ball toward the game area 5a with launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle body using + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power supply. The drive current for (fire) is adjusted and output to the firing solenoid is performed. Further, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid of the ball feeding unit, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit accepts one game ball stored in the upper plate of the dish unit, and the game ball received by the ball feeding member is received. Control to be sent to the ball hitting device side.

  The power generation circuit 855d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied with the + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V created by the power generation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as will be described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from + 12V from the payout control board 4110. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control filter circuit 4100h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and the payout control. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the substrate 4110 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V created by the power supply creation circuit on the power supply board flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 A current flows toward the direction. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is supplied with + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply board returns to the payout control board 4110 and again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board. Can be recharged. As a result, when +5 V created by the power generation circuit is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, but the stored contents are held by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110. In addition to being connected, it is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 4100g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board. Be able to. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit of the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g cannot create + 5V. In this case, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained. It has become so.

  Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 67, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply board are supplied to the payout control board 4110. Of these three types of voltages, two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The three types of voltages + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply board are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral control board 4140 is provided via the frame peripheral relay terminal board. And the peripheral door relay terminal board.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, the three types of voltages supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a panel motor or solenoid. Of the three types of voltages, +5 V and +12 V types of voltages are supplied to the external information transmitting / receiving substrate 5500.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 4140b that generates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board. Yes. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal module 470a of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246, respectively. . Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power source 1900b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the backlight power source 470b of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, respectively.

  The external information transmission / reception board 5500 includes a transmission / reception circuit 5500a for bidirectionally exchanging various types of information with external devices such as the relay device 5200 provided on the game hall (hall) side. Then, + 5V is supplied as a control voltage for the transmission / reception circuit 5500a, and + 12V is supplied as an inter-board voltage (voltage for generating an ON / OFF signal) for communication between the external information transmission / reception board 5500 and the peripheral control board 4140. Yes.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards and the like of the door frame 3.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0, + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. For example, + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110.

  The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). Circuit. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. . Note that +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110 at all.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the main control board 4100 includes a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. In the main control board 4100, a power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is a + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. The circuit configuration is as follows. Therefore, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and is created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100. The + 5V power line is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. The power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the door board decoration board and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  Next, the circuit of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 61B will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board. FIG. 70 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 71 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 67 will be described, and then the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 4100 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a + 5V generation circuit 4100g, and a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, a peripheral circuit is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 MHz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is applied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and + 5V is output from which the noise component is removed from the third terminal. Has been. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the like.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 via the resistor MR0. And are electrically connected. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal.

  Since it is configured as described above, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. When the + 5V generation circuit 4100g cannot generate + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  As shown in FIG. 69, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6.

  When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. Each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca. On the other hand, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The attached main control output circuit 4100ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 69, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal and the ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

  The main control input circuit 4100b has a payout shown in FIG. 62 in addition to the detection signals from the general prize opening switch 3020, the start opening switch 3022, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 61B. This is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch provided on the control board 4110 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input will be described.

  First, as described above, the operation switch includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and a main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) included in the memory, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. The operation switch has a function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power and a time after turning on the power (after a period of time when the function is performed as the RAM clear, that is, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the turning on of the power. And a function of canceling an error in (1). The main control board 4100 does not have an error canceling function that the payout control board 4110 has. Therefore, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 4100 has a built-in main control. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging as a RAM clear signal for clearing the RAM.

  The main control board 4100 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch is not operated, while the logic is HI from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch is operated. The operation signal thus obtained is input from the payout control board 4110 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch provided on the dispensing control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded with the ground (GND). The collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits). And is shaped and output without inversion of the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A)) and electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. ing.

  The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch on the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch is provided. Pulled up to + 12V side by pull-up resistor. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic is input as LOW. On the other hand, when the operation switch is operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor, and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. The When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the main control MPU 4100a does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM. To do.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch is operated, an operation signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor and becomes logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also configured. It will be turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The The main control MPU 4100a instructs to clear the RAM for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. to decide.

  The operation signal from the operation switch is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the boards of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, it is higher than the control reference voltage +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020 and the start opening switch 3022 that are directly input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. On the other hand, the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, the gate switch of the effective gate, and the gate switch that triggers the normal lottery are input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. 61B. Since the detection signal from is not directly input to the main control board 4100, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and detects a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 4100a when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign. 4110 is output to the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison.

  The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment.

  The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 70, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 that is grounded to ground (GND). Furthermore, the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 70, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has one end connected to the + 12V power line and the other end of the resistor. The other end of the resistor MR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND) is electrically connected. Further, the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23. Furthermore, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal.

  In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) The logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set.

  The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In this embodiment, the D type flip-flop MIC22 is input to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal because the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that the edge of the clock signal does not change and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. .

  As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure, and the + 12V power failure. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals.

  Note that the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22. A GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded to the ground (GND). The negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of output in the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. And the signal output from 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of D type flip-flop MIC22 is input into input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU4100a as a power failure warning signal.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Then, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is output from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the payout control board 4110 as a payout power failure notice signal, and to the peripheral control board 4140. Output as a warning signal.

  The main control input circuit 4100b electrically connects the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. In the main control input circuit 4100b, as shown in FIG. 70, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Further, non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A)). Is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, a signal whose logic is HI is output from the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Therefore, the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, whereby the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input port PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal is input to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22. Therefore, the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, whereby the transistor MTR20 is turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 becomes the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

  The main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the payout control board 4110 as a payout power failure notice signal. As shown in FIG. 70, the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is configured as an open collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is the resistance of the main control input circuit 4100b described above. It is electrically connected to MR26 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 via a resistor MR30.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness).

  When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. In the circuit 4120b, one end of the circuit 4120b is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is a previous-stage switch circuit. A circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the subsequent-stage transistor MTR22 is a subsequent-stage switch circuit. These switch circuits are turned ON / OFF by a signal output from a 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned off, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned off. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32, so that the succeeding transistor MTR22 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The preceding switch circuit is also turned ON. Then, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the latter transistor MTR22, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the latter transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the latter transistor MTR22 is turned off. The switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is input to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Therefore, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW, and is input to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21, so that the previous transistor MTR21 is turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal is input to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22. Therefore, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21, so that the previous transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal. As shown in FIG. 70, the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is configured as an open collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is the resistance of the main control input circuit 4100b described above. It is electrically connected to the MR 26 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In FIG. 6, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is input to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Therefore, the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, whereby the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal is input to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22. Therefore, the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, thereby turning on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). 4140 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 4100b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is provided with one transistor.

  On the other hand, the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 4140 are the same logic, but the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function for outputting a signal output from the 1Q terminal to the payout control board 4110 as a payout power failure notice signal is provided with two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic obtained by inverting the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 4140. It differs from the logic and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 4100a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Are electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. On the other hand, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function has one end of + 12V in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness). The other end of the pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the power supply line is electrically connected. Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line at one end in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor connected to.

  This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control input circuit 4100b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. 4100, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting between the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, between the boards with 4110 and between the boards with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, Dispensing control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a This is because doing a power failure notice by the logic of the control reference voltage is + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

  Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a, receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 61B as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. .

  On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as a main payout serial data transmission signal and do not have a reset function. Transmit to circuit 4100cb. Next, a main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the dispensing control board 4110, and serial data to be transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. It is transmitted as a signal to the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function. Further, a main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above is input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a. Further, for example, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payout serial data reception signal described above is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, or the start port shown in FIG. 61B. Detection signals from various switches such as the switch 3022 are input via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 61B. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. 61B. To the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. And it outputs a motion signal equally and outputs a drive signal respectively to various indicator from resetting function main control output circuit 4100Ca.

  Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

  +12 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 69 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The electric charge is applied as + 5V. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers at least a command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa to the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec. Transmission can be completed from 4100 aea as main circumference serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control board 4100. It has become. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa to the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec, and transmits from the transmission shift register 4100aea. When transmitted as main-circumference serial data, a main-circumference serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 69 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and has the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded with the ground (GND). Further, the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the serial control I / O for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the O port. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 by applying + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main circumference serial data transmission signal can complete the transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, and the main circumference serial data in the middle of transmission. The data transmission signal, that is, the main peripheral serial data is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being cut off or lost.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor When the MTR 50 is turned off, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. Therefore, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI is the serial I / O for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Input to the input terminal of the port.

  On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50. When the transistor MTR50 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. Therefore, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is sent to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Input to the input terminal.

  Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state where the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained.

  Further, for the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that is configured by the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 and functions as a communication interface circuit, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is used as a communication voltage. When the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, is electrically connected in parallel, a power failure or instantaneous interruption occurs. Even if the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 from the + 12V power supply line decreases, the communication voltage is applied by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 that is the second auxiliary power supply. So that the applied state can be maintained You have me. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  Also, transmission of all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control output circuit 4100cb is completed. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h, and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. The main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50, and functions as a communication interface circuit.

  As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are all made to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since the transmission can be completed to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control output circuit 4100cb having no function, the peripheral control board 4140 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

  Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 are circuit diagrams showing circuits and the like of the payout control unit. 73 and 74 are circuit diagrams showing the payout control input circuit. FIG. 75 is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. FIG. 76 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 77 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. + 5V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. Furthermore, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V from the power supply board 851 is first caused by the capacitor PC0 to generate a ripple (an AC component convolved with a voltage). Removed and smoothed. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the like. .

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 via the resistor PR0. And are electrically connected. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal.

  With the configuration described above, as described above, when +5 V created by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the capacitor BC1 is charged. The charged electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the payout VBB to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the payout control unit 4120 is reset as a peripheral circuit in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

  As shown in FIG. 72, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit.

  One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca. On the other hand, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, respectively.

  Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 72, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

  The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 72, and the blackout monitor circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 62, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input via the power supply board 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, and the like.

  First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described. Subsequently, a circuit to which a detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, a circuit to which a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank switch is input, and an operation switch A circuit to which an operation signal is input will be described. Note that the full switch and various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 62 have an output terminal of an open collector output type, and are detected from various detection switches. Since the circuit configuration to which a signal is input is substantially the same, here, a circuit to which a detection signal from a full switch is input will be described.

  The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) when the door frame is opened from the main body frame, and the door frame is closed by the main body frame. The switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). .

  The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded with the ground (GND). The collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the non-inverted buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverted buffers). A signal waveform input to one (PIC20A) is shaped and output without inversion) and electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is connected. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a door opening signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 61B via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

  When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The

  Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784.

  In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. The outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal that is logic HI is input to the main control board 4100. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is applied to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame opened from the outer frame, and the body frame is closed to the outer frame. The switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 61B via a wiring (harness). The main control board 4100 is electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  A circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784.

  In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 4100 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. Then, the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, A main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, a main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 61B is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the main frame door opening signal, or the main body frame 4 is the outer frame 2. Although it is impossible to determine whether the player is in an open state, it is determined that a state in which the player does not occur during a normal game that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are open is occurring. be able to.

  Further, since the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. . The hall computer determines whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Although it cannot be performed, it can be determined that a state in which the player has the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 opened is not generated during the normal game.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body due to some cause. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 4100 even when a normally open switch is used or a disconnection occurs. An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  A transmission line for transmitting a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded with the ground (GND). The collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Further, non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40A)). Through the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. The payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 4110. On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. The payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 by pulling up the voltage to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness).

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. Sometimes, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110. Then, when the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR40 is turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110. Then, when the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 by the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, the transistor PTR40 is turned on and applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40. Voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure at voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The On the other hand, when there is no sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a by the power outage notice are the same logic.

  The detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. The output terminal of the full switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and electrically connected to the first terminal of the full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. This full-tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND). The third terminal of the full-tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to the first terminal of the full-tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 through the resistor PR44b, and is connected to the base of the transistor PTR41 through the resistor PR45. It is electrically connected to the terminal. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50.

  In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND). The collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the non-inverted buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverted buffers). A signal waveform input to one (PIC40B) is shaped and output without inversion) and electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is connected. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off in response to a detection signal from the full switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 520 is full with the game balls stored. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the game balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. In 4110, a signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and becomes logic HI is input to the payout control board 4110. On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is grounded on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. A signal that is pulled down to the (GND) side and whose logic becomes LOW is input to the dispensing control board 4110.

  When the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled up on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. A signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the resistor 44a and becomes logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, whereby the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is grounded on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. When a signal that is pulled down to (GND) and becomes logic LOW is input to the above-described base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to a switch circuit constituted by the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full switch three-terminal filter PIC50. I was trying. On the other hand, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 62 are passed through a T-type filter circuit such as a full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. Without being directly input to each switch circuit. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit attached to the door frame, it is compared with the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, etc. provided in the prize ball device attached to the main body frame 4. Then, the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes very long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit is full with the game balls stored. Further, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped and paid out. Control to stop payout of the game ball by the rotating body is performed.

  In other words, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped, and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. In addition, although the storage space is full of stored game balls, the above-described prize ball passage is achieved by continuously controlling the payout motor 744 to rotate the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate, the payout motor 744 is overloaded, the payout motor becomes overloaded, abnormally generates heat, breaks down, or is paid out There may be a case where a mechanism for transmitting the rotation shaft of the motor to the rotational motion of the payout rotating body breaks down. Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted so that a noise signal is first removed from the detection signal from the full switch 550 in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50.

  The first terminal and the second terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are grounded to the ground (GND). The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the noninverting buffer ICPIC40 (the noninverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffers). An inverting buffer circuit is provided, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC40C) is shaped and output without being inverted.) And the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a Connected.

  The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43, and the signal changes as an RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Is input.

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 69 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line.

  When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 860a repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a previous-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a subsequent-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. The operation switch 860a has a RAM clearing function within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, and a time period after the power-on (after a period of time during which the function is performed as a RAM clear, that is, a predetermined period from the time of power-on). And a function of canceling the error after elapses). The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time of turning on the power). In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. Inputting to the base terminal of the PTR 42 turns on the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage and turns on the switch circuit in the previous stage. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR43, which is the voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR43, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the succeeding transistor PTR43 is turned off, and the succeeding switch The circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 860a is the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. Entered.

  When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic clear signal HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When the signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous-stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF, and the previous-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. Further, when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, which is the voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR43, is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the succeeding transistor PTR43 is turned on, and the succeeding switch The circuit is also turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW because the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC 60.

  The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied thereto, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4120da. It has come to be.

  The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. Connected to. Then, based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor driving voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, the third terminal that is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60, and Each is supplied to the 10th terminal and supplied to the payout motor 744.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 correspond to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. ing.

  When a payout motor drive signal is input to each of the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, a drive pulse which is an excitation signal is supplied. 744 and corresponding phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase). This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744, and rotate the dispensing motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

  Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 63 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and one payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 63 are supplied. In addition, the payout control board 4110 has an EXS signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or completed and a payout operation for paying out a ball via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. A PRDY signal indicating that it is possible or impossible. As shown in FIG. 76, an input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off.

  The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND). The collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffers). 72. A circuit of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. 72 is input through a circuit (which is shaped and output without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A)). It is electrically connected to the terminal. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 851 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 851. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 851. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. ing. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. It has become.

  The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded with the ground (GND). The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 has one end electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight A non-inverting buffer circuit, and shaping and outputting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inversion), and an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a Electrically connected. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Then, the BRDY signal whose logic applied to HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. ing. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. It has become.

  The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal notifying that the one-time payout operation is started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73.

  EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off.

  The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device.

  On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is sent via the resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off.

  The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC 74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. Further, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by a pull-up resistor PR86 and electrically connected to the built-in control device. Has been. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device.

  On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

  Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives serial data from the main control board 4100 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b as shown in FIG. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a has the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout blackout signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) Signal 1 etc.) are input respectively. Further, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is input via the payout control input circuit 4120b, or the ball shown in FIG. Detection signals from the cut switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like are input via the payout control input circuit 4120b, respectively.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. Further, the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. The payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. Further, for example, a payer ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 62 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output to the error LED from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Or output to the display 860b.

  Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the payout control board 4110 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has a 15 round big hit information output signal, a two round big hit information output signal, etc. Jackpot information output signal, probabilistic fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and middle information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

  The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), in addition to the outer frame door opening information output signal described above, an award ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor, From the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, in addition to jackpot information output signals such as 15 round jackpot information output signals and 2 round jackpot information output signals, information output signals during probability variation, special symbol display information output signals The game information signals such as the normal symbol display information output signal, the time reduction information output signal, and the start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer (information management device 5000, FIG. 61A) installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown). Is monitoring. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits and the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and whether or not the player plays a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. For example, a big hit of 15 rounds may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal. As a result, the hall computer can accurately grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hit and the number of occurrences of 15 rounds of big hit. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit of two rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of big hits for rounds and the number of occurrences of big hits for two rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of big hits for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of big hit gaming status, Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. FIG. 78 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. FIG. 79 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 80 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. FIG. 81 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switch 3020, the start opening switch 3022, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 61B. Based on the above, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740), which is a storage tray, is a game ball as a rental ball. When such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “CR machine”, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), a payout control board is connected from the main control board 4100. Command balls 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to 4110. One prize ball is designated by command 10H, and two prize balls are designated by command 11H. ..., 15 prize balls are designated in the command 1EH The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor for the designated number of prize balls. .

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are electrically connected (such pachinko gaming machine). 78 (b)), as shown in FIG. 78 (b), command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. 1 designates one prize ball, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,..., 15 prize balls are designated by the command 2EH. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 78 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

  The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 61B, and, as shown in FIG. 79, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning one special symbol display 1185, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command is an instruction to start the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode. The special symbol 1 designation command is for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 synchronization effect. The variable state designation command indicates the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation starts. The special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 synchronization effect. The special symbol 1 synchronization effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined). The change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the switch of the second start opening, and the second special symbol of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The display 1186 is composed of commands with names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command is an instruction to start the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode. The special symbol 2 designation command is for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts. The special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 synchronization effect. The special symbol 2 synchronization effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is an instruction to start the jackpot opening. The grand prize opening 1 opening N-th display command is an instruction to start the 1st to 16th round opening of the big prize opening 1 (during the opening of the N-th round of the big prize opening 2003 or the opening start). The big prize opening 1 closing display command is an instruction to start the closing of the big prize opening 1 between rounds (the closing of the big prize opening 2003 between the rounds or the start of closing). The grand prize winning 1 count display command tells that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize winning opening 2003 detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 61B). is there. The jackpot ending command is an instruction to start the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is an instruction to display the jackpot symbol information.

  The small hit opening command is an instruction to start the small hit opening. The small hit release display command is for instructing start of small hit release (during opening of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 or start of opening at the time of small hit). The small hit count display command is an instruction for a small hit medium / large prize winning effect (an effect when a game ball that has entered the big winning port 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit). The small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening. The special winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is transmitted when the first winning prize opening 1 of the 16th to 16th rounds is released (when the Nth round of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). The big prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the big prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize 1 count display command is used when the winning prize 1 is opened and when the count to the winning prize 1 is changed (when the winning prize 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize 2103 is displayed. (When detected by the count switch 2110). The jackpot ending command is transmitted when the jackpot ending starts. The jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the big winning opening is opened (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening. The small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball having entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit). The small hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power-on shown in FIG. 62). Or give instructions).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the operation of the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  The general pattern synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 61B. It consists of commands with the names of production start, universal symbol designation, universal figure synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general chart synchronization effect start command is an instruction to start the general chart synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode. The common symbol designating command is for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The general chart synchronization effect end command is an instruction to end the general chart synchronization effect. The variable state designation command indicates the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the common figure synchronization effect start command is normally transmitted at the start of the symbol 1 fluctuation start. The common symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization production starts. The general symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined). The change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the usual winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  The ordinary electric role effect is related to the movable piece 2005b that is opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 61B. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Display and Ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per universal map is an instruction to start opening per universal map. The normal power release display command is an instruction to start during normal power release (a state in which the movable piece is expanded by driving the start opening solenoid). The ending command per base map is an instruction to start the ending per base map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per universal map is transmitted at the start of the opening per universal map. The normal power release display command is transmitted when normal power is released (when the movable piece is expanded by driving the start opening solenoid). The ending command per map is transmitted when the ending per map is started. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the notification display category includes a prize abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, door closing, main body frame opening, and main body frame closing. It consists of commands. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating) (a game ball is entered into the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 even though it is not a big hit) When the count switch 2110 detects), an instruction to start a prize abnormality notification is given. The connection abnormality display command instructs, for example, the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command instructs, for example, the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection between the main control board 4100 and the start port switch 3022, the count switch 2110, etc. occurs. Is. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is an instruction to start the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 61B.

  The door frame opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door is open, the door opening notification is instructed. The door frame closing command is an instruction to end the door opening notification when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command indicates that the main body frame opens from the outer frame based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In this case, the main body frame release notification is instructed. The main body frame closing command is an instruction to end the main body frame opening notification when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is transmitted when any one of the start port switch 3022, the count switch 2110, etc. is disconnected or short-circuited. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected.

  Further, the door frame opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). . The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame is closed with respect to the main body frame based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame is opened from the outer frame based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). The main body frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned “7 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 80, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error cancellation navigation is performed. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 64). Inspects various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the operation of the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2005c based on a detection signal from the start opening switch 3022. The start of the production is instructed respectively. The change shortening operation end designation command is used to instruct a state transition from the change shortening operation state to the change shortening non-operation state. The high probability end designation command is an instruction for state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Special symbol 1 memory command is 0 to 4 special symbol 1 hold (the game ball has entered the first start port 2001 and is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display board. No ball number (holding number)). Special symbol 2 memory command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold (the game ball has entered the second start opening 2005c and is still used for the change display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display board. No ball number (holding number)). The normal symbol memory command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0-4 pieces (the number of balls that the game ball passes through the normal gate 2005a and is not yet used for the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display of the function display board (the number of hold) )).

  The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is a first special based on the special symbol 1 hold pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display on the first special symbol display of the function display board. This command is for instructing the start of pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the symbol display. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the second special symbol display of the function display board, and the second special based on the special symbol 2 hold This command is for instructing the start of pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the symbol display.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch, (When a game ball enters the second starting port 2005c based on the detection signal from the mouth switch), the voice is mainly received from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. Sent to notify the effect. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed) after digesting the specified number of change reductions. The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stoppage period) after the change is confirmed after digesting the high-probability count in the case of “high probability N times”.

  The special symbol 1 storage command is used when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the first start port 2001 and is still used to display the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display board. In the state where there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the second start opening 2005c and the retained number increases, the second special symbol display unit uses the retained number to display the variation of the special symbol. Sent when the number of holds decreases). The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the second start opening 2005c and is still used for the special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display of the function display board. In the state where there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the second start opening 2005c and the retained number increases, the second special symbol display unit uses the retained number to display the variation of the special symbol. Sent when the number of holds decreases). The normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 operation when the number of held balls changes (the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used for the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display of the function display board after the game ball passes through the normal gate 2005a) In the state, when the game ball further passes through the gate part and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases from the number of holds used to display the normal symbol display normal symbol variation) .

  The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 actuated holding balls increases (when a game ball enters the first start port 2001 and the number of holdings increases). Is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 actuated reserve balls increases (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2005c and the number of reserves increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is transmitted mainly for voice notification from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame at the start opening winning prize. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 64 uses the start opening prize command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by sound from speakers housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame and speaker units 430 and 480 provided in the door frame, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored. It is the specification of using for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening prize command, and the voice is received from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. Some specifications do not report.

  Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 81, each command from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared, and bit 0 (B0, “B”) in the ball breakage. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) includes a ball round, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the ball round, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2). Value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in the case of a retry error. Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 62 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state is changed, and during error cancellation navigation. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

  Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If the backup data is normal, a process (recovery process) for returning to the power failure occurrence state is executed according to the backup data stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.) are performed.

  If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM. If the RAM clear switch for instructing clearing of backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) during the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 is activated to the peripheral control board 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. Note that the backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In the present embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device.

  When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  When the power interruption occurs, the processing of the gaming machine is changed from the state before the power failure when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In order to start, it is a process which memorize | stores the state at the time of a power failure as backup data in RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power interruption occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing executed according to whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected immediately after the start of the loop. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the main control MPU 4100a updates the random numbers used in the game. 2 is performed (step S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. Note that if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”), the power supply voltage is actually stopped when the process at the time of power supply interruption is started. Therefore, in the above process, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, the timer interrupt process is performed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S11 to step S18 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In the present embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, and the normal electric accessory (movable piece 2005b) is controlled to change the open / closed state of the second start opening 2005c. Execute. In the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 based on the progress of the game. A special electric accessory (that is, an opening / closing member 2006 that opens and closes the big prize opening 2003 by an attacker solenoid) is controlled, and a process of changing the open / closed state of the big prize opening 2003 is executed.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (also called a big hit determination or a big hit lottery), a big hit gaming state is generated in the big hit determination A special jackpot symbol used to determine the special symbol stop symbol (the symbol associated with the jackpot type (probability jackpot, number of rounds, etc.)) Reach determination random number, special symbol indicators 641 and 642 used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform high expectation effects such as reach effects when it is determined that neither of them is a small hit (losing) Variation display pattern random number (variation time random number) used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time, etc.) of the special symbol displayed on Average per determining random number used for determining whether to control the movable piece in an open state to open and close the second start hole 2005c (usually lottery per determination), and the like.

  Further, as will be described later, the jackpot determining random number according to the present embodiment is also used for determining whether or not a specific condition performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been lost (lost) is satisfied. The In addition, the jackpot design random number is the type of jackpot that is performed when it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won (whether the probability variation function or the time shortening function is activated, the big jackpot game (special bonus game)) It is also used for the determination related to the type of jackpot in which the opening mode of the winning opening 2003 is determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to occurrence of the big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol per random determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 2005b is controlled to be opened. Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not to control the movable piece 2005b to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant, and the player Can be prevented from being disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

  Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process.

  In the special control process, first, first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2005c. Then, after the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a responds to the state of the process flag among a plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Selectively processing.

  More specifically, when the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is completed, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If 0 (YES in step S120), the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), after setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery, the processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (either the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator) After the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) from the start to the stop display is determined, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed based on the time-out. Stop the fluctuation display. After that, if it is determined in the change start process (step S130) that the result of the change display game is a big win, the process selection flag is updated to “3”. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied even though the big hit is lost (the win is won for the small hit), the process selection flag is updated to “4”. However, if the winning combination is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss), the process selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the type of jackpot is determined, and after the release mode (the number of rounds, the opening time, the number of winning game balls, etc.) at the jackpot 2003 according to the type is set, the processing flag is set. It is updated to “5”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game start process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game start process, after the opening mode (opening number and opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening and closing member 2006) at the big winning opening 2003 according to the small hit is set, the processing flag is set to “6 Is updated.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the big hit game process (step S240) is executed. In the jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode at the big prize opening 2003 set in the jackpot game start process (step S200). In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after determining whether or not to operate the probability variation function or the time reduction function. In this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, main control MPU 4100a executes the small hit game process (step S250) assuming that the process flag is 6 if the process flag is not 5 (NO in step S230). In this small hit game process (step S250), the opening / closing operation applied to the open / close member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode at the big winning opening 2003 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). In addition, when the small hit game process ends, the process flag is updated to “0”, that is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  As described above, when any one of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

  Next, the first / second start opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start opening winning processes.

  In the first and second starting opening winning process (step S110), the process for determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c, and the winning is roughly divided. On the condition that it is determined that there has been, the process related to the update of the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor (switch), it is determined that a game ball has been won at the second start port 2005c (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second holding is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a, first, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second start opening 2005c (a big hit determination random number, for a big hit symbol) A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the type of special symbol or the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has been won at the second start opening 2005c (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). With such a configuration, the hold display can be quickly updated when the hold display on the second start opening 2005c side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like through the control by the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the detection signal from the second start port sensor is not output in the process of step S201, or the value of the second hold number counter in the process of step S202. When it is determined that the upper limit value is 4, next, in step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor, it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first start port 2001 (YES in step S205), and then The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (such as the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  In other words, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first start port 2001 (a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number) as the first start hold storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command is set, which indicates that a game ball has been won at the first starting port 2001 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, the hold display can be quickly updated even when the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the hold display on the first start port 2001 side through the control by the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the game ball has not won the first starting port 2001 in the process of step S205, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter. Is determined to have reached the upper limit of 4, at this point, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) for the first starting port 2001 is executed after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) for the second starting port 2005c is executed. . However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 2001 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 2005c may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of big hit lottery, probability variation lottery, small hit lottery, and variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is preliminarily determined. It is a process to determine. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the preceding determination process, by comparing the random number and the preceding determination table, the lottery result when the lottery using the random number is performed (whether the big hit or the small hit, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) (The determination made in this way prior to the lottery is also called “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (predetermined determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (the effect is “read ahead”). Also called “Direction”).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition. When the game condition does not satisfy the specific condition, the main control MPU 4100a A winning notification command that does not represent a result may be transmitted. For example, when the fluctuation display resulting from winning at the first start port 2001 is not started immediately after winning, but is suspended, the main control MPU 4100a displays a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process related to the winning. You may send it. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, but transmits a winning notification command that does not indicate the result of the preceding determination process. May be. The specific conditions related to the second start opening 2005c may be the same.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a firstly sets the values (first start memory) of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642. It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start memory number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 are the storage areas for the first start memory and the second start memory (special symbol random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (see FIG. 94). Therefore, if the value of the hold number counter is “0” (YES in step S301), the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are related. When it is determined that none of the start conditions is satisfied, and the process flag is updated to “1” as the process of step S318, the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both the first start memory number and the second start memory number are not “0” (NO in step S301), a special symbol is updated to update the order of execution of the big hit lottery that is in the hold state. Shift processing is performed in the random number storage means 4515 and 4532 for use (steps S302 to S310).

  As shown in FIG. 94 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage areas [1] 4515a to [4] 4515d). These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the first starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the second starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). In each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d, a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, and the like are stored. A jackpot symbol random number storage area 4581 is provided.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a case where a big win is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and a case where a big hit is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side Although there is no difference in the expected value of the profits (such as the number of winning balls that can be earned) given to the player in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, it will be won in the hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device On the other hand, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, the probability of winning a small hit is “0%”, so that only the lottery process on the second special symbol side is executed. The small hit gaming state is not generated.

  In this regard, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the winning (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device is not won. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated so that all the lotteries (the lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning at the second starting port 2005c are digested first. As a result, until the number of holds for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes “0”, only the game (the lottery on the second special symbol side) that is not won in the above-mentioned small win is sequentially performed. Will be able to. In addition, as will be described later, in the game state in which the so-called time-shortening function is activated, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, which is the side to be digested, is not interrupted. Since the control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the game ball to the second start opening 2005c, which is the trigger for the execution of the game, the continuous execution of only the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side is performed. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 94, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested. Whether or not the value of the holding number counter (second starting storage number) corresponding to the display 642 is “0”, that is, the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. Judge whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the storage area [1] 4532a A random number related to the two special symbols is read out and acquired (step S303). In other words, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number), as well as the processing related to the jackpot lottery, the special symbol variation pattern (variation Games for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, processing for setting the gaming state, etc. The second start game can be progressed with the winning of the ball.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532d) are shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively (step S304). Accordingly, at least the storage area [4] 4532d is vacant, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the reservation number counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp is performed so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode in the second special symbol memory display 644. . Note that the special symbol variation flag set to “1” in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 94, the main control MPU 4100a indicates that no random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage unit 4532 in the process of step S302. If it is determined (YES in step S302), the random number relating to the first special symbol is read from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 and obtained (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way is not only the process related to the jackpot lottery, but also the process related to the setting of the special symbol variation pattern, the process related to the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, and the setting of the gaming state As a result, the first start game can be progressed by winning the game ball at the first start port 2001.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage areas) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515d) are respectively shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d is vacant, and new start information (hold) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “2” in the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side (first start game) is in progress (step S309). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the reservation number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S310). At this time, the drive control for lighting of the lamp 643 is performed so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting state in the first special symbol memory display 643. Done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to “2” is reset when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). A jackpot determination table when the probability fluctuation is not activated, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot is selected. On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation state (YES in step S312), a table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, a table set with a high probability of being a big hit is selected. In the present embodiment, when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal), the probability of being a big hit is set to 1/400, and when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high), the probability of being a big hit is set. It is set to 10/400.

  The main control MPU 4100a selects a table in step S313 or step S314, and then, based on that table, determines the jackpot determination for any special symbol acquired in step S303 or step S307. It is determined whether the random number for use is a random number corresponding to a big hit (big hit value) (step S315 (big hit lottery)). If it is a jackpot value (YES in step S315), the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number for any special symbol acquired in the same manner in step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit value (small hit value). (Step S319). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S320) assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318. To do. However, if it is not the small hit value (NO in step S319), it is determined that a predetermined condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318 without passing through the process in step S320. In the process of step S318, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the fluctuation start process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a random number value generated with a random number range of, for example, 0 to 99 as a big hit symbol random number regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected. Are prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random values is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number. Then, the acquired random number value is used for the process of determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S316. For example, if the random number value is 0 to 52, the jackpot A is determined. If it is 53-57, it is determined as big hit B, if it is 58-63, it is determined as big hit C, if it is 64-81, it is determined as big hit D, and if it is 82-99, it is determined as big hit E. .

  According to such a determination method, as shown in FIG. 95, the probability that the type of jackpot (the hit with the operation of the condition device) is determined to be “big hit A” is “53%”, and the type of jackpot The probability that the jackpot is determined to be “big hit B” is “5%”, the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit C” is “6%”, and the jackpot type is “big hit D”, “big hit” The probability of being determined as “E” is “18%”, respectively.

  Here, when winning the “hit A”, regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding win, after the jackpot game corresponding to the win of the big hit A is performed, the probability variation function and the time shortening function (open extension function) ) Are controlled in a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both are activated. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot A, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as a long-open game where the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated many times (16 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. The long-time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10). This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the following conditions is satisfied: In the long-time opening / closing pattern, the time for which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened is longer than the time for which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened in the small-time opening / closing pattern described later. That is, in the game per long opening, a large amount of prize balls (about 1750 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, even when winning the “big hit B”, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the hit, after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit B is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension function) Both functions are controlled to a probable external advantageous gaming state in which both of them are activated. However, in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot B, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as a middle-open game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment). . That is, in the game per middle opening, a medium amount of winning balls (about 1000 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning the “big hit C”, the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed only when the gaming state at the time of the win is “external advantageous gaming state in which the time reduction function operates”. After that, the probability variation function and the time shortening function (open extension function) are both controlled to the probability-changing external advantageous gaming state in which both functions are activated. However, if the game state at the time of the selection is not the “external advantageous game state in which the time reduction function operates”, after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension extension) Function) is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function is activated. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot C, the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment).

  On the other hand, when winning the “big hit D”, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the hit, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit D is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension function) ) And the high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function operates. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot D, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening, which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in the present embodiment).

  On the other hand, when winning a “hit E”, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the corresponding win, after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of that jackpot E is performed, the probability variation function and the time shortening function (open extension function) Are controlled to a normal gaming state (normally a disadvantageous gaming state). In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot E, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in the present embodiment).

  Incidentally, when such a big hit A to E (hit with the operation of the condition device) is selected as a small hit (hit without the operation of the condition device), the opening / closing member 2006 is opened and closed for a short time. The game is only played per small opening (small hit game) repeated a small number of times (in this embodiment, twice in this embodiment), and the same game was played before the small opening game (small hit game) was played. There is no such thing as a different gaming state. The small time opening / closing pattern refers to the passage of a predetermined small time (for example, 3 to 6 seconds) after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined small number (for example, two) of games. This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the winning conditions is satisfied in the big winning opening 2003. That is, in the game per small opening (small winning game), since only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in the present embodiment) can be obtained by the player as a privilege, the opening / closing member 2006 operates. In spite of this, it can be said that attention should be paid to the handling (positioning) of the game design in that the game interest may decrease.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, “big hit A” to “big hit E” are prepared as types of hits (big hits) that accompany the operation of the condition device. Therefore, the processing in step S317 will be described in more detail. When the big hit type is “big hit A”, the big hit flag A is turned on (set), and when the big hit type is “big hit B”, the big hit flag B is turned on (set). ), The big hit flag C is turned on (set) when it is “big hit C”, the big hit flag D is turned on (set) when it is “big hit D”, and the big hit flag E is set when it is “big hit E”. It will be in the ON state (set).

  Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Judge whether there is. As a result, when it is determined that the big hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S401), a big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process, which will be described later, is set so that the fluctuation pattern when the big hit is won is set. Is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S401), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” as the processing in step S403. Judging. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S403), it is determined that the player has won the small hit as being in a state where a specific condition is satisfied although it is a loss. The small hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that the fluctuation pattern in this case is set (step S404).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S403), main control MPU 4100a performs a high expectation effect with a high degree of expectation for winning a big hit as a process in step S405 ( For example, it is determined whether or not to perform reach production. In the process of step S405, for example, when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87) is a predetermined hit value, it is determined to perform a high expectation effect, and the acquired reach determination is performed. When the random number for use is not a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is not performed. As a result, if it is determined that a high expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), a high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process, which will be described later, is set so that a variation pattern for performing the high expectation effect is set. This is performed (step S406).

  Regarding the number of predetermined hit values prepared for the random numbers for reach determination, the normal external disadvantaged game state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time reduction function operates) It is also possible to make the game state different for each of the game states of the probability variation external disadvantageous game state (only the probability variation function is activated) and the probability variation external advantageous game state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, the probability that it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value is “ In the normal external advantageous game state and the probabilistic external advantageous game state, the expectation at the time of reach is further increased (or so that efficient holding and digestion is performed) It may be determined that a high-expected performance should be performed with a lower probability. On the other hand, in the probable external disadvantaged game state, it is determined that a high-expected performance should be performed with a higher probability so that the possibility of a big hit can be made more conscious. Also good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main control MPU 4100a should not perform a high-expected effect with a high degree of expectation of winning a big hit (NO in step S405), the loss variation pattern when the high-expected effect is not performed (normally) The low-expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed so that (the loss variation pattern) is set (step S407).

  Here, the table set in the low expected loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in association with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holds is a predetermined value. When this is the case, the shortening variation is performed.

  However, in the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, the variation time is set so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side where the probability of winning a small hit is “0” is difficult to break. Has been. More specifically, when the number of reserves on the second special symbol side is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the shortened variation is not used in spite of the gaming state in which the time reduction function operates, and the shortened variation is employed in the normal gaming state. Only the variation time (variation time longer than the shortening variation in the normal gaming state) having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when not being played is selected. In addition, the variation time on the first special symbol side will not adopt the shortened variation regardless of the number of reserves, only the variation time having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when the shortened variation is not adopted in the normal gaming state. Is to be selected. As a result, when the gaming machine is in a game state in which the short-time function is activated, it is possible to suppress the holding of the first special symbol side where the small hit can be won, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a small hit. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that it is installed.

  As will be described later, as shown in FIG. 88, when the selection table related to the variation pattern is set in any one of steps S402, S404, S406, and S407, the main control MPU 4100a In step S410, a special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the set selection table. Next, in step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as an effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) or the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a command indicating the winning type, including winning or winning points).

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the value of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the timer (step S412), and sets the special LED activation flag to ON (step S413). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is performed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The change display concerning the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as a device is started. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 84 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. . Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big win lottery is shown based on the variation pattern shown by the effect command and the information shown by the winning information command through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Thus, the display effect is performed.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, the display effects in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are set as described above. Extend to the period after the stop of the variable display for the lighting pattern of multiple LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display without ending within the variation pattern variation time (extend the production time ), And may be executed so as to indicate that it has been lost at the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device (extended effect pattern in FIG. 104 (b)). In other words, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when a game per small opening is executed, a display effect that encourages the acquisition of a prize ball does not appear, and it is relatively early after it is shown that a big hit is lost. It is possible to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol hold-up), so that the extension that may give some expectation as an effect until the opening / closing member 2006 operates is preferably avoided. Become.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special symbol is displayed in contrast to the above-described display effect at the time of the small hit (extended loss effect) indicated that the special symbol is lost after the special symbol is stopped. There is also a display effect (extended jackpot effect) that indicates that the player has won the jackpot after the stop. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 does not end within the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the first special It was won for winning (big hit) with the operation of the condition device after extending to the period after the stop of the variable display on the lighting pattern of multiple LEDs as a symbol indicator or second special symbol indicator (Extended effect pattern in FIG. 104 (b)).

  In other words, in this case, the display effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as a simple loss effect (highly expected loss variation pattern) that appears when the big hit is lost. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. Can be suppressed.

  However, as the function display unit of the pachinko machine 1, eight LED groups that do not form a specific symbol may be adopted instead of the 7-segment LED. In this example, the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator constituted by 7 segment LEDs are each constituted by eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display and the second special symbol memory display are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display is constituted by two LEDs.

  This function display unit can provide the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are configured by eight LED groups that do not have any symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case where the 7-segment LED having the meaning by the numerical symbols is used. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the content displayed on the function display unit, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to production images and the like.

  When such a function display unit is adopted, the lighting mode (when the special symbol is stopped) of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the small hit, It is desirable to perform control so that it appears as an aspect that is similar to each other, such as a difference from whether or not one LED is lit up from the lighting state of the symbol (when the special symbol is stopped). That is, in this case, when the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped, it is immediately determined which result is obtained (at least after the effect is extended). It will be difficult to grasp until a short time has elapsed until the winning is clearly indicated. Therefore, it is possible not only to concentrate on the extended display effect (extended effect), but also to the period after the special symbol stops due to a decrease in interest in the special symbol (multiple LEDs). Even a display effect that has been made can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the guessing that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 due to the particularity when the extended effect appears, and as a result, according to the winning of the small hit It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of big hit will be described based on FIG. FIG. 96 is a table showing an example of the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, the normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and the normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3. In addition, ○ in the winning column in FIG. 96 means a big hit, △ means establishment of a specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), and x means failure of the specific condition at the time of loss (pure loss). To do.

  As described above, when it is determined that the big hit flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 88), the main control MPU 4100a performs the big hit as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 88). A big hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern in the case of winning is set.

  In the big hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal external advantageous gaming state (the time reduction function only operates), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function only operates) ), And a probability change external advantageous game state (both the probability change function and the time reduction function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, different big hit variation pattern tables (not shown) are prepared for each game state, and normally the external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time reduction function are both inactive. ), The normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 96 is selected regardless of the type of the big hit.

  As described above, when the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 is selected, the main control MPU 4100a is obtained by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87) while referring to the selected table T1. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). In addition, the stop (lighting) aspect of a 1st special symbol display or a 2nd special symbol display (LED) is also determined here.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbols, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1. Among them, nine specific values are assigned to the fluctuation number 1 (fluctuation time Ta1) (selection rate at big hit 9%), and 20 specific values are assigned to the fluctuation number 5 (fluctuation time Tb1) ( Selection rate at big hit 20%), 30 specific values are allocated to variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) (selection rate at big hit 30%), and 40 specific values are variation number 12 (variation time) Td1) is assigned (selection rate at jackpot 40%), and one specific value is assigned to fluctuation number 15 (fluctuation time Te) (selection rate at jackpot 1%). Thus, except for the big hit fixed variation number 15, the number of specific values (hit values) allocated tends to increase as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the big hit is won with the effect content “a (or a ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect is performed. Further, when the variation number 5 (variation time Tb1) is selected, the display effect indicating that the big hit is won with the effect content “b (or b ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, it is shown that the big hit is won with the effect content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect is performed. Further, when the variation number 12 (variation time Td1) is selected, a display effect indicating that the big hit is won with the effect content “d (or d ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 15 (variation time Te1) is selected, a display effect is displayed indicating that the big hit is won with the effect content “e” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The production content a, the production content a ′, the production content b, the production content b ′, the production content c, the production content c ′, the production content d, the production content d ′, and the production content e are all in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The types of display effects that appear (for example, the types of reach effects and the types of story effects) are different.

  Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1. Furthermore, the fluctuation time Td1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

  As described above, in the normal big hit variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). The main control MPU 4100a includes an effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command “01H” for variation number 1) and a winning information command (including winning or small winnings for winning). And a command indicating the winning type) (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta1 if the variation number is 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON. (Step S413), the processing flag is updated to “2” (Step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the jackpot variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the jackpot associated with the determined gaming state. A variation pattern table is selected, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous game state, whether the big win is won by lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side or lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side Regardless, the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 is selected, but when the first special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed, and when the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed. Thus, display effects with different contents may appear by selecting the big hit variation pattern table having different contents.

  Also, when it is determined that the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 96 is selected regardless of the big hit type. However, based on the state of the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit type, any of the normal big hit variation pattern tables prepared for each big hit type may be selectively used.

  In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to vary the selection rate of the variation pattern according to the type of jackpot, and when a specific variation pattern appears, it is possible to have a bias such as increasing the probability of being a jackpot of a specific type Become. In addition, even if the variation time is the same, it is possible to change the variation number (production command) according to the type of jackpot. In this case, only by confirming the production command, not only the variation pattern but also the big hit The type of can be grasped. Therefore, if the appropriateness is determined by comparing the effect command and the winning information command on the peripheral control board 4140 side, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 is improved. Will be able to.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 88) that the small hit flag is ON, the main control MPU 4100a is won for the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 88). The small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern at the time of turning is set.

  In the small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function only) Operation) and a probability change external advantageous game state (both the probability change function and the time shortening function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time-saving function are both not shown). 96 is selected, the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 96 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a obtains by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 877) while referring to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random variation display pattern random number (step S410). In addition, the stop (lighting) aspect of a 1st special symbol display or a 2nd special symbol display (LED) is also determined here.

  Here, if a value from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as a random display pattern random number for the special symbol, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal small hit variation pattern table T2. Of these, 35 specific values are allocated to variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selection rate at small hit 35%), and 30 specific values are allocated to variation number 6 (variation time Tb2). (Selection rate at small hit 30%), 30 specific values are allocated to variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (selection rate at small hit 20%), 5 specific values are variation number 13 (Variation time Td2) is allocated (selection rate at small hit 5%). In this way, the number assigned to a specific value (small hit value) tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, a display that shows the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Production is performed. When the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, a display effect is displayed in which the result of the big hit lottery is displayed while the effect content “b (or b ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, a display effect that shows the result of the big hit lottery is performed while the effect content “c (or c ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) is selected, a display effect that shows the result of the big hit lottery is performed while the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In addition, as such a display effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is shown, for example, a display effect showing that the big hit is lost or a game state in which a winning ball can be obtained by the operation of the opening and closing member 2006 A display effect (display effect that appears even when a big win is won) or the like is appropriately adopted.

  As will also be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result is obtained as a big hit lottery with the production content “a (or a ′)” appearing. A directing of what was done appears. The fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (fluctuation time) When the number 6) is selected, the production contents “b (or b ′)” appear, and a production of a pair appears as to what result was obtained as the big hit lottery.

  Further, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tc1 based on the fluctuation time Tc1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 (fluctuation number 9) or the fluctuation time Tc2 (fluctuation time). When the number 10) is selected, the production contents “c (or c ′)” appear in each case, and a pair of productions appear as to what results were obtained as the big hit lottery. The variation time Td2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) of the variation time Td1 based on the variation time Td1, and the variation time Td1 (variation number 12) or the variation time Td2 (variation time). When the number 13) is selected, the production contents “d (or d ′)” appear in each case, and a pair production of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

  As described above, in such a normal small hit variation pattern table T2, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). And an effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command “02H” for variation number 2) and a winning information command (the winning type including winning and winning hits per win) Are set (step S411). Further, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta2 for variation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON. (Step S413), the processing flag is updated to “2” (Step S414).

  On the other hand, in performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state Is selected, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted. However, when a small win is won in a gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (external advantageous gaming state), a single variation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) It is desirable that the same display process as the low-expected effect at the time).

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of highly expected production will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 88) that a highly expected effect should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a performs a highly expected effect as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 88). In order to set a variation pattern when performing, a high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S406).

  Even in this high-expected loss variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state ( It is determined whether the game state is one of the probability variation function only) and the probability variation external advantageous game state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a different high expectation loss variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each game state, and both the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time reduction function) are provided. 96 is selected, the normal high expectation loss variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 96 is selected.

  As described above, when the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 is selected, the main control MPU 4100a acquires the above-described step S303 (see FIG. 87) while referring to the selected table T3. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, if a value from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random number of the special symbol, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3. Among the values, 40 specific values are assigned to the variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selectivity 40% at the time of high expectation loss), and 17 specific values are the variation number 4 (variation time Ta4). ) (Selection rate at high expectation loss 17%), 25 specific values are assigned to change number 7 (change time Tb3) (selection rate at high expectation loss 25%), Thirteen specific values are allocated to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at the time of high expectation loss), three specific values are allocated to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) (Selection rate at high expectation loss 3% , (Selectivity 2% of the high expected loss) in which two specific values are assigned to the change number 14 (variable time Td3). In this way, the number of specific values (loss values) allocated tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, the winning content was lost on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “a, no development (or a ′)” appearing. Is displayed. Further, when the variation number 4 (variation time Ta4) is selected, a display effect or a liquid crystal display indicating that the player has lost the jackpot while the effect content “a, with development” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the display device 1400, a display effect indicating that the player has been defeated with a big hit is performed while the effect content “c ′” appears.

  Further, when the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected, it is shown that the winning hit was made in the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “b, no development (or b ′)” appearing. A display effect is performed. Further, when the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) is selected, a display effect or a liquid crystal display indicating that the player has lost the jackpot while the effect content “b, with development” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the display device 1400, a display effect indicating that the player has lost the jackpot is performed while the effect content “d ′” appears.

  Further, when the variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) is selected, a display effect is shown that the player has been defeated in a big hit while the effect content “c (or c ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) is selected, it is shown that the winning effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears. A display effect is performed.

  As will be described later, when the variation numbers are 4 and 8, it appears as a loss effect pattern with different effect contents depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Since the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern which is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side is set. In response to this, it is possible to cause production patterns having different jackpot expectations.

  Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2), or the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is selected, the production content “a” appears, A production of a pair about whether the result was obtained appears. However, when the variation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the production content “a” is displayed until the opening period before the opening / closing member 2003 is opened / closed by the opening / closing member 2006. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) according to the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11) as a reference. Depending on the control on the substrate 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As a result, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern that becomes the pair of the variation number 4 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

  Furthermore, the variation time Tb3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) of the length corresponding to the variation time Tb1, and the variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the variation time Tb2 (variation). When the number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, the production contents “b” appear in both cases, and a pair of productions appear as to what results were obtained as the big hit lottery. However, when the variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the variation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content “b” is displayed until the opening period before the opening / closing member 2003 is opened / closed by the opening / closing member 2006. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) according to the variation time Td3 (variation number 14) based on the variation time Td3 (variation number 14). Depending on the control on the substrate 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Td3 (variation number 14). As a result, the change number of the jackpot effect pattern that is the pair of the change number 8 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the change number 5 and the change number 12 as described above.

  Then, as described above, in such a normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). Then, an effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (eg, command “03H” for variation number 3) and a winning information command (including winning and winning winnings, including the winning combination) The command indicating the seed is set (step S411). Further, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta3 for variation number 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON. (Step S413), the processing flag is updated to “2” (Step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the high expectation variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is displayed. A selection is made, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  According to such a normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, a normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and a normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3, the big hit expectation degree is a display effect b rather than a display effect a. The display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the jackpot is won, it is determined that the jackpot is won when the effect e appears.

  Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the change time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 88) as the process of step S501. Determine whether the time is up. If the variation time set in the timer has not expired (NO in step S501), the variation processing is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S501), main control MPU 4100a sets special figure LED operation flag set to ON in step S413 to OFF (step S501). S502). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is performed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of special symbols) related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as a container is ended.

  Further, when the display effect for the big hit lottery is being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the main control MPU 4100a finalizes and displays the effect result in the display effect on the peripheral control board 4140 in order to end the display effect. A fixed stop command indicating the power is set (step S503). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control mode in the peripheral control board 4140, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended despite the reception of the definite stop command, and the subsequent opening period. As described above, the display effect may be controlled to be extended.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S504). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to “3” assuming that the special symbol is in a process stage where the special symbol has been variably stopped as indicated by the fact that the big win has been won (step S505). ), The process during change is terminated.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON as the processing of step S506 next when the big hit flag is not ON and it is a loss lost in the big hit (NO in step S504). to decide. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to “4” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the process stage where the special symbol is suspended as indicated by winning the small hit (step S506). S507), the process during change is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON and is a pure loss (a failure that does not satisfy the specific condition) (NO in step S506), main control MPU 4100a has been selected as a big hit or a small hit. As shown, the processing flag is updated to “0” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the variation is stopped (step S508), and the processing during variation ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is suspended in the process of step S130.

  Next, the big hit game start process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the big hit game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first activates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as a process of step S2602, a function (probability variation function) that increases the winning probability of winning (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device than when in the normal external disadvantageous game state or the normal external advantageous game state is being operated ( It is determined whether the state is a probability variation state. As a result, when it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation in any one of the probability variation external disadvantage game state and the probability variation external advantage game state (YES in step S602), the probability variation function The operation is stopped (step S603).

  Next, as the process of step S604, the main control MPU 4100a is operating a function (time-shortening function) that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2005c, with the operation of the probability variation function stopped in this way ( It is determined whether or not the short-time gaming state. If it is not determined in step S602 that the probability variation function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing step S603. As a result, when it is determined that either the normal external advantageous gaming state or the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state is in effect and the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S604), the operation of the time reduction function is stopped at this time. (Step S605).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a repeatedly opens the grand prize winning port 2003 in the same jackpot game as a process of step S606 so that the jackpot game is performed with the operations of the probability variation function and the time-shortening function stopped. The maximum number of round games (in this embodiment, 16 times or 9 times), the upper limit number (predetermined large number) at which a game ball can enter the big prize opening 2003 in each round game, The opening mode in the big hit game, such as the opening / closing operation limit time of the opening / closing member 2006 in each round game (a predetermined long time of the long time opening / closing pattern) is set. That is, in the process of step S606, first, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 87). Then, information relating to the “opening mode in the jackpot game” prepared in association with each determined jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot E) is read from the ROM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). And the read information is set. As a result, the big hit game can be executed with the above-described opening mode corresponding to the big hit type (big hit A to big hit E). If it is not determined in step S604 that the time saving function is in operation, step S606 is performed without executing step S605.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a prior to the jackpot game being played, an interval effect before the jackpot game is played (for example, an opening effect such as “Congratulations”) and a challenge bonus such as “Chance to win!” In order to be able to execute (effect), an interval effect command at the time of jackpot indicating the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the special bonus game (big hit game) is started is set (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the big hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped (extension as described above). Since an effect) can be executed, an interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this.

  That is, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) is set regardless of the type of the big hit because of the time required for the extended effect that appears even when winning the small hit. Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 84, so that the specific effect time indicated by the command is set (for example, 8 seconds). Through the later-described control by the peripheral control board 4140 side, either the interval effect as described above or the extended effect as described above is selectively performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S607 (step S608), and updates the process flag to “5”. (Step S609), the jackpot game start process is terminated.

  Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 91, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the same small hit game as the process of step S701 so that the small open game (small hit game) is performed. The number of times the grand prize opening 2003 is repeatedly opened (in this embodiment, twice), the upper limit number (predetermined small number) at which the game ball can enter the big prize opening 2003 at the time of opening, Sometimes the opening mode in the small opening game (small hit game) such as the opening / closing operation restriction time (small time opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing member 2006 is set.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interval effect before the small game is performed (for example, a challenge bonus effect such as “Chance to get a ball!”) Before the small open game (small game) is performed. Is set to an interval effect command at the time of a small hit indicating the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the small bonus game (small hit game) is started (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol at the time of winning the small hit (as described above) Since the extension effect) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific fixed time (for example, 8 for example) regardless of the symbol random number at the time of winning the small hit (the random number for the big hit symbol) due to the relationship with the time required for the extension effect that appears even when the big hit is won. Only the interval effect command indicating (second) is set. Such a time setting when the extended effect appears is prevented from being presumed to be a small hit, and as a result, the opening / closing member 2006 is operated in response to the winning of the small hit, and the game entertainment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 (step S703), and updates the process flag to “6”. (Step S704), and the small hit game start processing is terminated.

  As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. Through the control described later, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

  Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the jackpot game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first turns on the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (set).

  Here, the big hit game in-progress flag is operated in the OFF state when there is a processing status immediately after the transition to the big hit game processing (step S240). Therefore, when there is a processing status immediately after the transition to the big hit game process (step S240), main control MPU 4100a determines that the big hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801). Next, the process of step S802 is performed.

  In the process of step S802, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the above-described interval effect (opening effect for determining the big hit, challenge bonus effect for determining the opening of the big winning opening 2003 (determining the execution of the bonus game), or extension effect) is completed. That is, it is determined whether or not the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) set in step S607 (see FIG. 90) has expired. The interval effect timer (8 seconds here) has not expired, and the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect for determining the big hit, challenge bonus effect for determining the opening of the big prize opening 2003, or extension effect) is still being executed. In such a case (NO in step S802), the jackpot game process is temporarily ended, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires through the processes in steps S801 and S802 (repeat the interrupt process). )

  However, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, even if the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired as a result of such processing (YES in step S802), only this is a big hit Judgment as to whether or not the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n (specific reception port) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired so that the game does not start. Is performed (step S803). As a result, when it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the jackpot game process is temporarily terminated, and the process waits until it is determined in the process of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n (discounted). The opening / closing member 2006 of the big prize opening 2003 is held until a game ball is received by the valid gate 6010n after the time (in this case, 8 seconds) predetermined by the interval effect timer has expired. This is controlled to be extended and maintained in a closed state without being operated.

  According to such extended control over the closing control period of the big winning opening 2003, the closing control period (the opening / closing member 2006 is changed from when the special symbol is stopped to when the big winning game is started based on winning of the big win. The period from when the special symbol is stopped to when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires is defined as “a predetermined symbol after the special symbol is stopped and displayed”. When the first closed control period having a predetermined length is set (step S802), after the first closed control period has elapsed, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is set. The “closed control period” further appears (step S803). Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect that mutually uses an attribute as a closing control period having a predetermined length and an attribute as a closing control period having an indefinite length. .

  More specifically, for the first closed control period (here, 8 seconds), for example, as described above, it is used as an addition time with the change time of the set special symbol change pattern. As one unit, it is possible to realize an effect using an attribute as a closed control period having a predetermined length, such as performing a display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by extending the display of special symbols. become able to. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the display effect related to the big hit lottery may be executed with the effect content for the time obtained by adding the variation time of the special symbol and the first closing control period. . On the other hand, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n), for example, a long movie until the opening / closing member 2006 operates using the same period is liquid crystal. An effect using an attribute as a closed control period having an indefinite length, such as flowing on the display device 1400, can be realized. That is, for the second closed control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n), it is possible for the player to terminate the synchronization period as appropriate. Even in the case where a redundant performance is realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in game entertainment due to the extended performance, and the width of the performance can be expanded.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the bonus game (with the operation of the condition device is accompanied by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device). The state shifts to a state in which the operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2006 according to the winning of the win is possible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started as the process of step S804, and also indicates that the jackpot game has already been performed. The middle flag is operated (set) to the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S805.

  That is, as will be described later, the set jackpot start command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 84, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the peripheral control board 4140 side. Through the control described later, the display effect during the big hit game is performed. Further, when the big hit game process (step S240) is started in the next and subsequent interrupt control by operating (setting) the big hit game flag in the ON state, such steps S801 to S804 are performed. The following processing in step S805 is performed so as to perform the processing related to the execution of the big hit game without performing the above processing.

  In the process of step S805, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is being opened. If it is open (YES in step S805), then in step S806, the opening time of the special winning opening 2003 (elapsed time after opening) is set in step S606 (see FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not the set open / close operation limit time (predetermined long time or predetermined middle time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S806), the winning opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S808).

  However, even if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S806 that the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet passed (NO in step S806), the main winning prize port 2003 is If the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2003 after being released is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807). ), The process proceeds to step S808, and the special winning opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S806), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S807), the big win game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2003 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S805 that the big prize opening 2003 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is It is determined whether or not the maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times) set in the process of step S606 (see FIG. 90) has been reached (step S809). If it has not reached (NO in step S809), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003 (step S810), and the big hit game processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S809 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of times, the operation of the continuous accessory actuating device stops and the big hit (the operation involving the operation of the condition device) is made. The operation of the opening / closing member 2006 (big hit game) corresponding to the winning is made impossible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S811 to step S817, so that the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 87), for example. The game state after the big hit game is set based on the winning type of the big hit, which is stored as a trigger for the execution of the big hit game, and then the big hit game process is terminated. Here, the winning type refers to whether or not the winning type activates the probability variation function or the short-time function. For example, when the big hit that is the trigger for the big hit game is the big hit C The content of the information about whether or not to activate the time-saving function depends on the gaming state when it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates the big hit flag and the big hit game flag in the OFF state (step S811), and determines the winning type of the big hit that is triggered by the execution of the big hit game (step S812, step S812). S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not the winning type (big hit AD) that activates the probability variation function. As a result, when it is determined that the selected type that activates the probability variation function is not selected, the process proceeds to step S814 without operating the probability variation function. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S812 that the winning type activates the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S813), and then the process proceeds to step S814. To do.

  Further, in the process of step S814, it is determined whether or not the winning type that activates the time-shortening function (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C won in the short-time gaming state). As a result, when it is determined that the main control MPU 4100a is not the winning type that activates the time reduction function, the main control MPU 4100a stops the operation of the condition device without operating the time reduction function (step S816), and sets the processing flag to “0”. When it is set (step S817), the big hit game process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S814 that the winning type activates the time reduction function, the time reduction function is activated (step S815), and then the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S816). ), When the processing flag is set to “0” (step S817), the big hit game processing is terminated.

  According to such a jackpot game start process, until it is determined in step S807 that the round game has reached the maximum number of times, the big prize opening 2003 is opened according to the type of jackpot (step S806). In step S807 and step S809), the game is repeatedly released, and as a result, a player can obtain a winning ball according to the type of jackpot.

  Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 93, also in the small hit game process (step S250), the main control MPU 4100a first displays the small hit game indicating that the small hit game has already been performed as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is in an ON state (set).

  Here, the small hit game flag is operated to be OFF when the small hit game process (step S250) is in progress and the processing status is immediately after. Therefore, when there is a processing status immediately after shifting to the small hit game process (step S250), it is determined that the small hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and the main control MPU 4100a. Next, the process of step S902 is performed.

  In the process of step S902, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) has ended, that is, the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 91). To determine whether a predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) has expired. If the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not expired and the interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily terminated, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires through the processes of steps S901 and S902.

  However, in the small hit game process (step S250) according to the present embodiment, unlike the big hit game process (step 240), the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up as a result of such a process being performed. (YES in step S902), in order to start the small hit game with this alone, a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is to be started is set as the processing of step S903, and the small hit game is set. The small hit game in-game flag indicating that the game has already been performed is operated (set) to the ON state. In this case, as long as the player confirms that the above-mentioned second closed control period does not appear (there is no extended control from the first closed control period having a certain length), the condition device After completely removing the expectation that a bonus game may be performed according to a hit with action (big hit) (whether or not there is control related to the progress of the game, not a notification with a lot of false information) Can be used to play games (after removing expectations).

  As will be described later, the small hitting start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. In the above, the display effect during the small hit game is performed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Further, when the small hit game processing flag (step S250) is started in the next and subsequent interruption processing by operating (setting) the small hit game flag in the ON state, such step S902 is performed. -The processing from the following step S904 is performed so as to perform the processing related to the execution of the small hit game without performing the processing of step S903.

  In the process of step S904, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then in step S905, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2003 is the processing in step S701 (see FIG. 91). It is determined whether or not the set open / close operation limit time (a predetermined short time of the short time open / close pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S905), the winning opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S907).

  However, even if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S905 that the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet passed (NO in step S905), the main winning prize port 2003 is If the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2003 after being released is greater than or equal to the upper limit (for example, two) set in the process of step S701 (in step S906) YES), the process proceeds to the process of step S907 and the special winning opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S906), the small winning game process is terminated while maintaining the special winning opening 2003 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S904 that the big prize opening 2003 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2003 is opened by the opening and closing member 2006 is the above-described step S701 (see FIG. 91). ), It is determined whether or not the maximum number of times (two times) set in the process has been reached (step S908). If not reached (NO in step S908), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the special winning opening 2003 (step S909), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S908 that the opening / closing member 2006 has already been opened a maximum number of times for the big winning opening 2003, the small hit flag and the small hit game flag Are turned off (step S910), and when the process flag is set to “0” (step S911), the small hit game process is terminated.

  According to such a small winning game process, until it is determined in the process of step S906 that the opening / closing member 2006 has reached the maximum number of times the large winning opening 2003 has been opened, Although it is an open mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2003 as compared to the open mode, it is possible for a player to acquire a prize ball corresponding to the open mode. Become.

  Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 103 illustrates an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

  In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 97, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment executes a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process every 2 ms. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is incremented ("1" is added to the counter value). As a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, such a 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until the 2 ms steady process is set (loop process). As a result, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), the peripheral control MPU 4150a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), and then performs 16 ms steady processing described later ( In step S1004), the 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  In the 16 ms steady process, based on various effect commands received from the main control board 4100, the LED of each decorative board provided in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the speakers of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are used. The process which controls is performed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and this is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process described above (loop process).

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first analyzes various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed effect command, the control (effect control process) related to the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the notice effect that can be executed by the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can be stopped by the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a gaming state notification process (step S1250). The game state notification process is a process for notifying the game state based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the game state after the end of the big hit game is not clearly notified (unclear mode).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set based on the type of big hit (big hit A to E). In the case of big hits B to E, the open / close mode of the big prize opening in the big hit game is the same, and the number of balls is medium, so whether the game state is the normal game state or the high probability game state (probability change state) It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described later, when it is difficult to determine the game state, the game state is set to an unclear mode in which the game state is not clearly notified until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the big hit game is completed. .

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a sound control process related to the sound output of the speaker in order to generate a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect (step S1300). Further, a light emission decoration control process for light emission decoration by each decoration board provided in the door frame 3 or the game board 5 is executed (step S1400).

  Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits commands set in the processes of S1200 to S1400 (a sound output command, a light decoration command, etc. in addition to a display command described later) to the lamp driving substrate and the liquid crystal control substrate. Information output processing is performed (step S1500). As a result, an effect corresponding to the set command is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speaker units 430 and 480, the decorative frames provided in the door frame and the game board, and the like.

  After the information output process (step S1500) is performed, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) (step S1600). The 16 ms steady process ends.

  Note that the processing in steps S1100 to S1600 (16 ms steady processing) is set as a processing amount to be completed within 16 ms, but if the time of 16 ms has elapsed since the 16 ms steady processing has started, step S1600 is performed. Even if the execution up to the process of step S1600 has not been completed, the process of step S1600 is continued in such a way that the process in the middle of execution is continued as it is without returning to the process of step S1100 (from the command analysis process). Processing will be performed. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed by the 16 ms steady process to update the various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  Next, command analysis processing (processing in step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) first stores the effect command from the main control board 4100 in the received command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment receives an effect command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 interrupts other processes such as a 16 ms steady process and generates a command reception interrupt process. In the processing, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. In the reception command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the order in which the effect commands are received from the main control board 4100. In the command reception interrupt process, these effect commands are associated with the reception order. Each of these areas is memorized separately.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the peripheral control MPU 4150a confirms the contents of the received command storage area, and if the effect command is stored, the reception of the effect command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is received. The data is read from the command storage area (step S1102).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a uses a pattern command (a command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands in which the read effect command is set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 88). It is determined whether or not (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. At that time (step S1104), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a pattern command (command shown in FIG. 96) (NO in step S1103), peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read effect command is in step S411 (FIG. 88). Whether or not the winning command is a winning information command (winning information command indicating winning type including winning or winning and winning type) set in the main control board 4100 side in the process Is determined (step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that it is the same effect command (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), the command End the analysis process.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read effect command is not a winning information command (NO in step S1105), the peripheral control MPU 4150a uses the effect command received in the corresponding storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. When the corresponding flag is set (step S1107), the command analysis process is terminated. As such an effect command, for example, a fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 89) in the changing process, or step S606 (FIG. 90) in the big hit game start process. Reference) and an interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S702 (see FIG. 91) in the small hit game start process, or in the process of step S803 (see FIG. 92) in the big hit game process There are a big hit start command set on the main control board 4100 side, a small hit start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S903 (see FIG. 93) in the small hit game process, and the like.

  Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the game progress state, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), and the jackpot display process. Any one of (Step S1230) and the small hit display processing (Step S1240) is selectively performed.

  That is, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a variation pattern reception that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) of the command analysis process. On condition that the flag is set, a process for starting a display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed, including a decorative display of variable designs. For example, a display effect pattern (decoration pattern stop pattern, presence / absence of the above-mentioned extended effect, etc.) is determined based on a pattern command or a winning information command, and the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control board) In addition to setting the display command, settings related to the notice effect are also performed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, basically, the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99) is set. On the condition that it is set, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 including the display of the decorative symbols is displayed (to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160) so that the result of the big hit lottery is displayed. )) Set the display command, etc. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the confirmed stop command is reset.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the jackpot that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, a display indicating that the big prize opening 2003 is opened on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, round display, etc.) Each control is performed. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

  Also, in the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is “3”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the small hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99). In addition, on the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays that the big winning opening 2003 is opened, or the effect display in the small hit gaming state is displayed. Control each. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, the display effect at the time of big hit or small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended within the variation time indicated by the received pattern command. In the display effect after this extension, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is extended to the period (interval period) after the stop of the variable display concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs. It is configured so that the result of the big hit lottery can be shown.

  That is, in this case, as described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is also included. A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command (for the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), an intermediate stage where the display stage in the liquid crystal display device 1400 has not ended has appeared even though the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set. The process will be terminated.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240), the display effect thus extended is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). The processing is performed so that it is continuously performed according to the contents to be processed. Therefore, in the process at the time of extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, the effect control according to the command (display control indicating that the big prize opening 2003 is opened) Never do.

  As described above, the command set in the processing of steps S1210 to 1240 in the effect control processing is transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, a display effect of the content (such as a display effect pattern) indicated by the command appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board side.

  The effect control process also performs a touch panel process. In this touch panel process, the effect control process detects the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 based on the detection signal received from the touch panel 246. The effect control process acquires the coordinate value of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point, and operation information including the initial position To get. In addition, this effect control process may acquire not only such a coordinate value but the range of a contact surface. Details of the touch panel processing will be described later.

  Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4150a first receives a variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) as the process of step S1221. It is determined whether or not the flag is in an ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, based on the fact that a predetermined starting condition is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side (YES in step S 301), the variation pattern is processed in the process of step S 1104 (see FIG. 99). The system waits until the reception flag is turned on.

  Until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is operated to be in the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs control related to the demonstration effect and the effect mode by the processing of the following steps S1232 to S1237.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232). It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the display effect (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a display command (for the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160) for starting a demonstration effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set. The display command thus set is transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 99, whereby the liquid crystal display device is controlled through the control by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 side. At 1400, a demonstration effect is executed.

  If it is not determined in step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the peripheral control MPU 4150a once ends the decorative symbol variation start processing and sets the variation pattern reception flag (step S1221). YES) or a predetermined time elapses (YES in step S1236), the process waits until either condition is satisfied.

  Further, as a result of performing the processing of step S1236 and step S1237, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 by the processing of step S1232 (step S1232). YES in S1232), it is determined whether or not the player is allowed to operate the effect mode (step S1233).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit), or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), the liquid crystal display device 1400 For display effects, a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared. In the first effect mode, the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display are turned on without being finished within the variation time of the variation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side. A display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) in which a display effect about whether or not a winning (big hit) with the operation of the condition device has been won can be displayed after extending the period after the variable display concerning the pattern is stopped You can choose. In the second effect mode, a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected.

  Here, an overview of the extended effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected when in the second effect mode will be described. 104 (a) is a diagram for explaining an extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram for explaining an extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit, and FIG. 104 (c). These are figures for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG.104 (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  In the first production mode, if the result of providing an opportunity to get a prize ball (bonus game) is obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006, the production is extended until the period after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. The display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension including the contents can be selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern) is selected on the basis of winning the jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first starts to change the special symbol. The display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to match (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). However, after that, even when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (when the special symbol changes) or the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (rushing into the opening period) is set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The production will be continued without ending.

  That is, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, the special symbol is stopped for the closed control period from when the special symbol is stopped to when the big hit game is started based on winning of the big hit. From the time until the time predetermined by the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is up (first closing control period having a predetermined length), and predetermined by the interval effect timer The time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (see FIG. 51) after the elapsed time (here, 8 seconds) has expired is controlled as the second closed control period having an indefinite length. Like to do.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern) is selected based on winning the big hit, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), Extends the special symbol's change time by the amount of time (first closed control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. In this way, display effects related to the big hit lottery are performed. Such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  Then, when the first closing control period having a fixed length has passed and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is controlled, the contents of the effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 Is switched to the winning clarification effect in which the winning information about whether or not the result of the big winning lottery is a winning (big winning) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is specified. Note that here, the winning clarification effect is performed as a big hit effect in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big win lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. It can be realized as a production that reflects the appearance of winning the battle. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning explicit effect where the effect result appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to the present embodiment is: It can be said that the effect contents are extended to the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closed control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the second closing control period having an indefinite length is still continued, the game is played with a relatively strong game ball as an effect within the second closing control period. Control is performed so that the opening effect before the big hit game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to prompt the player to start the big hit game by performing a right hit game in which a game ball flows down to the game area 605 on the right side of the object 2300. As a result, when a right-handed game is performed by the player, the game ball that is driven into the game area 605 on the right side of the center bonus 2300 passes through the effective gate 6010n, and thus a jackpot start command is set. Become. As a result, when the second closing control period ends, a big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (see FIG. 92). At this time, the round indicator 648 lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

  Further, when the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends and a big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened (a flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), for example, a liquid crystal display Even if the content of the production is in the middle of the production that appears on the device 1400 (winning production or opening production), the big hit game production showing that the first round game has started. Execute in the form of forcibly switching to. However, on the other hand, the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends as long as the game ball does not pass through the effective gate 6010n after the first closing control period having a certain length ends. Since the flag is not set (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is not set), it is not forcibly switched to the big hit game effect indicating that the first round game has started.

  According to the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped, at least if the handle lever 504 is not operated, the effective gate 6010n. Since the game ball does not pass through the stage, the progress of the effect continues to stagnate in the effect before the start of the big hit game (the effect during the second closing control period). That is, in this case, the player starts the operation by not operating the operation handle portion until he or she understands the meaning of the effect before the start of the big hit game (the effect during the second closed control period). It becomes possible to continue stagnating the production in the previous production. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the operation handle portion, the effect before the start of the big hit game is finished and proceeds to the next effect (effect during the big hit game). In other words, it will be possible to realize a sense of speed for the progress of the production as a production tailored to a wide range of customers regardless of age or gender. .

  Further, in such an extended production pattern at the time of big hit, as long as the production is not progressing from the production before the start of the big hit game (the stagnation control of the production by the peripheral control MPU 4150a), the main control MPU 4100a is indefinite. By controlling so that the second closed control period having a length is not terminated, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding and a big hit game (a bonus game that enables winning a prize ball) from being executed. Like to do. Therefore, from the player's side, just adjusting the speed of the production to match the pace of the player, the game will appear to progress to match the adjusted production speed, As a result, the personal pace effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be enjoyed without worrying about the game progress speed.

  As described above, the extended effect pattern at the time of big hit is the second closed control period that appears in such a way that the closed control period is extended after the first closed control period having a certain length is completed. In the second closing control period, part of the contents of the effect (winning effect) and the opening effect before the big hit game (within the second closing control period) By making a right-handed game, an effect that prompts the user to start a big hit game) can be performed. Then, the second closed control period can be ended at an appropriate timing in accordance with the speed of understanding of each player with respect to these effects, and thus the big hit game can be started at an appropriate timing. A timer may be provided for the main control board so that the second closed control period is not extended more than necessary. The main control board can forcibly set the big hit start command when the specified time has elapsed after the first closed control period has ended. The main control board may determine by lottery whether or not to set a timer.

  However, on the other hand, such a second closing control period is a period that ends at least when the handle lever 504 is operated (a period with an indefinite length). If a game ball is passed through the effective gate 6010n by operating the handle lever 504 as soon as the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the winning explicit effect is cut in the middle of the effect. Alternatively, it may be possible to proceed quickly to the next production (production during the big hit game) without causing the production itself to appear almost (production skipping). Further, as described above, when the production progresses early in this way, the game control itself proceeds quickly, and the big hit game is started at an earlier stage. Therefore, while realizing a personal pace effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a player such as a veteran can enjoy a quick game / production performance that is efficient and stress-free by making the game progress earlier by skipping the production. To be able to.

  In particular, the time required for the opening effect (game time) in which a game description that prompts a right strike is performed after the winning explicit effect (big hit effect) is performed is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. Often times. However, according to the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit, if the time (game time) required for such an opening performance is prepared, but this only functions as a wasteful time for the player, this is appropriately set. The production and the game can be advanced more quickly. As a result, it is possible to provide each player with an effect and game suitable for each player.

  By the way, the production time (game) is also cut by reducing the production time (time of the win clarification production time) for showing the winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (hit the big game) with the operation of the condition device. If it is advanced more quickly, the final performance result in the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit (for example, whether or not the character wins the battle) does not appear sufficiently, and even the opening performance appears. Without any success, a big hit game production (round production etc.) will suddenly appear. In this case, the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit will be terminated at an intermediate stage before the production result sufficiently appears, and even the opening production can be omitted and the big hit game can be started early. .

  By the way, in the production within the second closed control period having an indefinite length, first, a winning clarification production is performed in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device. After that, an opening effect that encourages the player to start the big hit game by performing a right-handed game is performed. However, after the opening effect is performed for a predetermined time (or while the opening effect is being performed), a special feature movie dedicated to the big hit may be played. According to the second closed control period having an indefinite length, even if such a redundant production is realized, the production delay does not cause a bad effect such as a decrease in game entertainment. Can be widened.

  In addition, in the second closing control period, an operation acceptance with respect to a predetermined operation means (operation button unit or the like) is permitted, and an expectation degree regarding the result of the game lottery is shown based on the operation of the button. It may be possible to perform an operation system effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the number of rounds of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game, etc.). That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation system effect that can be operated at his / her own pace without worrying about the expiration date (operation acceptance is allowed) that can be operated. Become.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment is turned on in the round indicator 648 when the first closing control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol ends when the special symbol is won. It is controlled so that it is not performed. Then, after the first closed control period ends, the control is released on condition that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, so that the round display is turned on. As a result, during the second closed control period, it is possible to perform a win-win effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the round display is turned off. Further, it is avoided that the number of rounds in the big hit game can be easily grasped by the player, regardless of how much stagnant effect occurs in the second closing control period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit) is selected based on the winning of the small hit, the special symbol is also displayed. In the form of extending the time of the special symbol by the amount of time (first closed control period with a certain length) until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) expires after being stopped. The display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. Such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  However, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, the closed control period from when the special symbol is stopped based on the fact that the small hit is won until the small open per game (small hit game) is started. (Opening period) consists only of the time (first closed control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. I have control. Therefore, in such an extended performance pattern at the time of a small hit, a first closing control period (here, 8 seconds) having a certain length has elapsed, and a game per small opening (small hit game) At the start, the contents of the effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are displayed on the winning clarification effects indicating whether or not the winning information is whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. To switch to.

  Note that here, the winning clarification effect is performed as a losing effect in which it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is a losing win when the condition device is activated (big hit). For example, a specific character It can be realized as an effect that shows the appearance of the defeat in the battle with the enemy character. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern consists of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a win-winning effect where the effect result appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit according to this embodiment is It can be said that the effect content is extended until the small opening per game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped. .

  According to the extended effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next change (special symbol hold-up) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. become. In addition, the content of the production is extended to the period during which the game per small opening (small hit game) is performed, so that the liquid crystal display is performed during the execution period of the game per small opening (small hit game). The operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is less likely to be noticed as much as attention is focused on the device 1400. That is, in this case, since the content of the effect proceeds in the same manner as when the so-called highly anticipated loss effect (the loss effect where the opening and closing member 2006 does not operate), the loss effect pattern with respect to the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit As a result, the pachinko machine 1 on which a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device is mounted is hardly noticed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2006 is similar to or similar to the operation mode of the small opening game (small game) corresponding to the small winning game. A big hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is operated with an operation mode, a latent presentation state based on this (a so-called latent presentation state using a small hit), and the like are not prepared. That is, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (see FIG. 104 (a)) in the first effect mode and the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit (see FIG. 104 (b)) are only equipped with a small hit. It was made based on the technical idea of making it difficult to grasp the pachinko machine 1 that has been used (technical idea opposite to the conventional one). In consideration of the fact that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closing control period, the opening of the big prize opening will also appear at the time of a big hit, the effect contents in each effect pattern are respectively extended. .

  In the extended effect pattern at the time of big hit and the extended effect pattern at the time of small hit according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), the interval effect timer is stopped after the special symbol is stopped. Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit) only after the time until the time is up (the first closing control period) has elapsed (here 8 seconds) Information is shown (winning effect).

  However, with regard to these extended performance patterns, if the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed in the form of being extended to within the first closing control period, the display effects within the first closing control period are included. In the effect portion that appears, winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with operation of the condition device may be shown. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next change (reservation of the special symbol) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. In this case, in the winning effect at the time of the big hit, a special effect at the big hit that congratulates that the character has won the battle based on the fact that the winner has already been won, or a game that encourages a right hit In addition to the production of explanations, in the direct presentation of winning at the time of small hits, it is shown that the character defeats the battle and regrets that it is already known that it is a loss that was lost at the big hit The special effects at the small hit will appear.

  As a result, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball (bonus game) by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is provided in the second effect mode with respect to the extended effect pattern when in the first effect mode. In the case where it is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can select a challenge bonus effect pattern that indicates that the winning ball is won when winning is possible. The challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which not only a big hit but also a small hit is treated as one type (winning type) as a win that can be obtained by winning the winning prize opening 2003.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected in the second effect mode based on the winning of the jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 4150a starts to change the special symbol. The display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to match (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect thus started is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  However, this display effect does not show the lottery result for winning the big hit, but wins when the opportunity to win a prize ball is granted by opening the big winning opening 2003 (big win or small win) It is shown whether or not it has been made (winning effect on the challenge bonus). More specifically, it indicates that when a big win or a small win is won, an opportunity for winning a prize ball is given by opening the big prize opening 2003 within a special symbol fluctuation period. A specific display image will appear. In this case, the player cannot obtain the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big prize opening 2003, but can obtain the prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003. It becomes possible to grasp what is said.

  After a specific display image appears in the winning effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of the big hit) on the basis of the big prize opening 2003. A pre-start stage effect is performed to start a challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls the player can acquire by opening the game. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, the time until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires after the special symbol is stopped (the first closed control period with a certain length) has elapsed. Thereafter, the game is started on the condition that the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n.

  Here, in order to start the challenge bonus effect, in the pre-start effect, the operation amount (right-handed) of the operation handle portion is used by using the first closing control period until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. Aiming at the effective gate 6010n by a game) and operation timing will be described.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment may perform a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 as such a pre-start effect. This countdown effect is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, for example, while explaining that the right gate game is aimed at the effective gate 6010n, and this countdown display is changed to “0” When the handle lever 504 is operated with an appropriate operation amount, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as soon as the first closing control period ends.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the handle lever 504 is operated as instructed by the effect, the hitting start command is set relatively early after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired. The second closing control period ends, and as a result, a challenge bonus presentation and a jackpot game (special bonus game) are started at an early stage as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player. It becomes like this. At this time, the round indicator lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

  That is, according to such effect progress in the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (indefinite length) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. Compared to the case of the challenge bonus performance pattern (see FIG. 104 (d)) at the time of a small hit, which will be described later, in which the second closed control period) having this time does not exist, this is ignored in terms of performance. It will be as short as possible. In other words, the above-described countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is terminated early to cut it, which will be described later. As in the case of the small bonus game pattern (see FIG. 104 (d)), only the first closed control period having a certain length appears as an interval period before the big game (before the challenge bonus effect). The game progresses in a form (progress of production). As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by winning the big prize opening 2003. It is possible to provide an effect display as to which game mode appears, including not only winning games and games per middle opening, but also games per small opening.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment is turned on in the round indicator 648 when the first closing control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol ends when the special symbol is won. It is controlled so that it is not performed. Then, the round display 648 is turned on by releasing the control on condition that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n after the end of the first closed control period. Thereby, prior to the challenge bonus effect being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player wins the big win by turning on the round indicator 648 and the number of rounds in the big win game (special bonus game) is given to the player. It becomes possible to avoid being easily grasped.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, after the countdown display is changed to “0”, the time from when the game ball is launched until it passes through the valid gate 6010n is determined by the following preceding effect (not shown). By filling in effect, the time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired (second closing control with an indefinite length) The existence of (period) can be further concealed in terms of production.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the countdown effect according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the countdown display changes to “0” is slightly earlier than the time at which the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is up (first time) Within the closed control period). According to such a countdown effect, at least part of the time from when the game ball is fired by the operation of the handle lever 504 until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n is the first closed control period and the second Among the closed control periods, the game can be made so that it can be included as the time on the first closed control period side, and as a result, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is correspondingly ( The amount of time included in the first closed control period side can be shortened. In this case, the preceding effect is started in advance of the second closing control period, and there is a possibility of straddling the first closing control period and the second closing control period. It will be positioned as.

  Here, as a series of effects that lead from such a countdown effect to a challenge bonus effect through a preceding effect, for example, in the countdown effect, in addition to the countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the “countdown display is“ 0 ”. Attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing! ”And a challenge bonus effect indicating the result of the attack set is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 2500 (the flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is set), etc. Can be realized.

  Also, as a challenge bonus effect, for example, as a result of the attack set, when the attack against the enemy character is avoided, it indicates that it is a game per small opening, the attack hit the enemy character, but could not be defeated It can be realized by showing that it is a game per middle release, and showing that it is a game per long release when an enemy character falls due to an attack. Or, when an attack hits an enemy character but cannot be defeated, it indicates either a game per middle release or a game per long release. You may make it clearly indicate which is a winning game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as an attack hits an enemy character, not only the amount of prize balls that can be earned but also the advantage to the player is eliminated as much as the possibility of a small hit is excluded. This also makes it possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation of transition to a new gaming state.

  However, in such a big hit challenge bonus effect pattern, it is also assumed that there is a situation where the handle lever 504 is not operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect changes to “0”. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 104 (d), this cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant performance (no performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

  Although the countdown effect is realized by the countdown display, it is not necessarily counted as long as it is performed so that the specific timing at which the operation handle portion should be operated can be grasped. Good.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), the peripheral control MPU 4150a also displays the special symbol when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected on the basis of the fact that the small hit is won in the second effect mode. The display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start of fluctuation (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect thus started is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  Similarly, even in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, in such an effect (a winning effect related to the challenge bonus) performed during the special symbol change period, a prize ball is obtained by opening the grand prize opening 2003. A specific display image appears showing that an opportunity for acquisition is given. As a result, the player can not know how many prize balls can be obtained by the player by opening the grand prize opening 2003, but can obtain a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003 It becomes possible to grasp what is said.

  In addition, after a specific display image appears in the winning effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of a small hit) is set. A pre-start production is performed to start a challenge bonus production about the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big prize opening 2003.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. Until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires (first closed control period having a certain length), and when the timer expires, the valid gate 6010n A game per small opening (small bonus game) is started regardless of whether or not a game ball passes through (see FIG. 93).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, in the small hit challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation of the operation handle portion (passing of the game ball to the valid gate 6010n) is inherently advanced in the game or effect. Although it is not necessary, as the pre-starting effect to start the challenge bonus effect, the first time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds here) times up is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of big hit By using the closed control period, a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the handle lever 504 is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be performed.

  According to the challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of small hits When the operation handle part is operated as instructed by the same effect, the challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of big hits leads from the countdown effect to the challenge bonus effect through the preceding effect The challenge bonus production is started with the same series of production contents. As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (type of hits) as winnings that can be won by opening the big prize opening 2003, and long-opening in the challenge bonus production It is possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode appears, including not only winning games and games per middle opening, but also games per small opening.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the countdown display is “ It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the operation handle portion is not operated for a long time after changing to “0”. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment starts the false effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the countdown display changes to “0”, and starts the false effect on the predetermined effect. When a provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the challenge bonus effect is also controlled to start false.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the challenge bonus effect from the countdown effect through the preceding effect, regardless of whether or not the operation system effect requiring an operation on the operation handle portion is performed. A series of production contents that lead to a false appearance (false production). Therefore, the player precedes the surrounding field horses who want to check the liquid crystal display device 1400 by confirming whether or not the operation handle portion is operated or whether or not the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. It is possible to grasp that a game is played per small opening, and this makes it possible to show an intelligent act such as immediately suspending the game.

  Thus, as described above, the extended production pattern in the first production mode is the existence of the small hitting itself by continuing the second closed control period having an indefinite length for a certain amount of time. It is a production pattern aimed at concealment, and after extending the production content to the first closed control period with a certain length that also exists in the production pattern at the time of small hit, In the second closed control period that cannot exist in the effect pattern, the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect that prompts the player to start the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) is performed.

  On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat the small hit as one of the hits by preventing the second closed control period having an indefinite length from appearing as much as possible. This is a rendition pattern that has a certain length that is also present in the effect pattern at the time of a small hit, as an opening effect before a big hit game (an effect that prompts the player to start a big hit game by playing a right-handed game) This is performed so as to be completed within the first closed control period.

  Such an effect based on the premise that a second closed control period having an indefinite length exists due to the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (the production structure in which the timing for promoting the right-handed game within the second closed control period is different), even if the display production pattern based on one production command (the variation time of the special symbol is the same), It is possible to greatly vary the length of the production time required from the start of the change of the special symbol (decoration symbol) to the start of the big hit game between the first production mode and the second production mode. Thus, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  By the way, according to such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 104 (c)) and a small hit challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 104 (d)), the hit display effect (specific When a display image appears, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball is provided so that at least a specific number of prize balls (for example, a small number of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. Once the player knows what will be done, it will be performed as a challenge bonus effect with a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be accumulated as a bonus .

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability variation function or the time-shortening function operates). Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that the winning probability (1/400) with the operation of the condition device is added to the winning probability (3/400) with no operation of the condition device. With (1/100), not only that the prize ball can be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but that the game state can be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. Can also be made aware. As a result, it is avoided that only a monotonous losing effect is repeatedly displayed due to the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, and the decline in the game entertainment is suppressed. .

  In addition, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even when the big win is lost, when the specific condition is satisfied, the display effect (specific display image) at the time of winning appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Despite the fact that the player can be conscious of the fact that the player can pay out a prize ball and that the player changes to an advantageous gaming state, A specific image that does not appear when winning (such as an image that appears when a false effect such as a preceding effect or a challenge bonus effect is performed even though there is no operation on the operation handle) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I am doing so.

  In this case, until the special winning opening 2003 is opened according to the winning of the big hit, it can also function as a waiting production period whether or not a specific image (false production) appears. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player as well as no change to the gaming state advantageous to the player is also the same image (false effect). Since it will be possible to obtain significantly less prize balls than when no appears, this indicates that the big hit was won, combined with the size of the gap of the profit that the player can obtain It is possible to further enhance the game entertainment when an effect (stagnation effect from the first closed control period) appears.

  And according to the structure by which such two production modes are employ | adopted, in the 1st production mode which can select an extended production pattern, when performing the game per small opening (small hit game), with respect to a player An effect that does not make the user aware of that the winning ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates) can be performed. On the other hand, in the second production mode in which a challenge bonus production pattern can be selected, a prize ball can be paid out to the player when the game per small opening (small game) is executed (in other words, An effect that makes the user aware of the movement of the opening / closing member 2006) can be performed. As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, a higher probability (a smaller winning hit probability “1/400” is smaller than in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected). With the higher probability “1/100)”, which is the winning probability of winning “3/400”, an effect that makes the player aware that a prize ball can be paid out appears. The probability of executing a bonus game (opening of the big prize opening 2003 by the opening and closing member 2006) in which a prize ball can be paid out to the player without causing a change in the game state accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It will be possible to achieve a deeper effect as if changes in each time. In addition, in the second production mode, the player can hardly realize that such a production is the pachinko machine 1 in which the small hit is mounted in the first production mode. This is because a display effect is provided in which not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one kind of hits where winning balls can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to the present embodiment, either the first effect mode in which such an extended effect pattern can be selected or the second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. And a mode forcing control means for creating a mode forcing period in which a change by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode is not allowed.

  For example, a first predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the first effect mode. The second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the period until a predetermined date such as the next one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode. In addition, control related to the creation of the mode compulsory period is performed. In this case, during the first month, a prize ball is paid out to the player with the winning probability of the big win by performing the performance so as to hide the fact that the small hit is mounted as described above. It operates as a pachinko machine 1 that can be used.

  On the other hand, during the next month, the effect that the small hit is treated as one type of winning that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed, so that the winning probability of the big win is exceeded. The pachinko machine 1 can be operated so that a prize ball can be paid out to a player with a high probability. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 having only one game specification, but the fact that the presence of a small hit is difficult to be noticed in the first first predetermined period, combined with the effect contents in the liquid crystal display device 1400 In addition to this, it will be possible to give the player the impression that another pachinko machine that has even different game specifications for winning the ball is newly operated. After the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the player's operation on the operation means during the demonstration effect.

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 101, in the processing of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs the first rendering mode and the second rendering based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not it is in a mode compulsory period that is compulsorily determined as one of the effect modes. As a result, when it is determined that the first production mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall), the second production mode. When it is determined that it is forcibly determined (for example, when it is in a second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses) In step S1233, NO), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is temporarily ended. In this case, while the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232), the process waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221).

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is forcibly determined to be one of the first production mode and the second production mode based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. When it is determined that it is not in the period (for example, when the second predetermined period has already elapsed), it is determined that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is permitted (YES in step S1233). Next, the process of step S1234 is performed.

  In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode. Here, the player's operation is, for example, an operation on an operation button unit or a sub button. When the main button or the sub button is operated while the demonstration effect is being performed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is conceivable to perform display control for causing the selection screen for the production mode to appear. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is selected when a specific effect mode is selected by an operation on the sub button 372 and the selected specific effect mode is determined by an operation on the main button. Determines that there has been an operation by the player for changing the effect mode (YES in step S1234), and performs setting processing for the effect mode to change to the determined effect mode (step S1235).

  Note that the means to be operated by the player may not be the main button or the sub button of the operation button unit, and may be a predetermined operation by the player including a proximity operation using a touch panel. That's fine. In addition, as a process in the case where there is an operation by the player, in addition to control that causes a change in display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (appearance of selection screen, display at the time of selection, display at the time of determination, etc.) The player is informed that the effect mode has been switched by changing the effect mode of the predetermined decorative member, such as changing the color of light emitted from the back of the game panel 1100 having the characteristics (change from blue to red, etc.). Alternatively, it may be shown.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side. Assuming that the predetermined start condition (NO in step S301) is established, the following steps S1222 to S1231 are performed to start the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Further, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (step S1223). The game state flag is operated to indicate the type of game state controlled after the big hit game, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1230)).

  Then, when the peripheral state control MPU 4150a indicates that the game state flag is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (YES in step S1223), next, as the process in step S1224, the effect mode in the process in step S1235 is performed. Based on the setting state or time information such as calendar information and time information of built-in RTC 4140aa, it is determined whether or not the first effect mode is set. As a result, when the first production mode is forcibly determined or when the first production mode is set in a period in which the change of the production mode by the player's operation is allowed, It is determined that the first effect mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

  In the process of step S1225a, the variation stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is referred to while referring to the effect pattern table in the setting state of the first effect mode. Based on the information concerning the pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a notice selection process in which it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1226a). That is, depending on whether in the first effect mode or the second effect mode, not only the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the execution frequency of the notice effect and the contents of the effect differ. In the notice effect table when the effect mode is set to one effect mode, an effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an indistinct mode setting process for setting an indistinct mode in which the gaming state (probability state) after the end of the big hit game is not clearly notified (step S1227). Details of the unclear mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the game state (probability state) after the end of the big hit game is clear, such as when the big hit A is won, the process returns to the decorative symbol variation start process without executing any particular process in the unclear mode setting process.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice effect pattern in the first effect mode determined in this way (step S1228), and processing When the selection flag is updated to “1” (step S1229), the decoration symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 98, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the liquid crystal and sound control. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is in the second effect mode in the period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined in the process of step S1224 or the effect mode change by the player's operation is allowed. Is set, it is determined that the first production mode is not set (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, the variation stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is referred to while referring to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. Based on the information concerning the pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined. Next, in the notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect) related to the notice effect based on an appropriate notice determination random number, including the determination as to whether or not to execute the notice effect. The notice selection process for determining the pattern is executed (step S1226b).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the obscurity mode setting process for setting the ambiguity mode in which the content of the effect after the end of the big hit game is not clearly notified, as in the case of the first performance mode (step S1227). ).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice effect pattern in the second effect mode thus determined (step S1228), and processing When the selection flag is updated to “1” (step S1229), the decoration symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 98, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the liquid crystal and sound control. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines in the process of step S1223 that the gaming state flag does not indicate that the gaming state flag is normally in the external disadvantaged gaming state (NO in step S1223), the detailed description is omitted. Then, the effect pattern and the stop symbol are determined based on the effect table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S1230), and whether or not the notice effect is to be executed is determined in the notice effect table corresponding to the current gaming state. In addition, a notice selection process in which an effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number is executed (step S1231).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, similarly to the case of the first effect mode and the second effect mode, performs an unclear mode setting process for setting the effect content after the big hit game is not clearly notified. Is executed (step S1227).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets display commands (preliminary commands) respectively associated with the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the warning effect pattern according to the current gaming state thus determined (step S1227), and processing When the selection flag is updated to “1” (step S1228), the decoration symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 98, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the liquid crystal and sound control. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the process of step S1225a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first reads the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99). An effect pattern associated with the variation pattern command is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 108 and 109). Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 105 and 106). When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, with respect to the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, including the case where the above-mentioned extended effect pattern in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbol is stopped is adopted (confirmed). It will stop (based on the stop command being set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, an “extended effect pattern” and a “lost effect that can be prepared as an effect that is not an extended effect pattern but is a pair of the extended effect pattern” are provided. Judgment is made as to whether any production pattern “production pattern” has been determined in step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any one of these effect patterns is determined, when a predetermined stop pattern at the time of extension (a specific reach lose symbol or the like) is determined (step S1303), step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is determined. ) Is terminated. In this case, during the opening period, the content of the display effect centered on the story such as the character is extended (developed) in a state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the extended stop symbol. After that, the result about whether or not you won the jackpot will be revealed.

  On the other hand, a normal production pattern that is different from any of the production patterns of “extended production pattern” and “losing production pattern that is not an extended production pattern but can be prepared as a production of a pair of the extended production pattern” (FIG. 105 (c) (see FIG. 108), the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big win lottery indicated by the winning information command is determined through the processing of step S1304 to step S1310.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big win based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 99). (Step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the stop symbol dedicated to the big hit is determined (step S1305), the processing of step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is terminated.

  Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the result is a big hit (step S1306), and the result of the big hit lottery is small. If it is a hit, a stop symbol dedicated to the small hit is determined (step S1307). However, in the first effect mode, since the effect commands are all associated with the extended effect pattern so that the presence of the small hit is concealed, the processing in step S1306 is always performed. Then, it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and next, as a process of step S1308, a determination is made as to whether or not it is a display effect (high expectation loss effect) in which reach is formed.

  As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 101) at the point of time when a reach loss stop symbol is determined (step S1309) when the reach effect is a display effect. On the other hand, when it is not a display effect in which reach is formed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is terminated when an irregular stop symbol in which reach is not formed is determined (step S1310).

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the process of step S1225b, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first reads the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99). An effect pattern associated with the variation pattern command is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. It may be. When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, for the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, when a lottery result that enables winning balls is obtained, the special symbols are adjusted to stop changing ( The stop symbol (specific display image) at the time of hit is stopped (based on the fact that the fixed stop command is set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, the big win lottery is performed based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (see FIG. 99). It is determined whether or not the result is a hit (big hit or small win) in which a winning ball can be obtained (steps S1322 and S1324). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (a big hit or a small win) where a winning ball can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the big winning opening 2003 is opened. When the bonus challenge stop symbol that can be confirmed is determined (step S1323), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) is terminated. The bonus challenge stop symbol is realized by, for example, a special symbol that does not become a component of the jackpot symbol combination appearing during the change, and the special symbol combination included in the symbol combination at the time of stop, etc. can do.

  In this case, in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. There is a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be added as bonuses, with the player knowing that the opportunity to get prize balls is provided Challenge bonus performance will be performed.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a win (a big hit or a small win) in which a winning ball can be obtained (NO in both processes of step S1322 and step S1324), In step S1325, a determination is made as to whether or not the display effect is a reach.

  As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) at the time when the reach loss stop symbol is determined (step S1326) when the reach effect is a display effect. If it is not a display effect in which reach is formed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) is terminated when an irregular stop symbol in which reach is not formed is determined (step S1327).

  Hereinafter, an example of a display effect that appears when such various processes (steps S1210 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment are performed will be described. FIG. 105 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the variation time Ta1 shown in FIG. 96 is based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins a big hit when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the change related to the special symbol is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the big hit time associated with the effect command “01H” (for example, a specific mission a is made successful). The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern including the content of whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy is started. The extended production pattern (production command “01H”) including the contents of the display production a thus started is in a situation where the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time Ta1 has arrived. This display effect a is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission a to succeed or fail).

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Ta1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss when extending. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, since a display effect a (development, loss), which will be described later, associated with the command “03H” shown in FIG. 96 is prepared, the display effect even when the timing t1 has elapsed. When "a" is continued, this functions as "development display effect a (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission a) is left". Therefore, when this “development display effect a” appears, the special symbol is not seen from the player side even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be grasped as still being changed. In addition, the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be grasped as being maintained in a temporarily stopped state despite being in a state after the final stoppage. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the big win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  At this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command “01H”) including the content of the display effect a is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Then, the decorative display variation display may be performed only in a small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (such as an end portion of the display area that is difficult to attract attention) for the display effect a. The player is made to grasp the result of the big win lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission a in the display effect a can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design (display the result by the character). More desirable above.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, it is actually Despite the fact that the decorative design has been confirmed and stopped, it has succeeded in the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such expectation As a result, “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, a time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used, for example, a situation in which the character A again faces the enemy is displayed. An effect is made as to whether or not mission a can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect a (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extended effect pattern including the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command “02H” shown. As described above, the display effect a (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to notice that the small hit is the pachinko machine 1 mounted in the first effect mode. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after the above is shown.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern including the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, a specific mission is required until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period arrives. The state of success in a (Character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and an effect on whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (Character A attacks the enemy and does this succeed) Only the effect such as “No” appears. As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect a can appear in a manner indicating that the specific mission a has been successful after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, and is associated with the effect command “01H”. The display effect pattern that is displayed functions as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  However, as described above, in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit, after the first closed control period having a certain length has ended, the closed control period has an indefinite length. The second closed control period appears further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit effect a) and the opening effect before the big hit game (right hit game is started by performing the right hit game) (Prompt to encourage) to be performed. Then, as a result of the handle lever 504 being operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the understanding speed of each player for these effects, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (timing tx), the second closing control period is set. As a result, the jackpot game and the performance during the jackpot game are started. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (a), the second closing control period from timing t2 to timing tx is ended based on the operation of the handle lever 504 (indefinite). Period). For this reason, for example, when a game ball is passed through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the handle lever 504 immediately after the end of the first closing control period having a certain length, the big hit explicit effect The a or opening effect is forcibly advanced to the next effect (effect during the big hit game) without cutting or causing the effect itself to appear almost at that time (effect skipping).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, FIG. Assuming that a change relating to a special symbol having the indicated change time Ta2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the change time Ta1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 produces an effect. Display effect a at the time of small hitting associated with the command “02H” (for example, whether a specific mission a can be successful (whether the character A can defeat an enemy), etc.) The dynamic display of the extended production pattern including it is started. The extended effect pattern (effect command “02H”) including the contents of the display effect a thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 105A) associated with the effect command “01H”. Similarly, even when the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta2 has arrived, the display effect a is not ended (without causing the specific mission a to succeed or fail). Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”. Further, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “01H” (FIG. 105) is also the point of finalizing and stopping at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). Note that the lost stop mode at the time of extension is a single display mode regardless of the big win lottery results for the big hit and the small win, and the display mode is distinguished. Has not been.

  Furthermore, the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension and until the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped by the passage of the variation time Ta2. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 105A) associated with the command “01H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern including the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, However, despite the fact that the decorative design has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successfully achieved (for example, a character A who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has stood up). The “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, for example, the state until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used, for example, a state in which the character A faces the enemy again is displayed. An effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful is performed.

  Further, similarly, until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period arrives, the specific mission a is not shown (the character A defeats the enemy), and the specific mission is not shown. An effect about whether or not “a” can be successful (an effect such as whether or not the character A attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (b), the extended effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H” has a certain length. After the end of the one closed control period, the second closed control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closed control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “02H” The losing explicit effect a is executed in a manner that shows that the mission a is failed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  For example, the loss explicit effect a is performed as a big hit defeat effect, for example, the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character A is disappointed.

  According to the extended production pattern associated with such production commands “01H” and “02H”, the opening end timing t3 of the special winning opening 2003 from the special symbol start timing t0 (or the second closing control period). The time until the jackpot explicit presentation a ends) will function as one presentation for winning the jackpot, so the player's gaze can be directed to such a stage, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 when the losing explicit effect a is being performed, and thus the small hit.

  In order to obtain these functions and effects, no information can be obtained even if the player confirms that the grand prize opening 2003 is open (an event that may be a reason for confirming the opening). It is important that the configuration is excluded. For example, in a pachinko machine 1 that can execute a big hit game that opens the big winning opening 2003 in the same or approximate opening manner as the game per small opening (small hit game), by confirming the opening, Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the gaming state may be changed on condition of the operation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that can be an opportunity to quit the game, that the player has won a big hit with a few hits that do not match the low winning probability of the big hit, so pay attention to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 It may also be a cause that

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither a big hit nor a small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation concerning the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” (for example, whether the specific mission a can be successful (character A) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern including the content such as whether or not can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) including the contents of the display effect a started in this way is displayed when the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta3. Terminate a without extending a (by failing a specific mission a).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”. In addition, even when the decorative symbol changes, when the special symbol variation is stopped at the timing t1 when the special symbol variation is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the extended loss stop mode. ing. As for the loss stop mode at the time of extension, a single display mode appears at the time of big hit, at the time of small hit, and at the time of the loss.

  Further, the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decoration symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the change time Ta3 under the temporary stop in the manner of stopping the loss when the decoration symbol is extended. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 105A and 105B) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern including the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”, the expected continuous effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, an attack from the enemy) In response, the player A knows that the character A who has fallen has not stood up) and has failed in a specific mission. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues after timing t1 shown in FIGS. 105 (a), 105 (b), and 105 (d) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development. become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side obtains a losing (pure losing) that is not won by either the big hit or the small hit. Based on this, it is assumed that the variation related to the special symbol, which is the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. (Timing t0) In the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” (for example, whether the specific mission a can be successful (character A defeats the enemy) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern including the content of whether or not) can be started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) including the contents of the display effect a thus started is a non-extended display effect pattern, but the effect commands “01H” to “03H”. Even in a situation where the timing t1 has arrived due to the passage of the special symbol fluctuation times ta1 to ta3, the display effect a is continued (without success or failure of the specific mission a). Further, in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern (effect command “04H”), although the decoration symbol change is started, this decoration symbol change is also continued without being terminated at the timing t1. It has become.

  That is, in the case of loss (pure loss), unlike the case of big win or small win, not only the time required for opening control of the big winning opening 2003 but also maintaining it in the closed state prior to the opening of the big winning opening 2003. Since the first closing control period is immediately prepared and the next change is made immediately, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the change time of the special symbol.

  In this regard, with respect to the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command “04H”, the main control MPU 4100a, from the fluctuation start timing t0 at the time of a small hit to the opening end timing t3 of the big winning opening 2003. It is prepared to be adopted when a variation time Ta4 having a length corresponding to the time is selected as a reference. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a display effect a. However, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, and the display effect has a longer time.

  In this case, with regard to the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the variation of any of them is not fixed and stopped with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1. As with the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the loss at the time of extension at the stage before the timing t1 that is only an intermediate stage with respect to the change time Ta4 has elapsed. Temporarily stop in the stop mode. Then, whether or not the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 is reached while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. A continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed. It should be noted that the loss stop mode at the time of extension is a single display even though the lottery result and the variation time of the big hit are different between the big hit, the small hit and the lost (pure loss). The mode is adopted, and the display mode is not distinguished.

  In this way, there is a sense of expectation that the continuation expectation production has succeeded (for example, a character A who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has started up) while the decorative design is temporarily stopped. Thus, the “development display effect a” appears. However, after that, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the changing state again, and the display effect a is displayed as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”. On the other hand, in the small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (a portion that is not easily noticed, such as an end portion of the display area), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is stopped (when it is “01H” to “03H”, fixed stop, and when it is “04H” (Temporary stop) is maintained until timing t2.

  In this “development display effect a”, for example, an appearance as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successful, such as the appearance of the character A again facing the enemy within the time of the fluctuation time Ta4, is shown. Done. However, as in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the state in which the specific mission “a” has been successful (the character A is the enemy) until the timing t2 comes. No effect is shown, and only an effect about whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether Character A attacks an enemy and succeeds) appears. ing.

  After the timing t2, the state where the specific mission a has failed is shown until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “02H”. Lost explicit production a will appear in the form shown. As with the effect command “02H”, the losing explicit effect “a” is a big hit such as, for example, the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes and then the character A regrets. This is done as a defeat. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” functions as “a loss effect pattern of effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  In this way, in the first effect mode, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, a specific lose effect pattern (effect command “ 04H "), when the specific control time (change time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side, within the determined specific control time (change time Ta4). Display control relating to a specific loss production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. Nonetheless, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a win, a specific effect content (display effect a) appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, with respect to the specific lose effect pattern (effect command “04H”). When performing display control related to all winning effect patterns (effect command “01H”), the main control MPU 4100a side determines a variation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific variation time (variation time Ta4). When setting the effect time, not only the determined short fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closing control period, second closing control period) is set. In such a production time, display control for a specific hit production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. It was.

  According to such an effect technique, even in a predetermined interval period after the special symbol is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1400 determines whether or not the winning (big hit, small win) is won, and the opening effect. And will be done. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut so that the effects and games can be advanced, so that it is possible to realize the effect progress (game progress) with a good tempo. In addition, when a display effect pattern of such specific effect content (display effect a) appears, a notable effect element is added to the point of whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle stage, When the stoppage is confirmed, it is possible to grasp that an opportunity for winning a prize ball is given by opening the special winning opening 2003, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, by providing the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” with respect to the extended effect pattern for the effect commands “01H” and “02H”, the “development display effect a” is obtained. The big hit expectation degree when it appears is avoided to have to be set within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, and the small hit is installed Even under such an effect system that makes it difficult to recognize this, it is possible to perform an effect design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, since the special symbol fluctuates after timing t1, there is no problem even when the player confirms the variation state of the special symbol. Absent. And by providing such a non-extension effect pattern in the form of mixing with the above-mentioned extension effect pattern, even if the special symbol stop state in the extension effect pattern is confirmed, It will be possible to promote awareness that might be mistaken.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, the big prize opening 2003 is not opened when the losing explicit effect a is being performed, and therefore, when the player confirms the big prize opening 2003. There is no problem even if it exists. Then, by providing such a non-open losing explicit effect a with the lost explicit effect a at the time of the effect command “02H”, the large winning opening 2003 is opened in the losing explicit effect a. Even if this is confirmed, it is possible to encourage the player to be aware of a mistake that may be mistaken.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands “01H”, “02H”, and “04H”, the specific mission a is performed until the timing t2 arrives. Whether or not it succeeds (whether or not the character A defeats the enemy) is not indicated, but prior to the arrival of the timing t2, whether or not the specific mission a is successful (the character A is the enemy) Or not) may be indicated. In this case, after the result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the losing explicit effect is performed. Even in such an effect method, the display effect a at the small hit is the first at the small hit. In addition to the fact that most of the closed control period of 1 is used for the display effect a, after that, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of the character A appears, so that the big win defeat effect is performed. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively quickly.

  By the way, as described above, such display effects appear when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the probability of winning the big hit without being aware of the presence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such gameability (rendering performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not to do.

  However, even when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, the main control MPU 4100a is set when the second effect mode is set. In addition to the contents of the production commands “01H” to “04H” itself from the side, there is no change in the normal external disadvantaged game state, but the big winning opening 2003 by winning the small win By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content premised on opening, the opportunity frequency of winning the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is higher than in the case of the first effect mode. The gameability (rendering performance) as if it was greatly increased is realized.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 96 is based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins a big win when the second production mode is set. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not extended including the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect a ′ in the second effect mode is different from the content of the display effect a in the first effect mode. In the form, a display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect) including contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening 2003 is confirmed to be open Pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbol variation display is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and a big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, the display form of the decorative symbols is also different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, whereas the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly composed of characters. In the second effect mode, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that is more likely to be noticed.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the variation time Ta1 until the timing t1. The display effect a ′ including content such as an appropriate character struggling to appear is displayed, and at the timing t1 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the winning ball 2003 can be obtained by opening the special winning opening 2003. Thus, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp the fact. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period, and the player is released by opening the big prize opening 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect regarding how many prize balls can be acquired, the operation timing of the handle lever 504 performs a countdown effect a ′ indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Like that.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect a ′ is, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds while explaining that the right gate game is aimed at the effective gate 6010n. When the handle lever 504 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the value changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the end of the first closing control period.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a ′, when the handle lever 504 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the end timing t2 of the first closing control period is as shown in FIG. 105 (a). As soon as the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n after arrival, the end timing tx of the second closed control period arrives earlier than in the first production mode. Thereby, a challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is shown which open mode (game per long opening, game per middle opening, game per small opening) is used to open the big prize opening 2003. In this case, the player will not only play the big hit game but also hit the small winning game (small hit game) at the big winning opening 2003, thereby being in the first production mode. In comparison, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (c), in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is continued for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect a ′ changes to “0”. It is also assumed that a situation occurs in which the handle portion is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 104 (d) and FIG. 105 (b), this cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant performance (no performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), based on the fact that the small win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second effect mode is set, it is shown in FIG. Assuming that a variation relating to a special symbol having a variation time Ta2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 Then, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of small hitting associated with the effect command “02H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “02H”) including the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a ′ including content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the prize ball can be acquired by releasing 2003. . As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  However, as mentioned above, the special symbol is stopped during the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening per game (small hit game) is started when the small bonus is won. It consists only of the time (first closed control period having a certain length) until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) expires after the timer is activated. When the timer expires, the valid gate 6010n Regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through, a game per small opening (small hit game) is started (see FIG. 93).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “02H”, the decorative design is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”. When the game is stopped with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect, the operation timing of the operation handle portion is performed as a countdown effect a ′ indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as the big winning opening 2003 is opened, and the variation of the decorative design is started. The contents of the performance from the timing t0 to the time when the challenge bonus performance is performed are not distinguished, and when the operation handle portion is operated as instructed by the performance, the challenge bonus is passed from the countdown effect a ′ through the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “01H”).

  Accordingly, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by winning the big prize opening 2003. In addition to games and games per mid-opening, it is possible to perform an effect display regarding which game mode appears, including games per small opening. Thereby, as compared with the case in the first production mode, the game performance (production performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. . Of the games per long opening, games per medium opening, and games per small opening, the game per small opening ends in a relatively short time. As to whether or not the winning is won, the player may be able to grasp by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big hit in the production within the first closed control period.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but the small hit is regarded as a no-chance loss that does not give an opportunity to win a prize ball (pure The extended production pattern in the first production mode to be handled (similar to the production pattern at the time of losing (production command "04H")) This is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns (challenge bonus effect patterns) in the second effect mode to be handled (similarly to the effect command (effect command “01H”)). In this case, the effect information related to the win is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, thereby realizing a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. To be able to.

  Furthermore, the game per small opening (small game) means that only a small amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment, about 40 to 50) can be obtained by the player as a privilege. Since the game state is not shifted to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than before the small opening game (small hit game) is performed, the gaming interest is reduced even though the opening / closing member 2006 is operated. It can be said that it is necessary to pay attention to the handling in the game setting in that point. Therefore, in the past, when a small hit is mounted, a special hit function is performed in which a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open per game (small hit game) and thereafter a transition is made to an advantageous game state First of all, a winning type is prepared, and in a situation where a game per small opening (small winning game) is performed, the player is made aware of the possibility of a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type. Therefore, it has been a major premise to maintain the game entertainment at the time of a small opening game (small hit game). However, even in the case of such a conventional gaming machine, when a specific winning type is won, it is finally won in the big win with a big win probability set in a very low game state. Regardless of this, it is inevitable that there will be a decline in the game entertainment interest (decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the gap between the jackpot probability and the real probability of the jackpot) due to the fact that prize balls corresponding to this low probability cannot be obtained. It was.

  In this regard, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the small hit is mounted, the big hit game is performed with the same behavior as the small open per game (small hit game), and thereafter, an advantageous gaming state is achieved. In the first place, the technical philosophy is larger than that of conventional gaming machines in order to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest when games per small opening (small winning games) are performed in that specific winning species that function to be transferred are not prepared It is different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the small hit is mounted, the winning type (big hit A , Jackpots B to E) are prepared. When opening the big prize opening 2003, first, the lottery result that the opening of the big prize opening 2003 is confirmed in the big hit lottery (a big hit A where a large amount of outgoings are expected to be obtained, and a medium amount of outgoings is expected) Display effect on whether or not a big hit B ~ E, a small hit that is expected to get a small amount of balls) is obtained (a challenge bonus effect pattern appears regardless of the type of hit) I have to). As a result, when it is shown that the same lottery result is obtained, it is possible for the player to know that at least a small amount of balls are available. After that, there will be further challenge bonus effects on how many balls can be piled up (from a small amount of balls to a medium or large amount of balls) I have to.

  Further, when the number of winning balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability variation function or the time reduction function operates). In this respect, in the present embodiment, the probability depends on how many balls are stacked (a big hit A in which a large amount of balls are expected to be obtained or a big hit B to E in which a medium amount of balls are expected to be obtained). The degree of expectation for the operation of the variable function (probability of transition to a gaming state in which the probability variable function operates) is made different. In this case, a challenge bonus as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes appear so that the probabilities of changing to the gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated after the completion of the special winning opening 2003 is different will appear. It will function as a production. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that a winning probability “3/400” without operation of the condition device is added to a winning probability “1/400” with operation of the condition device. With “1/100”, not only can a prize ball be paid out to a player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also that a game state advantageous to the player can be entered. Can also be made aware.

  In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function when it is stacked until it is possible to acquire a large amount of balls (probability change expectation at the time of big hit A) is 100%, and at least medium amount The expectation level for the operation of the probability variation function when it is stacked until it becomes possible to acquire a lot of balls (expected probability when the jackpot is A to E) is 82%, and it is possible to acquire a medium amount of balls The expectation for the operation of the probability variation function when stacked until it is done (expected probability when the jackpot is B to E) is 61.7%, and there are many expectations for the number of balls that can be obtained The more likely it is, the higher the expected probability of change.

  Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus production, since it is positioned as a default production state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, there is a large amount of ball winning according to the winning of the big hit Unlike conventional gaming machines where whether or not a basic game (basic production) is used, even if a small opening per game (small hit game) where a small amount of balls can be obtained is performed, Since the grand prize opening 2003 is only opened in conformity with the default performance state, a decrease in the game entertainment is suppressed. Furthermore, when in the second production mode, the probability of appearance of the hit production (probability of entering the challenge bonus) is equivalent to the fact that it is positioned as a default production state that a small amount of balls can be obtained. Is set to a higher probability (higher probability of winning the big hit plus the winning probability of the big hit), and as a result, a prize ball corresponding to the lower probability is not acquired, so It is also avoided that the decrease in the value.

  And in order to be able to have the challenge bonus performance pattern that realizes such games and performance in the second performance mode, not only is the lottery for the small hits performed in the first performance mode, At the time of winning a small hit, the varying times Ta2 to Td2 of the length corresponding to the changing times Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of winning the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, a small win is not originally required, and a display effect is basically performed as to whether or not a big hit is won based on the big hit probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that is not easily noticed by the player if it is a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a special symbol variation. If the production method that shows the result of the big hit lottery at the time of the stop is simply adopted, after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period when the game per small opening (small hit game) is executed or the opening period of the big prize opening 2003 thereafter The existence of the game will be conspicuous, and the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, even when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set at the timing t1 (when the special symbol variation ends). The display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated and is continued. Further, when entering the first closing control period, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at the timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicates that the special winning opening 2003 is opened. The set of the command is ignored without switching to the interval effect, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. When the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts at timing t2, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It is executed in such a manner that it is switched to a winning clarification effect indicating whether or not (hit a big hit), and an opening effect.

  In this case, the first closing control upon execution of the small opening per game (small hit game) after the special symbol is stopped, as well as the above-mentioned effect at the small hit is positioned as one effect that appears when the big hit is lost. By performing it over the period and the opening period of the grand prize opening 2003 after that, it is indicated that it is a big hit loss, and the display effect for the next change (special symbol hold-up) is relatively early Can be migrated. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, because the production proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called highly anticipated loss production. This makes it difficult to notice, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating in accordance with the winning of the small hit.

  And in the pachinko machine 1 in which such 1st production mode and 2nd production mode are prepared, especially peripheral control MPU4150a concerning this embodiment is 1st production mode as above-mentioned. Mode compulsory control means for creating a mode compulsory period that is forcibly determined to be any one of the effect modes of the second effect mode and is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the compulsorily determined effect mode. Yes. Then, a first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined as the first production mode, and the first predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the control related to the creation of the mode forcing period is performed so that the second predetermined period (for example, the next one month) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode.

  According to such a mode compulsory period, the hall side conceals this from the player even though the small hits are mounted by the appearance of the extended effect pattern as described above during the first predetermined period. In addition, by performing win display in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the basis of the jackpot winning probability “1/400”, a prize ball is awarded to the player with the jackpot winning probability “1/400”. The first game-specific pachinko machine that can be paid out can be started (first newly opened store). In addition, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses in this way, not only the big hit but also the small hit is one kind as a hit where the winning ball can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003. The above-mentioned challenge bonus performance pattern to be dealt with is higher than the winning probability “1/400” in the first predetermined period, coupled with the fact that it is difficult to notice the presence of the small hit in the first predetermined period. Based on the probability “1/100”, the winning display is performed in the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  In this case, a new winning ball can be paid out to the player with a higher probability “1/100” obtained by adding the winning probability “3/400” to the big win winning probability “1/400”. The second pachinko machine with the second game specification can be started to operate (second new store opening). As a result, while the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine that has not only the contents of the effects on the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the game specifications related to the appearance of the game is newly operated. Such an impression can be given to the player.

  Further, according to such a mode compulsory period, unless it is determined that the predetermined date (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and the specific date and time (second predetermined period) is present, The change control from the first effect mode is not permitted, and some effect modes (second effect modes) of the plurality of effect modes are not yet appearing and are still concealed. Will be done. In this case, as the date passes after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall, the production function that has been hidden until then is gradually exposed, and finally, it is exposed. Since the production function can be selectively used by the player's operation, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). Is obtained, the fluctuation concerning the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started. If this is the case (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”, and the decoration Each of the symbol changes is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) including the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in the variation time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a ′ including contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggling by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) Accordingly, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “03H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, the effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit in which the “extended effect pattern” is adopted (the effect command “01H”). Since there is a deviation in the production time, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern including the content of the display production a at the time of the big hit, and the middle stage of the content of the display production a does not develop. As described above, it functions only as a midway effect pattern that ends at.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “01H” is “non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern)”. Therefore, there is no deviation in the production time with the production pattern (production command “01H”), and the production pattern including the contents of the display production a ′ at the time of the big hit (production command “01H”). It will function as an effect pattern at the time of all loses (an effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). Further, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hit at the effect command “02H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line) appears, the effect pattern at the time of the loss (the bonus challenge stop symbol is the predetermined symbol) for this effect pattern (the effect command “02H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side obtains a losing (pure losing) that is not won by either the big hit or the small hit. Based on this, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) has started. Then (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” is started.

  That is, for the display effect pattern when the effect command is “04H”, when the display effect pattern when the effect command is “03H” is in the first effect mode, the effect includes the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit. In view of the fact that it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the pattern (effect command “01H”), it is prepared to compensate for this (effect pattern at the time of losing when in the first effect mode). It is a thing. Therefore, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” is the “non-extension effect pattern” when in the second effect mode, contrary to the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H”. The production time including the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit (the production command “01H”) will be shifted, and the production pattern including the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit It can not function as a production pattern at the time of loss.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” and the fluctuation time Tc2 when the fluctuation number is “10” shown in FIG. The fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 is prepared. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, a display effect pattern described later (see FIG. 106A) including the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” is “non-extended. Since it appears as a “display effect pattern”, there is no deviation in the effect time between the effect pattern (effect command “09H”). Therefore, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H” is not extended including the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” when in the second effect mode. The effect pattern at the time of losing the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) including the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit is started by starting the dynamic display of the display effect pattern of The design is made to function as an effect pattern that does not appear on a predetermined design line.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c ′ thus started (effect command “04H”), for example, such a decorative pattern is displayed at the variation time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives. A display effect c ′ including content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. Become.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” appears when a specific loss variation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It is possible to function as each display display pattern for the big hit display effect patterns of the two types of effect contents a and c ′, and functions as a display display effect pattern for any of the big hit display effect patterns. Whether to do this is selectively set based on whether the first effect mode or the second effect mode is set. As a result, for the two big hit effect commands “01H” and “09H”, the big hit effect commands “01H” are in the first production mode and in the second production mode. , The appearance probability of the loss display effect pattern prepared for the big hit display effect pattern of “09H” can be changed.

  More specifically, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the lose effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode.

  Further, regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, various display effects patterns with different degrees of expectation can appear according to the effect modes without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step (see FIG. 107).

  The reason why such a special effect can be realized is that an effect command in which the length of each effect is adjusted by using the special symbol stop timing t3 as the effect time for one loss variation time Ta4. While having a big hit effect pattern of “09H” and a variation time Ta1 shorter than the loss variation time Ta4, at least the first closed control period after symbol stoppage is added and used as the effect time. A jackpot effect pattern (first effect mode) of the effect command “01H” in which the length of the command is adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the big hit effect pattern with the effect time adjusted in this way, one hit change time Ta4 is associated with the big hit effect patterns of the change commands “01H” and “09H” having different change times Ta1 and Tc1. When this loss variation time Ta4 is selected, it becomes possible to determine which production contents a and c ′ appear on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side. Furthermore, even when such a first closing control period added as the production time is won for winning the big winning opening 2003 (big hit or small win), a fixed length regardless of the type. It is important to set the time (for example, 8 seconds) with such a length in order to realize such a special effect especially including an effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  FIG. 106 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the first effect mode is set, the fluctuation time Tc1 shown in FIG. 96 is based on the fact that the big win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having a start is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect c (for example, a specific mission c) associated with the effect command “09H”. Dynamic display of the extended effect pattern including the contents of whether or not the character C can succeed (whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended production pattern (production command “09H”) including the contents of the display production c started in this way is in a situation where the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc1 has arrived. This display effect c is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission c to succeed or fail).

  That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” shown in FIG. 96 is not prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 when the fluctuation number is “4”. However, when the first production mode is set, such an “extended production pattern” is adopted, and the production time with the production pattern (production command “04H”) is shifted. Is to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when in the first production mode, there is a production relevance (a jackpot production pattern, a loss production pattern) with the display production pattern when the variation number is “4”. ) Is not given.

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the stoppage of the special symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Tc1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  In this case, since the display effect c described later (no development, loss) associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. When it is continued, this will function as a “development display effect c (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission c) is left”. Therefore, when this “development display effect c” appears, the special symbol is not seen from the player side even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be grasped as being still fluctuating. In addition, the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be grasped as being maintained in a temporarily stopped state despite being in a state after the final stoppage. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the big win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  At this time, however, the extended effect pattern (effect command “09H”) including the contents of the display effect c is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative design is performed only in a small display area (a portion that is difficult to pay attention to such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the display effect c. However, it is more desirable to let the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be successful without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern including the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, it is actually Despite the fact that the decorative design has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successfully achieved (for example, a character C who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such expectation. As a result, the “development display effect c” appears. In this “development display effect c”, for example, using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, for example, a situation in which the character C again faces the enemy is displayed. An effect is made as to whether or not mission c can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect c (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission c can be successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extended effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command “10H” shown. As described above, the display effect c (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to notice that the small hit is the pachinko machine 1 mounted in the first effect mode. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after the above is shown.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern including the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, the specific mission is reached until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period arrives. The state of success in c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and an effect on whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (whether the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) Production such as no) appears. As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect c can appear in such a manner that the specific mission c is successful after the opening effect end timing t4, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H”. Will function as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c”.

  However, as described above, in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit, after the first closed control period having a certain length has ended, the closed control period has an indefinite length. The second closed control period appears further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit indication c) and the opening effect before the big hit game (right hit game is started by performing the right hit game) (Prompt to encourage) to be performed. Then, as a result of the handle lever 504 being operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the understanding speed of each player for these effects, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (timing ty), the second closing control period is set. As a result, the jackpot game and the performance during the jackpot game are started. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 104A, the second closing control period from timing t4 to timing ty is ended based on the operation of the handle lever 504 (indefinite). For example, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the handle lever 504 immediately after the end of the first closing control period having a certain length. When playing a game, the big hit explicit effect c and the opening effect are forced to advance to the next effect (effect during the big hit game) without cutting or causing the effect itself to appear almost at that time (effect skipping). It becomes.

  On the other hand, based on the fact that the small win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, the variation time Tc2 (here, the variation time shown in FIG. 96) is selected. Assuming that a change on a special symbol with a description (which will be described as being set at the same time as Tc1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is associated with the effect command “10H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern including the content of the display effect c at the time of a small hit (for example, whether the specific mission c can be successful (whether the character C can defeat the enemy) or not) is started. Is done. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “10H”) including the content of the display effect c thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 106A) associated with the effect command “09H”. Similarly, even in a situation where the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time Tc2 has arrived, the display effect c is not terminated (without causing the specific mission c to succeed or fail). Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern including the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”. In addition, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “09H” (FIG. 106) also includes the point of finalizing and stopping at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the big win lottery result for the big hit and the small hit, a single display mode is adopted, and the display mode is distinguished. What has not been done is as described above.

  Further, the display effect c in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc2 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 106A) associated with the command “09H”.

  In other words, even in the extended effect pattern including the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, However, there is a sense of expectation that the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop was successful (for example, a character C that has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy), despite the fact that the decorative design has been confirmed and stopped. Under the circumstances, the “development display effect c” appears. In the “development display effect c”, for example, a state in which the character C again faces the enemy is displayed using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect is made as to whether or not a specific mission c can be successful.

  Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period arrives, the specific mission c is not shown (the character C defeats the enemy), and the specific mission is not shown. An effect about whether or not c can be successful (an effect such as whether or not the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (b), the extended effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H” has a certain length. After the end of the one closed control period, the second closed control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closed control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t5 of the control relating to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “10H” In this way, the losing explicit effect c appears in the form of the failure of the mission c. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c”.

  In this losing explicit effect c, for example, as a big hit defeat effect different from the losing explicit effect a, for example, an attack by the character C is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character C is regretted. Done.

  According to the extended effect pattern associated with such effect commands “09H” and “10H”, the opening timing t5 of the special winning opening 2003 from the start timing t0 of the special symbol (or the second closing control period). The time until the jackpot clearing effect c ends) will function as one effect for winning the jackpot, so that the player's gaze can be directed to such an effect, It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 when the losing explicit effect c is performed, and consequently the small hits.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side obtains a losing (pure losing) that is not won by either the big hit or the small hit. Based on this, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that it is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) has started. Then (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of losing associated with the effect command “11H” (for example, whether the specific mission c can be succeeded (the character C is the enemy) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern including the content of whether it can be defeated or not) is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) including the content of the display effect c started in this way is displayed when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped as the variation time Tc3 elapses. Terminate c without extending it (by failing a particular mission c).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”. In addition, in the variation of the decorative symbol, when the fixed symbol variation is stopped at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss suspension mode when extended. Yes.

  Further, the display effect c in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc3 under the temporary stop in the manner of stopping the loss when the decorative symbol is extended. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 106A and 106B) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern including the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”, the continuation expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, an attack from the enemy) The character C who has fallen in response to the situation is not shown), and the player is made aware that the specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues after timing t3 shown in FIGS. 106A and 106B can be made to function as an effect pattern with development.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, whether or not the specific mission c has been successful until the timing t4 has arrived even in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands “09H” and “10H”. (Whether or not the character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of the timing t4, whether or not the specific mission c is successful (whether or not the character C defeats the enemy) ) May be displayed. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even in such an effect method, the small win time display effect c is the small hit time. In addition to the fact that most of the first closed control period is used for the display effect c, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of the character C appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such display effects appear when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the probability of winning the big hit without being aware of the presence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such gameability (rendering performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not to do.

  However, even when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a. The winning commands 2003 based on the winning of small hits despite the fact that there is no change in the normal external disadvantaged game state as well as the contents of the production commands “09H” to “11H” from the side 2003 By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content on the premise of opening the game, the opportunity frequency of winning the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 compared to when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if is greatly increased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the second effect mode is set, the variation time shown in FIG. 96 is based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 does not extend including the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit that is associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect c ′ in the second effect mode is different from the content of the display effect c in the first effect mode. In the form, a display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect) including contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening 2003 is confirmed to be open Pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbol variation display is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and a big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) at the time of the effect command “09H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is used as the bonus challenge stop symbol in the variation time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives. A display effect c ′ including contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with the stop display mode that appears. At a timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, a bonus challenge stop symbol is set in a predetermined manner so that the player can grasp that the opportunity to acquire a prize ball is given by opening the special winning opening 2003. The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode that appears on the symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period and is acquired by the player by opening the big prize opening 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect c ′ regarding how many prize balls are possible, a countdown effect c ′ in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Like to do.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect c ′ is, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed by a right-handed game. When the handle lever 504 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the countdown display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n as soon as the first closing control period ends. Become. However, as will be described later, since the countdown effect c ′ has a different expectation from the countdown effect a ′ described above, the content of the effect is different from each other (for example, the background color is different). I have to.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c ′, when the operation handle is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives as shown in FIG. As soon as the game ball passes immediately after the effective gate 6010n, the end timing ty of the second closed control period arrives earlier than in the first effect mode. Thereby, a challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is shown which open mode (game per long opening, game per middle opening, game per small opening) is used to open the big prize opening 2003. That is, in this case, the player will not only play the big hit game but also play the game ball to the big prize opening 2003 not only when the game is per small opening (small hit game), thereby being in the first production mode. Compared to the above, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (c), in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the handle lever 504 is kept for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect c ′ changes to “0”. It is also assumed that there will be a situation where the camera is not operated. In this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closed control period, the countdown display is “0” in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as being displayed as it is.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big win is won. In the case of FIG. 104 (d) and FIG. 106 (b)), it cannot occur. In this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained is the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant production state (no production state) where no production is newly performed. Of course, this also dramatically increases the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, FIG. If the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 1 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “10H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “10H”) including the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 when the display effect c ′ including contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the bonus challenge is stopped. The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  However, as mentioned above, the special symbol is stopped during the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening per game (small hit game) is started when the small bonus is won. It consists only of the time (first closed control period with a certain length) until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires, and when the timer expires, the valid gate Regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed to 6010n, a game per small opening (small hit game) is started (see FIG. 93).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “10H”, the decorative design is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”. When the game is stopped with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect, a countdown effect c ′ in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as the big winning opening 2003 is opened, and the variation of the decorative design is started. The contents of the production from the timing t0 until the challenge bonus production is performed are not distinguished, and when the handle lever 504 is operated according to the instruction of the production, the challenge bonus is passed from the countdown production c 'through the preceding production (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effects as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “09H”). Accordingly, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by winning the big prize opening 2003. In addition to games and games per mid-opening, it is possible to perform an effect display regarding which game mode appears, including games per small opening. Thereby, as compared with the case in the first production mode, the game performance (production performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. . Of the games per long opening, games per medium opening, and games per small opening, the game per small opening ends in a relatively short time. As to whether or not the winning is won, the player may be able to grasp by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big hit in the production within the first closed control period.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “10H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but the small hit is treated as a no-chance loss that does not give an opportunity to win a prize ball. The extended effect pattern in the first effect mode, and the small hit is treated as a high chance hit with an opportunity to win a prize ball (similar to the effect pattern at the big hit (effect command “09H”)) This is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the second effect mode. In this case, the effect information related to the win is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, thereby realizing a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. To be able to.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side obtains a losing (pure losing) that is not won by either the big hit or the small hit. Based on this, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that it is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) has started. Then (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”, and the decorative pattern Start each change.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “11H”) including the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. A display effect c ′ including content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “11H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “11H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, the effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c at the time of the big hit where the “extended effect pattern” is adopted (the effect command “09H”). Since there is a deviation in the production time, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern including the content of the display production c at the time of the big hit, and the middle stage of the content of the display production c does not develop. As described above, it functions only as a midway effect pattern that ends at.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern including the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” appears as the “non-extended display effect pattern”. There is no deviation in the production time with the pattern (production command “09H”), and the production at the time of losing the production pattern (production command “09H”) including the contents of the display production c ′ at the time of the big hit It will function as a pattern (an effect pattern in which a bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the effect command “10H” is also the effect pattern at the time of the hit. Since the bonus challenge stop symbol appears as an effect pattern appearing on a predetermined symbol line, the effect pattern at the time of loss (bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined symbol) for this effect pattern (effect command “10H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the line).

  As described above, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H” corresponds to the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 105 (b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command “11H” is shown in FIG. 105 (c). The production command corresponds to the display production pattern when the production command is “03H”, and although the production contents differ from each other, the production series addressed to itself (production contents a series, production contents) c series) function as performance patterns having substantially the same role.

  However, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” in the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”) is prepared. Not. That is, in the production content c series, if a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” is prepared, in the first production pattern, the display production pattern corresponding to the production command “09H” is displayed. Although it can function effectively as a loss display effect pattern, the second effect pattern cannot function as a display loss effect pattern for the display effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”. Therefore, despite being given a relatively long time, there was a display effect pattern dedicated to losing without the jackpot symbol combination appearing, and we were worried that this might reduce the entertainment interest of this game Is.

  Therefore, when in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”, as the lose effect pattern, the effect pattern at the time of losing (pure loss) that does not satisfy a specific condition is adopted. Only the effect pattern when the specific condition is satisfied (the display effect pattern when the effect command is “10H”) functions as the only presence in place of the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss) To come. That is, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), unlike the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”), the “development display production c” appears. Is expected to be set within a range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit. However, the production content c of the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”) has a longer time than the production content a of the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”). As the jackpot expectation degree, it is executed as an effect with a higher expectation than the effect content a. Therefore, the expectation degree of big hit when the “development display effect c” appears, even if it is within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, this is required as an appropriate value described later. Setting is relatively easy.

  In addition, regarding the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” in the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”), the effect content a is in the second effect mode. By functioning as a loss effect pattern for the hit effect pattern (effect commands “09H”, “10H”) of the effect content c series, not the hit effect pattern of the series (effect commands “01H”, “02H”) As described above, it is avoided that the jackpot symbol combination does not appear as a display effect pattern dedicated to losing. Therefore, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), when in the second production mode, a loss prepared for a winning production pattern (production commands “09H”, “10H”). The lost production pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the production pattern (production command “11H”), as much as the selection probability of the display production pattern of the production command “04H” is added.

  Although details are omitted, each display effect pattern associated with each of the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect b series shown in FIG. Display having the same form as each display effect pattern (refer to FIGS. 105A to 105D) respectively associated with the a series effect commands “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” It is set as a production pattern. Further, the display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands “12H”, “13H”, “14H” of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 96 are the effect commands “09H”, “ It is set as a display effect pattern having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 106A to 106C) associated with “10H” and “11H”. That is, each display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 96 and the effect content d shown in FIG. The production relations between the display production patterns associated with the series production commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” are the production commands “01H”, “02H”, Each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (d)) respectively associated with “03H” and “04H”, and effect commands “09H”, “10H”, “11H” of the effect content c series. Are set so as to have the above-described effect relationship with each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 106 (a) to (c)).

  FIG. 107 (a) is a table showing the jackpot expectation degree in the first effect mode separately for each effect content series, and FIG. 107 (b) is a challenge in the second effect mode. It is a table | surface which shows a bonus rush expected degree etc. according to each production content series, respectively. In addition, about the numerical value which shows a probability, since the 2nd decimal place is rounded off and it has shown as a numerical value to the 1st decimal place, the probability total value of each element may not become 100%.

  According to such a setting aspect relating to the display effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the display of the contents of effect a is performed for the big hit expectation degree that is the expectation degree that the win effect appears in the first effect mode. The big hit expectation degree when the production pattern appears is “0.5%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display production pattern of the production content b appears is “1.5%”, and the production content c is displayed. The big hit expectation degree when the production pattern appears is “13.7%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display production pattern of the production content d appears is “33.1%”. When the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, the big hit expectation is “100%”, which is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect contents e, a confirmed effect that the big hit is won appears regardless of the effect mode.

  Further, regarding the big hit expectation degree (expectation degree at which the hit effect appears) when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode is in the developed stage, when the developed effect content a appears The big hit expectation degree of "1.3%", the big hit expectation degree when the development content b after development appears "3.7%", the big hit when the development content c after development appears The degree of expectation is “25%”, and the degree of expectation for jackpot when the production content d after development appears is “72.7%”.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the challenge bonus entry expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the hit effect appears in the second effect mode, is when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears. The challenge bonus entry expectation degree is “7.9%”, and the challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ appears is “11.8%”, and the display effect of the effect content c ′ is displayed. The challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the pattern appears is “15.4%”, and the challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears is “10%”.

  That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d are the jackpot effect patterns (effect command “01H”, effect command “05H” set as the extended effect patterns. ”), A non-extended display effect pattern (effect command“ 04H ”, effect command“ 08H ”) that can only function as a loss effect pattern when in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H” and the effect command “08H”) prepared in this way is used in the second effect mode for the hit effect pattern (effect command “09H” for the effect content c ′. ”, The effect command“ 10H ”) and the hit effect pattern for the effect content d ′ (the effect command“ 12H ”, the effect command“ 13H ”).

  According to the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H”, when in the first effect mode, the expectation that a win effect appears including the developed effect contents a and b. Although the degree (expected degree of jackpot) is lowered, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d), thereby It can be avoided that only display effect patterns that cannot be expected are repeatedly performed. Furthermore, for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d, the appearance probability including the effect contents c and d after development is low, but a win effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d. The degree (expected degree of jackpot) is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b), and thereby, when the specific display effect pattern (effect contents c and d) appears, It will be possible to improve.

  Conversely, the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H” is used as a display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series is increased by that amount (operation on the appearance probability). As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of appearance between the contents a to d and the expectation level at which the hit effect appears, as compared with the first effect mode, and the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side can be reduced. Even if it is not changed one by one, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects.

  Moreover, the display effect associated with the effect commands “04H” and “08H” regarding the disparity between the effect contents regarding the expectation level (challenge bonus entry expectation degree) at which the winning effect appears when in the second effect mode. In addition to being used as a display effect pattern for the production contents c and d series, the pattern can be used as a winning combination for winning a winning ball by opening the big winning opening 2003, and one type of small hit is also available. Is further reduced (an operation to reduce the disparity in expectation level where a hit effect appears).

  According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, the display effect patterns of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ are relatively likely to appear regardless of the type of the effect contents a ′ to d ′. Become. In addition, the entry probability (probability of execution of the winning effect) of the challenge bonus effect in which the granting of the opportunity for winning the prize ball is confirmed will be more equal than in the first effect mode (here, the contents of the effect) a) to d ′) (within a range of ± 10%), even if any production content a ′ to d ′ appears due to the above-mentioned gap in the appearance probability being filled It becomes easier for a person to expect that an opportunity for winning a prize ball will be given.

  In this regard, when in the second production mode, when the challenge bonus production is entered (executed), the “big prize opening 2003 is released in any manner (game per long open, game per medium open, game per small open). Since it is characterized by the effect “whether it is done”, it is better to make it appear more easily as a display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ than when it appears to be biased to any one. It is more desirable to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ according to the present embodiment, the effect content a ′ is the smallest regarding the appearance probability of the game per long and middle opening. It becomes gradually larger in the order of production contents b ′, c ′, d ′. In addition, with regard to the appearance probability of the game per small opening, the production content a ′ is the largest, and gradually decreases in the order of the production content b ′, c ′, and d ′. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears, the possibility that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening is certainly high, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment) , About 40 to 50) is determined to be acquirable, and there is a color with a sense of expectation that the big winning opening 2003 will be opened by a game per long opening or a game per middle opening You can enjoy as a director. When the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears, the probability that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per long opening or the game per middle opening is the probability that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening. Therefore, it is determined that at least a small amount of prize balls can be acquired as a privilege. It will function as an effect of shades such as whether or not it is opened. Then, the display effect patterns of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ each function as an effect having a hue between the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ and the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. The display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′, and the display effect pattern of the effect content c ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. Is darker. Therefore, the display effect patterns of such effect contents a ′ to d ′ are all relatively likely to appear, so that the player can enjoy the effects of various shades.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the expectation degree at which the hit effect appears for the above-described operation for reducing the difference in the expectation level at which the hit effect appears between the contents of the production in comparison with that in the first effect mode. The size relationship is to be reversed depending on the production mode. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and (b), when in the first production mode, the expectation degrees of the production contents b and c are “1.5%” and “13”, respectively. .7% ”, which is smaller than the expectation level“ 33.1% ”of the production content d, while the expectation level of the production contents b ′ and c ′ is in the second production mode. They are “11.8%” and “15.4%”, respectively, and are larger than the expectation degree “10%” of the production content d ′. Even with such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  However, when the production pattern of the production content d ′ appears, the expectation degree (probability) that the winning production (challenge bonus production) is executed is certainly greater than when the production pattern of the production contents b ′ and c ′ appears. Although it is low, as long as it enters the challenge bonus production, the big winning opening 2003 is opened by a game with a long and middle opening with a higher probability than the production pattern of the production contents b ′ and c ′. It is easy to get a lot of balls. Therefore, the production patterns of the production contents b ′ and c ′ and the production pattern of the production content d ′ are divided according to the player, and such various shades are given depending on the display production pattern. As a result, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  Next, an example of an effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the control for opening the special winning opening 2003 is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 96, FIG. 105 (a) and FIG. 106 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E). The content of the production does not differ depending on the game, and the type of control is not shown and the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 (in this case, the control for the big hit game) is started. It becomes. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first production mode, the type of jackpot and the period are ended using the period when the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 is performed. An effect that can indicate the game state after the game is performed is performed.

  That is, as described above, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state is either big hit A or B, after the big hit game is finished, both the time reduction function and the probability variation function are activated. It will be controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when either of the big hits A and B is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first shows that the big hit is won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, and then the long-time opening / closing pattern and the medium time An effect indicating the information (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) relating to the amount of a ball to be displayed as to which of the open / close patterns is used to open the big winning opening 2003 is performed (effect during big hit game). In addition, even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed as the big hit game effect relating to the amount of balls, the big hit is won in the big hit explicit effects a to d. When clearly indicating, the information (type of jackpot) concerning the amount of balls to be played may be displayed together (simultaneously displayed).

  In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state is one of the big hits C to E, after the big hit game is finished, the external disadvantageous game state in which the time-shortening function does not operate (the probability variation function also operates) The normal external disadvantageous game state or the probability variation external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function is activated). Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is ended, whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed.

  Therefore, when one of the big hits C to E is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first indicates that the big hit is won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, and then either of the big hits A or B By performing an effect different from the effect during the big hit game when is won, an effect indicating that one of the big hits C to E of the big hits A to E is won is performed ( Production during the big hit game). In addition, since the opening mode of the game per mid-opening is adopted at the time of winning the big hits C to E, simply indicating that the big hits C to E have been won, information on the amount of balls It will be shown. In addition, even for an effect that indicates that one of the big hits C to E is won, even if the effect is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed, the big hit is demonstrated in the big hit explicit effects a to d. It may also be displayed (simultaneously displayed) when clearly indicating that it has been won.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96, FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. 106 (a), the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is an opportunity to open the grand prize opening 2003 in the second rendering mode. Depending on the type of winning (big hit A to big hit E, small hit), the content of the production does not differ, and the type is not shown, and the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 is kept secret (here Then, the control for the big hit game or the small hit game) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the second presentation mode, the winning type (big hit, small hit) is utilized by using the period when the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 is performed. , The type of jackpot), the gaming state after the end of the period, and the like, the above-described challenge bonus effect is performed.

  That is, in the opening effect (challenge bonus effect) in the second effect mode, first, in what form (game per long open, game per medium open, game per small open) is released. An effect is shown in which information (such as a big bonus, a regular bonus, or a small bonus) relating to the amount of balls to be played is shown. As a result, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per long opening (big bonus), it is automatically shown that the game is controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state based on the winning of the big hit A. It will be. In addition, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening (small bonus), it is naturally indicated that the winning is a small winning and the gaming state is not changed. It becomes.

  However, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by a game per middle opening (regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as an opening effect. As a result, when the character wins in the battle effect, it is shown that the game is controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state based on the winning of the big hit B. On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the battle production, it is indicated that one of the big hits C to E is won, and after the opening performance (big hit game) ends, the time is shortened. It is controlled to an external disadvantageous game state in which the function does not operate (a normal external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function does not operate, or a probability variation external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function operates). Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is ended, whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the predetermined latent effect state is limited to a period until a special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it indicates that it is in a probable external disadvantaged game state, while when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I am doing so. And when the character wins in this battle effect, it shows that it is won by big hit, and when the character is defeated, it shows that it is normally in an external disadvantaged game state, until the period of synchronization ends. The latent production state is terminated without waiting.

  As described above, according to the latent effect technique in which the current gaming state is indicated until the period until the special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, as a player, It becomes easy to enjoy whether the game state is in the game state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the game state being kept secret for a long period of time even though the time-saving function is not activated. It should be noted that another form of effect for informing the game state in the latent effect state (“unclear mode” to be described later) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Incidentally, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 105A, the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 96 when in the first effect mode includes an “extended effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect a. However, as shown in FIG. 108, in addition to the “extended effect pattern”, a “non-extended display effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect a is also associated. Also good.

  That is, in this case, when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the “extended effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect a and the display effect a. One of the “non-extended display effect patterns” including the content is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern.

  Here, as a technique relating to the selection of the “extended effect pattern” including the content of the display effect a and the “non-extended display effect pattern” including the content of the display effect a, for example, (a) a predetermined based on a random number Based on the result of the effect lottery, a method of selecting either “extended effect pattern” including the content of the display effect a or “non-extended display effect pattern” including the content of the display effect a, or (b) jackpot Based on the type of jackpot won in the lottery, a method of selecting either “extended effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect “a” or “non-extended display effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect “a”, etc. In addition, a method combining (A) and (B) can be employed.

  Among these, when the method (A) is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are associated with the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern”, respectively. The “extended effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect “a” when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first effect mode according to the ratio of the random number values associated in advance. Then, each appearance probability with the “non-extended display effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect a is determined. Regarding the setting of the appearance probability, it is important that the expectation of jackpot is higher when the “extended effect pattern” appears than the “non-extended display effect pattern”. It is more desirable to entertain.

  Further, when the method (b) is adopted, when a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is won, dynamic display of “non-extended display effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect a is displayed. Is started by the liquid crystal display device 1400. According to such a production method, at a timing t1, a winning result for at least a specific winning type (for example, big hit A) is displayed.

  For example, when a jackpot symbol (a jackpot demonstrating effect that clearly indicates a big hit) appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous for the player. In the first closed control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs an opening effect such as “Congratulations!” To congratulate the player. For example, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, it is effective if the display is switched to the effect display indicating that the big hit game should be started by the right-handed game. The timing tx when the game ball passes through the gate 6010n is likely to arrive relatively earlier than in the case of the extended display effect pattern, and in the subsequent big hit game, a special big hit effect dedicated to the “big hit A” is performed. Become. However, when a hit effect (a big hit explicit effect that clearly indicates a big hit) does not appear at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A, which is the most advantageous for the player” It will be possible to grasp that it is not won. And in this case, when the big hit explicit production appears through the above-mentioned continuous expected production by the “extended production pattern”, it is possible to grasp that any of “big hit B” to “big hit E” has been won. It will be.

  Further, when adopting a method combining (A) and (B), an effect lottery table is prepared for each type of jackpot, and based on the acquired random number value while referring to the effect lottery table. Thus, either “extended effect pattern” or “non-extended display effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect a is selected. In other words, by providing an effect lottery table for each type of jackpot, it becomes possible to vary the selection rate between the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” in each table. Thereby, for example, the expectation of the type of winning jackpot varies depending on whether the winning combination is clearly indicated as “extended effect pattern” or “non-extended display effect pattern”. In addition to the fact that the “non-extension production pattern” has a lower jackpot expectation, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is higher when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit. , “Expansion effect pattern” has a higher jackpot expectation, but when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is lower. Is also possible.

  In addition to the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command “01H”, the effect command “05H” shown in FIG. 96, and the method related to the selection of “extended effect pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” The display effects patterns “09H” and “12H” can be similarly adopted. However, when the effect commands “01H” and “05H” are used as the display effect patterns, the display effect patterns “03H” and “07H” are lost to the display effect pattern as the winning effect pattern. It can function as a pattern.

  In the example described above with reference to FIG. 106A, the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 96 when in the first effect mode includes an “extended effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect a. However, as shown in FIG. 109, in addition to the “extended effect pattern”, an “extended effect pattern” including the contents of the display effect c may also be associated.

  That is, in the “extended effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c” associated with the effect command “02H”, the display effect is performed by extending the stop timing t1 of the special symbol. The content of the effect is not only the display effect pattern of the effect command “11H” when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 106 (c)), but the display effect after development in which the degree of expectation for jackpot is higher. There will be no production content. Therefore, when the production command “02H” shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first production mode, a part of the production command is assigned to the production contents in which the developed display production does not appear. In addition, it is possible to set the winning probability for small hitting higher while keeping the appearance probability of the display effect after development in the first effect mode low. In this case, when the player is in the second production mode, the probability of entering the challenge bonus production (the expectation level at which the production will appear) will be increased by the amount that the winning probability of the small hit is set higher. An opportunity to acquire a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003 can be given with a higher probability.

  In this case, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays “an extended effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a” and “the display effect c. One of the “extended effect patterns including contents” is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern. In addition, as a method related to selection of “extended effect pattern including the content of display effect a” and “extended effect pattern including the content of display effect c”, for example, based on a result of a predetermined effect lottery based on random numbers. Thus, it is possible to employ a method of selecting either “an extension effect pattern including the contents of the display effect a” or “an extension effect pattern including the contents of the display effect c”. When this method is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are “extended effect pattern including the contents of display effect a” and “extended effect pattern including the contents of display effect c”, respectively. In the first effect mode, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 96 is received, the contents of “display effect a are included. The appearance probabilities of “extended effect pattern” and “extended effect pattern including the contents of display effect c” are determined.

  In addition to the display effect pattern of the above-described effect command “02H”, the method for selecting “extended effect pattern including the contents of display effect a” and “extended effect pattern including the contents of display effect c” is selected. The display effect pattern of the effect command “06H” shown in FIG. 96 can be similarly adopted. When this effect command “06H” is adopted as the display effect pattern, the “extended effect pattern including the contents of the display effect b” and the “extended effect pattern including the contents of the display effect d” are selected. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number “15”, production command “15H”) shown in FIG. 96 for determining the big hit is prepared, but this variation pattern is omitted. May be. That is, in this case, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always appear when the special winning opening 2003 is opened in the second effect mode.

  By the way, in the case where the processing pattern of the game at the time of the big hit is triggered by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n when the accessory continuous operation device is started (in the case of the aforementioned challenge bonus), the small hit is originally There is a problem that it is easy for a player to grasp that it is not a big hit when winning. That is, in the case of a big hit with the operation of the condition device, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the game ball guide path unit 6010, the game ball is guided to the effective gate 6010n, and passes through this, thereby continuing the role. The actuator is activated and the attacker is released. In this way, in the big hit with the operation of the condition device, the operation of the continuous action device is left to the player's timing, whereas in the case of a small hit without the operation of the condition device, the game ball Regardless of whether or not passes through the effective gate 6010n, that is, even if the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, after the first closed control period having a certain length has elapsed, It will be released. Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display device 1400 (top plate side liquid crystal display device 244) is instructed to be right-handed, whether or not the player intentionally makes a right-handed player, or a right-handed player with a delay A player who is trying to make a determination can easily determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small win.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, and the preceding effect (notice) before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. (Direction) was executed. Therefore, the player expects a preceding effect regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit, and immediately makes a right turn based on the teaching of the liquid crystal display device, even if the gaming state is a small hit. The game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n within the first closed control period. As a result, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the winning ball 2003 is opened (opened for a short period) after the right-handed game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n, so that the player receives the lottery result. It is difficult to immediately determine whether the hit is a big hit or a small hit. Note that the short-term opening of the big prize opening 2003 after the timing when the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n is, for example, a so-called latent probability change in which, when the lottery result is a big hit, for example, a latent state is set without explicitly indicating a probability variation state. However, the player can also have an expectation that the lottery result is a big hit even if the winning opening 2003 is opened for a short period of time.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a game ball guiding path unit 6010 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a so that all right-handed game balls are supplied to the game ball guiding path unit 6010. Since the entrance end of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 is opened at the upper right of the game area 5a, the game ball that has been hit right and reaches the right side of the game area 5a enters the immediate game ball guiding path unit 6010. . Thereafter, after the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 immediately below the opening of the game ball guiding path unit 6010, the game ball always passes through the effective gate 6010n. Therefore, although the game ball has not passed through the effective gate 6010n at the stage where the game ball has passed through the effect gate 6011, the game machine may perform an effect that precedes the game ball passing through the effective gate. Become.

  As described above, the falling speed of the game ball is relaxed by the bent portion 6010d and the straight portion 6010e of the game ball guide path unit (also referred to as a warp unit) 6010, so that the game ball spends a predetermined time in the game. It passes through the ball guiding path unit 6010 and reaches the effective gate 6010n below the gaming ball guiding path unit. In this way, the gaming machine earns this time because it can earn time compared to the case where the game ball falls freely before passing the effect gate 6010n after passing the effect gate 6011. Use the time to improve the quality of the performance by taking a sufficiently long processing time for various effects such as the preceding effect, suggestion effect, notice selection, etc. that are generated when the game ball passes the effect gate 6011. can do.

  Next, an effective embodiment in the case of performing a game process performed when the lottery result is a big hit or a small win using the effect gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n will be described. When the main control board 4100 makes a lottery by entering the first starting port 2001 and determines that the big hit / small hit is established, the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command from the main control board 4100 and suggests the lottery result. A predetermined effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns and a special effect is started.

  As a special effect, for example, a duel scene in which an enemy character (boss zombie) appears and a player character (a warrior fighting a zombie) fights is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 displays a still image of a scene as if a boss zombie attacks the player on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and additionally displays a “right-handed” teaching. When the player makes a right turn in response to this instruction, when the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 and the peripheral control board 4140 receives the detection signal from the gate sensor, the player's interest is invited from the speaker. The sound effect is generated before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n for operating the accessory continuous activation device. At this point, the player expects or has the illusion that the lottery result is a big hit even if it is actually a small hit. When the game ball that has passed the stage gate 6011 passes the valid gate 6010n and the peripheral control board 4140 receives a detection signal from the gate switch of the valid gate 6010n, if the lottery result is a big hit, the warrior wins the zombie. (Big hit result presentation) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to suggest a big hit to the player.

  Then, the gaming machine ball is passed through the effective gate 6010n, so that the accessory continuous operation device is activated. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 is used for winning a big hit in accordance with the opening of the multiple winning openings 2003. Perform the production. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a small hit, since the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is not involved, the main control board 4100 can be used for a short period of the big winning opening 2003 without the passing of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n. To release. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 executes an effect that the warrior loses to the zombie (small hit result effect) on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and suggests that the player is not a big hit. According to the teaching in the liquid crystal display device 1400, when the player hits the game ball right without delay, the short-term opening of the big winning opening in the case of a small hit is actually after the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n. Done.

  In order to perform the preceding effect in which the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n without providing the effect gate 6011, the timing at which the game ball is fired by the player is indefinite, and the preceding effect is ahead of the result effect. It is difficult in the first place to generate. If the only effect that distinguishes whether it is a big hit or a small hit other than a big hit is performed with the passing of the effective gate of the game ball as a trigger, the production must be monotonous and uninteresting in the first place. Even if there is a right-handed teaching, the player does not regard this as important and cannot have a sufficient incentive to launch a game ball toward the effective gate 6010n. In addition, the player can easily know whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with the effect gate 6011 as described above. Although the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 has been described as being input to the peripheral control board 4140, the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 may be input to the main control board 4100. . At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the effect gate by a command from the main control board 4100.

  Since the preceding effect due to the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 is related to the result effect due to the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 determines the form of the preceding effect according to the lottery result. It may be changed. For example, the preceding effect when the lottery result is a big hit is a high frequency sound pattern, and the preceding effect when the lottery result is a small hit is a low frequency sound pattern different from this pattern. Further, as a preceding effect, the expectation / reliability for the big hit in the lottery result may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the form of a percentage. Further, a part of the result effect may be displayed as a preceding effect, and the result effect may be in a special form. For example, the result of a battle with a zombie may be displayed as a predecessor effect, and the expected degree of jackpot may be displayed as a result effect. Specifically, even if it is a small hit, an effect of overcoming the zombie with a preceding effect is performed, and a low probability is displayed as a result effect.

  Since the effect due to the passing of the game ball through the effect gate 6011 precedes the passage of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n, the game ball that has passed through the effect gate 6011 is surely valid within the controlled time. Must be able to pass through gate 6010n. Therefore, this is realized by directly connecting the effect gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n using the game ball guiding path unit 6010. If the effect gate is simply provided on the upper right side of the game area 5a, even if the game ball can pass through the effect gate, it cannot always pass through the effective gate 6010n. Also, it is possible to remove the effect gate from the game ball guiding path unit 6010 and provide a sensor at the end of the rail 6033, for example, but in this configuration, even if the game ball that has passed the sensor is strongly launched by the handle device It does not mean that the right area of the game area 5a is reached without exception. In addition, the production gate cannot be provided on the left side of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, the game ball that is right-handed before the big hit game is started and enters the game ball guiding path unit 6010 (game ball wasting means) is isolated from the outside in the game ball guiding path unit. In addition, the ball is consumed and wasted without being able to enter the first starting port 2001 and the general winning port 2004. In other words, it is a waste ball that forces the player to abandon the opportunity to receive a lottery. On the other hand, in order to ensure that the game ball passes through the production gate 6011 in the game ball guide path unit, the gaming machine gives the player an opportunity for additional production as a price, in exchange for the price of the waste ball, It is possible to change the prior suggestion effect (effect display of the effect display device 1400) regarding whether or not to shift to the big hit state (advantageous game state). Since the additional effect can be preceded by the result effect in a form related to the lottery result effect, the player has an effect that combines the preceding effect and the result effect compared to the case where the lottery result effect is simply performed. You can enjoy the benefits of high quality.

  In this way, the game ball launched by the launching means in a predetermined area that is not received by the predetermined starting port is detected by the main board (specific detection means) by the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n, If a game ball is detected by the specific detecting means when a predetermined effect is being performed among the effects performed by the peripheral control board (effect executing means), the player who loses the opportunity to be selected by lottery It is possible to increase the value of the production by expressing a specific production that can be beneficial to the user (value enhancement means). After the right-handed teaching is given when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit in a normal gaming state that is not in a gaming state in which the big prize opening is not opened (a big hit gaming state) and is not in a short-time state In the case of a small hit, it is clear that the first game ball that passed through the production gate within the specified time was a useless ball that was launched with the right-handed teaching but no opportunity to enter. The peripheral control board detects this waste ball, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the cumulative number of waste balls between jackpots (the higher the cumulative number, the higher the value of the waste balls) The liquid crystal display device 1400 may display a special effect image or a compensation effect moving image as a special effect (for example, a premium character).

  In addition, when a plurality of game balls pass using the production gate as a useless ball (in the case of a big hit, the game ball passes through the production gate before the grand prize opening is opened even if the game ball passes through the effective gate. The peripheral control board 4140 may change the effect according to the number of passed spheres. Furthermore, the degree of change in the production may be changed according to the value of the game ball, that is, according to 4 pachis, 1 pachis, and the like. For example, in the case of 1 patch compared to the case of 4 patches, the change degree of the effect is set to 1/4. In the case of 4 pachis, a predetermined change occurs in the production with one game ball. In the case of 1 pachis, the same change occurs in the production only after 4 balls are supplied as waste balls. For example, every time a pachi game ball passes through the production gate as a waste ball, the production screen is focused, the production screen density is increased, and the like.

  In the above description, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the lottery result (the effect of losing a zombie) is performed when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as in the case of the big win. In the case of small hits, the condition device is not activated and it is not meaningful to activate the accessory continuous operation device, so the effect of the lottery result is not triggered by the passing of the game ball at the valid gate 6010n, The display effect of the lottery result may be performed at the timing of passing through the effective gate 6010n after passing through the effect gate 6011. As described above, the time from when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 to reach the effective gate 6010n falls within a specific range by the game ball drop speed mitigation means described above of the game ball guiding path unit 6010. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it difficult for the player to determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit by showing the player a lottery result even if the lottery result is a big hit.

  In addition, when the lottery result is a small hit, the result presentation performed when the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n is assumed that the warrior is defeated by the enemy character. You may make it win an enemy character. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n in the game ball guiding path unit 6010. For example, the resin case member of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 may be opaque. Or you may make it cover the area | region of the production gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n with a decorative board. By making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effective gate 6010n while the effect gate 6011 can be visually recognized by the player, the gaming machine gives the player an effect caused by the passing of the game ball to the effect gate 6011. Suddenly it can be developed into a lottery result production to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect gate 6011, the player feels that the related effect is suddenly generated before the result effect that occurs when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. Can be given to. Note that if the lottery result is a small hit and the player's right-handed timing is delayed, or if the big prize opening has been opened for a short period of time, the peripheral control board 4140 passes the game ball through the effect gate. Even so, the predecessor effect is not generated. In addition, the peripheral control board 4140 may cause a movable accessory to behave as a preceding effect by the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 without being limited to the sound effect described above.

  In addition, as the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 and then passes through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 steps up related effects such as sound effect, liquid crystal effect, and movable accessory effect. It can also be executed. For example, when the lottery result is a big hit, the amount of movement of the movable accessory is reduced when the game ball passes the effect gate 6011, and the amount of movement of the movable accessory is increased when the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n. Or, a predetermined movable accessory is operated in the former case, and another movable accessory is operated in the latter case. Further, the gaming machine may change the aspect of the effect at the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n according to the number of game balls that have passed through the effect gate 6011 within a predetermined time. As described above, since the game ball always passes through the effect gate 4011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, the game result is out (small hit) even though the lottery result effect is left to the player's timing. In this case, the player can realize a gaming machine that can be expected to be a big hit until the end.

  Next, the operation value enhancing function, which is the most characteristic function of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described. This embodiment demonstrates the structure which can perform an operation value improvement effect as a reach effect in the period of the right-handed game started after the end of a big hit game. In addition, here, there are variation patterns 1 to 36 including variation numbers 1 to 15 shown in FIG. 96 as variation patterns. It is assumed to be a pattern.

  In FIG. 111, commands with variation numbers 30 to 36, variation contents, winning and varying times are illustrated as a list.

  The effect contents of the change patterns with the change numbers 30 to 32 are all display effects f including the introduction effect IA, the effect gate passing effect II, the operation effect IIIA, and the result effect IV. The winning species are different from big hit, small hit and lost, respectively, but the fluctuation times Tf1 to Tf3 are all 40 seconds. When these change patterns are selected, the main control MPU 4100a transmits corresponding commands 30H to 32H to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The effect contents of the change patterns with the change numbers 33 to 35 are all display effects g including the introduction effect IA, the operation effect IIIB, and the result effect IV. The winning species are different from big hits, small hits, and loses, but the fluctuation times Tg1 to Tg3 are all 30 seconds. When these change patterns are selected, the main control MPU 4100a transmits corresponding commands 33H to 35H to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The effect content of the change pattern of the change number 36 is a display effect g consisting of only the introduction effect IB. The winning species is a loss, and the fluctuation time Th1 is 10 seconds. When this variation pattern is selected, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a corresponding command 36H to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The introductory effect IA is a display effect that displays on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 (effect display means) a screen that notifies the occurrence of the effect gate passage effect and prompts the player to participate in the effect. FIG. 120 illustrates the introduction effect IA. Although a specific description will be given later, until an elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an enemy character zombie 1411 is displayed at the center of the screen 1410 in FIG. 120. When the predetermined period elapses, a message image is displayed on the screen 1410. 1413 and an image 1414 for urging the player to right-hand are displayed to notify that the player needs to participate.

  The introductory effect IB is a so-called gas display effect that ends in the presence of an effect gate passage effect. As with the introduction effect IA, the enemy character zombie 1411 is displayed at the center of the screen 1410 in FIG. 120 until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. However, unlike the introduction effect IA, the predetermined period has elapsed. Also, the decorative image 1412 (the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol) is displayed in the stop display mode without displaying the message image 1413 and the image 1414 for prompting the right-hand shot on the screen 1410. That is, since the introduction effect IA and the introduction effect IB have the same display effect mode displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 (effect display means) until a predetermined period of time elapses, an enemy is displayed at the center of the screen 1410 in FIG. When the character zombie 1411 is displayed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the production gate passage production II will occur.

  The effect gate passing effect II is that the game ball has passed through the effect gate (specific area) 6011 while the operation of the effect operation medium (effect operation means) such as the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 is invalidated. This is a display effect that changes the display mode of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1400 each time is detected. 121 (a) to 121 (d) and FIG. 122 illustrate the effect gate passing effect II.

  The operation effect IIIA is a display effect that changes the display mode of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1400 based on whether or not the effect operation medium is operated after the operation of the effect operation medium is validated. As will be described later, the operation of the effect operation medium is activated by having a predetermined number N of game balls pass through the effect gate 6011 within a predetermined limit period T2 included in the execution period (T1) of the effect gate passing effect II. Made on condition that 121 (e) to 121 (g) and FIG. 123 illustrate an operation effect IIIA.

  The operation effect IIIB is a display effect that changes the display mode of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the operation of the effect operation medium regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed the effect gate 6011. is there.

  The result display effect D is a display effect for notifying the lottery result. FIG. 121 (h) illustrates the result notification effect D.

  FIG. 112 illustrates time charts of various effects in the case of FIG. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the variation patterns 30 to 32 (the variation pattern of the operational value enhancement effect) are the first 10 seconds out of the variation time of 40 seconds, and the next 10 The second (T1) is assigned to the effect gate passing effect II, the next 10 seconds to the operation effect IIIA, and the last 10 seconds to the result effect IV.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), the variation patterns of the variation numbers 33 to 35 are the introduction effect IA for the first 10 seconds, the operation effect IIIB for the next 10 seconds, and the last of the variation time of 30 seconds. 10 seconds are assigned to each result presentation IV.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (c), in the variation pattern of variation number 36, the entire variation time of 10 seconds is assigned to the introduction effect IB.

  FIG. 113 shows an example of distribution of the occurrence probability of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 36 in each winning type (big hit, small hit, and loss). In this way, by changing the distribution of the generation probability of various variation patterns according to the winning type, it is possible to vary the expected degree of occurrence of the big hit depending on what variation pattern is produced.

  In the example of FIG. 113, the probability of jackpot at the time of occurrence of a variation pattern of variation numbers 30 to 32 which is a variation pattern in which the performance gate passage effect II is executed is 50% (20/40), and the probability of small hit is 37.5. % (15/40), the probability of losing is 12.5% (5/40). In addition, the probability of a big hit is 20% (5/25) and the probability of a small hit is 40% (10/25) when a variation pattern with variation numbers 33 to 35, which is a variation pattern in which the production gate passage production II is not executed, is generated. The probability of losing is 40% (10/25). In this case, the degree of expectation that a big hit occurs when the former fluctuation pattern occurs is more than twice the degree of expectation that a big hit occurs when the latter fluctuation pattern occurs. In this way, the expectation level of occurrence of big hit depends on whether or not the stage gate passing effect II is executed, so that the expected degree of occurrence of the big hit depends on whether or not the stage gate passing effect II is executed. The player is able to recognize, and as a result, the production gate passing effect II, which is a display effect with a high expectation of occurrence of a big hit, is executed, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the operation value enhancement effect and Improves execution.

  Next, an operation example of this embodiment will be described.

  The main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern according to the winning type every time a big hit lottery is made based on the table in FIG. 113 (step S411 in FIG. 88), and sends the command of the variation pattern to the peripheral control board 4140. Transmit (step S17 in FIG. 84). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives any of the commands 30H to 32H from the main control MPU 4100a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an operation value enhancement effect determined by the command.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing an example of the operational value enhancement effect process by the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  In the operational value enhancement effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the reception flag of any one of the commands 30H to 32H is set in the variable display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1701). If the flag is set (Yes in step S1701), the operation valid flag reset process, that is, the process of invalidating the operation of the effect operation medium such as the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 is executed (step S1702). . Subsequently, an operation value improving element determination process (step S1703) is executed. In the operation value improving element determination process (step S1703), as will be described later, the effect pattern, the effective number of balls N, and the effective period T2 are determined. The effective ball number N is an initial value of the remaining ball number (necessary ball number) n to be passed through the effect gate 6011. The effect pattern is determined according to a predetermined distribution condition. FIG. 118 shows an example of the effect pattern distribution condition. The valid period T2 is an initial value of the time (valid period) t during which the detection of the passing of the game ball is valid. Is set. FIG. 119 shows an example of a distribution condition for the effective period T2.

  After the values of the effective ball number N and the effective period T2 determined by the operation value improving element determination process (step S1703) are set in the ball counter and timer as initial values of the required ball number n and the effective time t, respectively (step S1704) ), The passing of the game ball and the monitoring of the effective time is started. Here, every time a game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 (Yes in step S1705), n is decremented by 1 (step S1706). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the effective time t is 0, that is, whether or not the remaining time of the effective period T2 has expired (step S1707).

  If the valid time t is not 0 as a result of the determination (No in step S1707), the passage of the next game ball is monitored (step S1705). If the valid time t is 0 (Yes in step S1707), it is determined whether the required number of balls n is 0 or less, that is, whether the number of balls to be passed through the effect gate 6011 is 0 (step S1707). As a result of the determination, if the required number of balls n is 0 or less (Yes in step S1708), an operation valid flag setting process, that is, a process for validating operation of the operation medium is executed (step S1709), and then an operation effect process ( Step S1710) is executed. On the other hand, if the required number of balls n is not 0 (No in step S1708), the operation effect process (step S1710) is executed without performing the operation valid flag setting process (step S1709).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operational value enhancement factor determination process.

  In the operation value enhancing element determination process (step S1703), first, an effect pattern lottery is performed according to the effect pattern distribution conditions illustrated in FIG. 118 (step S1801). In the example of FIG. 118, three effect patterns A, B, and C are prepared. The effect pattern A is an effect pattern in which the effective number of balls N is set to 10. The effect pattern B is an effect pattern in which the effective number of balls N is set to 5. The effect pattern C is an effect pattern in which the effective number of balls N is set to 1. If the effect pattern A is won as a result of the lottery (Yes in step S1802), the effect pattern A is set as the effect gate passing effect II (step S1803), and the effective number of balls N is set to 10 (step S1804). ), The process proceeds to the time limit determination process A (step S1805). If the effect pattern B is won (No in step S1802; Yes in step S1806), the effect pattern B is set as the effect gate passing effect II (step S1807), and the effective number of balls N is set to 5 (step) S1808), the process proceeds to time limit determination process B (step S1809). If the effect pattern C is won (No in S1802, No in step S1806), the effect pattern C is set as the effect gate passing effect II (step S1810), and the effective number of balls N is set to 1 (step) S1811), the process proceeds to time limit determination process C (step S1812).

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the time limit determination process A.

  In the time limit determination process A (step S1805), first, a lottery A of the effective period T2 of the effect pattern A is performed according to the time limit distribution condition illustrated in FIG. 119 (step S1821). As a result of lottery A, when 10 seconds are won (Yes in step S1822), the validity period T2 is set to 10 seconds (step S1823). If 5 seconds is won (No in step S1822; Yes in step S1824), the validity period T2 is set to 5 seconds (S1825). When 1 second is won (No in step S1822 and No in step S1824), the validity period T2 is set to 1 second (step S1826). The flow of other time limit determination processes B and C is the same, and the flow of time limit determination process B or C is obtained by replacing “A” in FIG. 116 with “B” or “C”.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation effect process.

  In the operation effect process (step S1710), it is determined whether or not the operation valid flag is set (S1901). If the operation valid flag is set (Yes in step S1901), the operation signal of the operation medium is monitored (step S1902). If an operation signal is detected (Yes in step S1902), that is, if the operation medium is operated during a period during which the operation of the operation medium is valid (operation effective period), a game is performed based on the operation signal. The effect mode of the display effect made by the panel side liquid crystal display device 1400 is changed (step S1903). On the other hand, if the operation valid flag is not set (No in step S1901), the operation signal is not detected (step S1902). For this reason, even if the operation medium is operated, unless the operation is performed during the operation effective period of the operation medium, the process of changing the effect mode (step S1903) is not executed.

  In the effect pattern distribution conditions illustrated in FIG. 118, conditions are set such that the occurrence probabilities of effect patterns A, B, and C are different for each variation pattern of variation numbers 30 to 32. In the case of the variation patterns of variation numbers 30 to 32, the effect pattern A is generated with a probability of 60%, the effect pattern B with a probability of 75%, and the effect pattern C with a probability of 90%. In the case of the variation patterns 33 to 35, the effect pattern A is generated with a probability of 75%, the effect pattern B with a probability of 20%, and the effect pattern C with a probability of 5%. When the variation pattern is the variation number 36, the effect pattern A is generated with a probability of 90% and the effect pattern B is generated with a probability of 10%. The required number of balls N corresponds to the number of enemy characters (zombies) appearing on the screen by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 as an attack target in the production gate passage production II. That is, 10 enemy characters appear on the screen in the effect pattern A, 5 enemy characters appear in the effect pattern B, and 1 enemy character appears in the effect pattern C.

  Then, as will be described later, every time the effective number of balls n (the initial value is N) is reduced by 1, that is, every time a game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, a display effect in which enemy characters are defeated one by one. Is made. In this way, the required number of balls N is made to correspond to the number of enemy characters (zombies) that appear, and each time the effective number of balls n decreases from the required number of balls N by 1, the enemy characters are defeated one by one. By configuring the display effect, the player can recognize the number of game balls (N−n) that have passed through the effect gate 6011 as the number of defeated enemy characters, and the sense of accomplishment by defeating the enemy character. Since the effect can be advanced while giving the player to the player, the effective gate number n of the effect gate passing effect II is compared with the configuration in which the effective number of balls n is simply notified by character information such as numbers or instruction information such as a histogram (indicator). The interest can be significantly improved.

  According to the distribution conditions of FIG. 118, when 10 enemy characters (zombies) appear, the probability of occurrence of a big hit (occurrence probability of about 27%) is the smallest, but the 10 enemy characters that are the maximum number of appearances are A display effect that appears and defeats is made, and when a big hit occurs after that, a high sense of achievement can be given to the player. On the other hand, if only one enemy character appears, a big hit will occur almost certainly (occurrence probability 90%), so the production gate passing effect II is started, and a display effect in which only one enemy character appears. As a result, the player's expectation for a big hit can be raised. Even if only one enemy character appears, a small hit may occur (occurrence probability 10%), so that the player's tension can be maintained.

  In the time limit distribution condition illustrated in FIG. 119, for each of the variation numbers 30, 31, and 32, a distribution condition for the effective period T2 when each effect pattern A, B, and C is won is set.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows the sorting conditions used when the variation pattern command reception flag with the variation number 30 is set. According to this distribution condition, when the production pattern A is set as the production gate passage production II, the time limit 10 seconds has a probability of 60%, the time limit 5 seconds has a probability of 40%, and the time limit 3 seconds has a probability of 0%. Win each with a probability of. When the production pattern B is set, the time limit 10 seconds is won with a probability of 50%, the time limit 5 seconds with a probability of 40%, and the time limit 3 seconds with a probability of 10%. When the production pattern C is set, the winning time is 10% with a probability of 5%, the limiting time of 5 seconds is 15%, and the limiting time of 3 seconds is 80%.

  FIG. 119 (b) shows the distribution conditions when the variation pattern command reception flag of the variation number 31 is set. According to this distribution condition, when the production pattern A is set as the production gate passage production II, the time limit of 10 seconds is 40% probability, the time limit of 5 seconds is 40% probability, and the time limit of 3 seconds is 20%. Win each with a probability of. When the production pattern B is set, the time limit 10 seconds is won with a probability of 20%, the time limit 5 seconds with a probability of 30%, and the time limit 3 seconds with a probability of 50%. When the production pattern C is set, the time limit 10 seconds is won with a probability of 5%, the time limit 5 seconds with a probability of 35%, and the time limit 3 seconds with a probability of 60%.

  FIG. 119 (c) shows the distribution conditions when the variation pattern command reception flag of variation number 32 is set. According to this distribution condition, when the production pattern A is set as the production gate passage production II, the time limit 10 seconds is 30% probability, the time limit 5 seconds is 60% probability, and the time limit 3 seconds is 10%. Win each with a probability of. When the production pattern B is set, the time limit 10 seconds is won with a probability of 10%, the time limit 5 seconds with a probability of 50%, and the time limit 3 seconds with a probability of 40%. When the production pattern C is set, the time limit 10 seconds is won with a probability of 2%, the time limit 5 seconds with a probability of 3%, and the time limit 3 seconds with a probability of 95%.

  According to the sorting condition (condition when a big hit occurs) in FIG. 119 (a), the greater the number of enemy characters (zombies) that appear, that is, the greater the effective number of balls N (the initial value of the necessary number of balls n). Since the probability that the effective period T2 becomes long increases, the enemy character is successfully annihilated within the effective period T2 in the display effect in which the enemy character is defeated one by one every time the required number of balls n decreases by one. Can increase the likelihood of doing so. On the other hand, in the distribution conditions (conditions at the time of occurrence of a small hit or loss) in FIGS. 119 (b) and 119 (c), the effective period T2 is not always long even if the effective ball number N (initial value) is large. Therefore, there is a higher possibility of failure to annihilate the enemy character within the effective period T2. In this way, an effect is likely to occur when the enemy character is successfully annihilated within the time limit, and when a failure occurs, a small hit or loss is likely to occur. For example, if the number of game balls fired per minute is about 100, about 16 game balls can be fired in 10 seconds. Therefore, when N = 10 and T2 = 10, there are 10 bodies with sufficient margin. Defeat all enemy characters. On the other hand, when N = 10 and T2 = 3, it is almost impossible to annihilate the enemy character within the effective period T2.

  Next, a specific example of the operational value enhancement effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, it is assumed that the operation of the touch panel 246 is invalidated, and the operation of the touch panel 246 is validated on the condition that a game ball having N valid balls passes through the effect gate 6011 within the valid period T2. A display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described. Here, the description will be made assuming that T2 = 10 (seconds) and N = 10 (pieces).

  FIG. 120 illustrates an example of an effect screen (initial screen of the introduction effect IA) 1410 displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 immediately after the start of the operation value enhancement effect. In this example, an enemy character zombie 1411 is displayed at the center of the screen.

  In the lower left part of the screen, the decorative symbol 1412 indicating the reach state, that is, the left symbol (“7”) and the right symbol (“7”) of the stop display mode, and the middle symbol of the variable display mode are displayed small. Yes. A message image 1413 “Right-handed to defeat the zombies!” Is displayed at the top of the screen, and an image 1414 showing a state where the handle is turned to the right (clockwise) is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  A player is prompted by these images 1413 and 1414 to make a right turn. In the present embodiment, the right-handed game is effective during the short-time game, and the operation value enhancement effect is performed as one of the reach effects in the right-handed game effective period. In the present embodiment, the right-handed game is effective during the short-time game, and the operation value improvement effect is performed as one of the reach effects in the right-handed game effective period. However, there are many players who pause the launch of the game ball for a while when the reach production continues for a long time, so by displaying images 1413 and 1414 that urge the player to make a right strike. , Since it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol until the display of the winning result, the launch of the game ball is also improved in improving the operability of the operational value enhancement effect. It is also effective in promoting

  120 displays an image 1444 indicating that the operation of the touch panel 246 has become invalid at this time. The image 1444 can notify the player that the operation of the touch panel 246 has become invalid, and can give a sense of expectation that a big hit may occur if the operation can be performed. Although not shown, this image 1444 is also displayed on the screens 1415, 1419, 1422, 1426, 1429 of FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (e).

  FIG. 121A illustrates an example of a screen 1415 displayed following the screen 1410 of FIG. In this example, ten zombie images 1416 are displayed using an area showing almost the entire screen 1415. In the lower left part of the screen, as in the screen 1410 of FIG. In the center of the screen, a message image 1417 of “10 zombies” is displayed so as to be superimposed on the area where the zombie image 1416 is displayed. In the upper part of the screen, a message image 1418 “A boss appears if it is annihilated within 10 seconds!” Is displayed in such a manner that it appears from the right end of the screen and disappears on the left side of the screen. These zombie images 1416 and message images 1417 and 1418 teach the player the story that if 10 zombies are killed, boss zombies will appear, and if 10 zombies are killed and further boss zombies are killed, a big hit will occur. So, I can expect that. The player is encouraged to make a right strike on the screen 1410 in FIG. 120, and then the player is expected to make a right strike on the screen 1415 in FIG. 121 (a). The monitoring of the effective time t is started from the time when the screen 1415 of FIG. 121 (a) is displayed.

  A screen 1419 in FIG. 121 (b) represents a scene that has attacked the first zombie. This screen 1419 is displayed when a game ball launched by right-hand strike first passes through the effect gate 6011 after the start of the operation value enhancement effect, and the required number of balls n becomes N−1, that is, 9. On this screen 1419, an image 1420 of the attacked zombie is displayed with the line of sight of the warrior (player character). At the bottom of the screen, a message image 1445 of “Defeat one body!” Indicating that the first zombie has been defeated is displayed. With these images 1420 and 1445, the player can recognize that the first zombie has been defeated, that is, the required number of balls n has become 9, and the game sphere It is possible to urge to continue firing. At the top of the screen, a message image 1421 “Chance if you defeat the boss!” Is displayed in a manner that appears from the right end of the screen and disappears to the left side of the screen. By displaying this message image 1421 during the period in which the effect gate passage effect II is being executed, it is possible to prompt the game ball to continue to be fired until a boss zombie appears.

  A screen 1422 in FIG. 121 (c) represents a scene in which a third zombie is attacked. This screen 1422 is displayed when a game ball launched by right-hand strike passes the effect gate 6011 for the third time after the start of the operation value enhancement effect, and the required number of balls n becomes N-3, that is, seven. . On this screen 1422, images 1423 and 1424 of the second and third zombies that have been attacked are displayed together with a message image 1425 of “Defeat three bodies!”. Around the second and third zombie images 1423 and 1424 that have been attacked, the fourth, fifth,... Zombie images approaching one after another are displayed.

  A screen 1426 in FIG. 121 (d) represents a scene in which all 10 zombies are defeated. On this screen 1426, an image 1427 representing a state in which a plurality of zombies are falling is displayed together with a message image 1428 of “Successfully destroyed! This screen 1426 is displayed when the required number n of balls reaches 0 before the effective time t becomes 0 seconds.

  FIG. 121 (e) shows the appearance of a boss zombie. This screen 1429 is displayed in such a manner that the screen suddenly changes after the screen 1426 of FIG. 121 (d) is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). On this screen 1429, a boss zombie image 1420 that seems to be very scary is displayed together with a message image 1431 of “Boss Appears!”.

  FIG. 121 (f) illustrates an example of a screen 1432 displayed subsequent to the screen 1429 of FIG. 121 (e). This screen 1432 is displayed immediately after the operation of the touch panel 246 is validated. This screen 1432 displays an image 1433 that prompts the user to operate the touch panel 246 (an image that prompts a so-called flick operation in which the fingertip is moved while being in contact with the touch panel). The screen of FIG. 121 (f) in which the image 1433 prompting the operation of the touch panel 246 is displayed from the screen 1429 of FIG. 121 (e) in which the image 1444 indicating that the operation of the touch panel 246 has been invalidated is displayed. By switching to 1432, the player can recognize that the operation of the touch panel 246 has become effective, and a sense of achievement that the touch panel 246 can be operated can be given. The player is prompted by this screen 1432 and operates the touch panel 246.

  FIG. 121G illustrates an example of a screen 1434 displayed following the screen 1432 in FIG. 121F. This screen 1434 is displayed when the touch panel 246 is operated by the player. On this screen 1434, a boss zombie image 1435 defeated by the attack is displayed together with a message image 1436 of “Boss defeated successfully!”.

  FIG. 121H illustrates an example of a screen 1437 displayed following the screen 1434 in FIG. 121G. This screen 1437 is a screen for notifying the result of the lottery, and is displayed in accordance with the timing when the special symbol variation time ends. FIG. 121 (h) exemplifies a case where the lottery result is a big win, and the screen 1437 shows a stop display mode in which a decorative symbol 1438 indicating a big hit, that is, a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol are aligned in the same symbol. (In this example, “7”, “7”, “7”) are displayed, and a message image 1439 for notifying the occurrence of a big hit is displayed large.

  On the other hand, if 10 game balls do not pass the effect gate 6011 before 10 seconds (T2) have elapsed since the screen 1415 of FIG. 121 (a) is displayed, that is, the game ball has an effective time t. If the required number of balls n has not become 0 before 0 seconds, the screen 1440 in FIG. 122 is displayed. On this screen 1440, a zombie image 1441 that has not been defeated or revived is displayed together with a message image 1442 that the “annihilation failed!”. If the lottery result is a small hit or a loss, after the screen 1440 of FIG. 122 is displayed, the lottery result is a small hit or a loss at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation time ends. Is displayed according to the winning type. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a big hit, after the screen 1440 of FIG. 122 is displayed once, the screen is switched to the screen 1426 of FIG. A screen 1437 shown in FIG.

  In addition, after the screen 1432 in FIG. 121 (f) is displayed, if no operation is performed within the operation valid period of the touch panel 246, the screen 1442 in FIG. 123 is displayed. On this screen 1442, a boss zombie image 1430 is displayed together with a message image 1443 of “Boss defeat failed!”. And when the lottery result is a small hit or a loss, after the screen 1442 of FIG. 123 is displayed, the lottery result is a small hit or a loss at the timing when the special symbol change time ends. A screen to notify that there is a certain event according to the winning type is displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a big hit, after the screen 1442 in FIG. 123 is displayed once, the screen is switched to the screen 1434 in FIG. A screen 1437 shown in FIG. 121 (h) is displayed to notify that is a big hit.

  The pachinko machine 1 configured as described above can execute an operation value enhancement effect as a reach effect when a time-short game is started after the big hit game ends and a reach occurs during the time-short game. When the operation value enhancement effect is executed, the operation of the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 is temporarily invalidated, and a specific display effect (above-mentioned) is displayed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 (effect display means). In the example, a boss zombie appears when you hit right and defeat 10 zombies). While the operation of the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 is disabled, the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display effect by operating the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 (in the above example, the touch panel 246 The operation of defeating the boss zombie by operating is impossible. The operation is activated because the effective number of gates (specific areas) 6011 within a limited time (predetermined period) T2 (in the above example, T2 = 10 (seconds)) (predetermined number) N (above In this example, only when N = 10) or more game balls have passed. For this reason, the player actively performs the operation of launching the game ball in order to validate the operation. Then, if the effective number N or more game balls are passed through the effect gate 6011 within the effective period T2, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display effect can be executed based on the operation. it can.

  As described above, according to the embodiment, by executing the operation value enhancement effect, the effective number N or more game balls have passed through the effect gate (specific area) 6011 within the time limit (predetermined period) T2. Only in the case, the operation by the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 can be validated. Therefore, by operating the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257, the effect mode of the specific effect by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is changed. The expectation for the advantageous game at that time can be improved more than the conventional player participation type effect, and the interest of the effect using the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to increase the participation rate of the player in the effect using the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257. In addition, since a sense of achievement is given to the fact that the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated, even if the lottery result notified after the operation is not preferable, an effect of reducing the degree of disappointment can be obtained.

  In particular, even if a predetermined number N or more of game balls pass through the effect gate (specific area) 6011, if it is not achieved within the time limit (predetermined period) T2, the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are used. By adopting a configuration in which the operation is not validated, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency due to the limited time and maintain the interest of the production. Then, the operation is validated when it is achieved within the time limit (predetermined period) T2, and the production mode can be changed by performing the operation. Therefore, under a tense situation where the time limit is set. It is possible to give the player a sense of achievement by having succeeded in performing the operation and to enhance the interest of the production.

  In addition, even if a game ball passes through the effect gate (specific area) 6011, if the number of game balls that have passed is less than the effective ball number N, the operation by the touch panel 246 or the upper plate effect button 257 is not activated. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of mission that the game balls must be continuously fired until the effective number of balls N is reached, thereby maintaining the interest of the production. Then, the operation is validated when the effective number of balls N is reached, and the production mode can be changed by performing the operation. Therefore, the operation is performed under a tense situation where the effective number of balls N is set. In particular, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment by having succeeded and to enhance the interest of the production.

  In addition, according to the distribution condition of FIG. 118, a big hit is likely to occur almost in inverse proportion to the number of enemy characters. The smaller the number, the higher the expectation of jackpot. That is, even when operation of the operation medium is not effective due to the operation value enhancement effect, it is possible to suggest the degree of big hit expectation by the number of enemy characters appearing.

  The conventional player participation type effect prompts the player to perform operations such as an upper plate effect button, and if the operation is performed during a period in which the operation is effective, whether or not a game ball is being fired, Only a change in the production mode is caused only by the operation. For this reason, for example, when there is a period during which the significance of launching a game ball has declined, such as when the number of reserve balls is full and the reach production continues for a long time, the launch of the game ball is suspended for a while. There are many players who play. This will lead to a decrease in interest due to the original way of playing a pachinko machine by launching a game ball and acquiring a prize ball. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 of the above embodiment can promote the launch of the game ball by executing the operation value improvement effect even while the reach effect continues for a long time. Decline in interest due to the original way of playing can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that all the right-handed game balls pass through the effect gate 6011. However, a obstacle nail or the like is provided in the passing area of the game ball reaching the effect gate 6011, and the player hits the right. However, not all game balls may pass through the effect gate 6011. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the operational value enhancement effect by giving the game property to passing the game ball to the effect gate 6011 by hitting right.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (b) and 121 (c), message images 1445 and 1425 indicating the number of defeated enemy characters such as “1 body defeated!” And “3 bodies defeated!” Are displayed. By displaying, the player is allowed to recognize the number of enemy characters to be defeated, that is, the required number of balls n, but the configuration may be such that the required number of balls n is not displayed. By not displaying the required number n of balls, the player himself determines how many enemy characters have already been defeated, and how many enemy characters must be defeated before the operation of the operation medium is effective. Since the game ball must be fired, the player's attention is given to the effect that the enemy character is defeated according to the number of game balls fired, and the fun of launching the game ball itself is enhanced Can do.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation value enhancement effect, the operation medium operation is validated based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the effect gate 6011. However, a region other than the effect gate 6011 is specified. It is good also as a structure which makes it the area | region and validates the said operation based on the game ball having passed the said specific area | region. For example, the operation may be validated based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the normal gate 2005a. In the case of this configuration, the normal gate 2005a has a lower passing rate of game balls than the effect gate 6011. Therefore, the sense of achievement when the operation of the operation medium is activated can be improved, and the interest of the operation value improvement effect can be improved. . In addition, since a normal lottery is made when a game ball passes through the normal gate 2005a, various effects can be realized by associating an effect based on the result of the normal lottery with an operation value enhancement effect.

  Further, a sensor may be provided in another specific area through which the game ball in the game area 5a can pass, and the operation of the operation medium may be validated based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor. For example, by placing sensors at a plurality of locations (such as the left and right sides) in the game area 5a, left-handed in a predetermined condition, right-handed in another predetermined condition, etc. The player may be requested to play the game, and the operation may be validated based on the fact that the game ball is divided into right and left as required and passes through a specific area. According to this configuration, as well as allowing the game ball to pass through a specific area, as well as performing the launch operation to divide the game ball into left and right according to the situation, the interest of the operational value improvement effect is It can be improved significantly.

  Next, another embodiment related to the operation value enhancement function will be described. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern with the variation numbers 30 to 32 is selected by the main control MPU 4100a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a uses the production pattern of the above embodiment as the production pattern of the operational value enhancement production, that is, the effective time t is 0. If the predetermined pattern is satisfied with the production pattern (hereinafter referred to as pattern 1) that always continues the production gate passage production II until the production time passes, the production gate passage production II is displayed even before the effective time t becomes zero. It is set as the structure which can select either the production | presentation pattern (henceforth pattern 2) to be complete | finished.

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the operational value enhancement effect process in this embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect gate passage effect pattern setting process included in the process of FIG. Of the processes in the flow of FIG. 124, the same processes as those in the flows of FIGS. 114 to 117 are given the same step numbers.

  124, if the variation pattern reception flag of variation numbers 30 to 32 is set (Yes in S1701), first, an effect gate passage effect pattern setting process (S1720) is executed.

  In the effect gate passage effect setting pattern determination process (S1720), a lottery is executed as to whether to select pattern 1 or pattern 2 as the effect value improvement effect effect pattern (S1721: effect pattern lottery process). As a result, if a pattern other than pattern 1 (in this case, pattern 2) is selected (No in S1722), a status determination flag is set (S1723), and if pattern 1 is selected (Yes in S1722). ), Without setting the situation determination flag, the process proceeds to the operation value enhancement element determination process (S1703).

  In the production mode of pattern 1, the period during which the production gate passage production is performed is constant, whereas in the production mode of pattern 2, the period during which the production gate passage production is performed may be shortened. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls launched during the performance will be larger in pattern 1 than in pattern 2. Therefore, it can be said that the pattern 2 is a more preferable production mode for a player who does not want to consume a game ball for production. Thus, in the present embodiment, in the effect pattern lottery process (S1721), the winning probabilities are distributed so that the pattern 2 wins with a higher probability than the pattern 1.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern 30 at the time of winning the big hit is selected, the rate at which the pattern 1 is selected is 40%, whereas the rate at which the pattern 2 is selected is 60%. When the variation pattern 31 at the time of winning is selected, the rate at which the pattern 1 is selected is 30%, whereas the rate at which the pattern 2 is selected is 70%, and the variation pattern 32 at the time of winning the loss is selected. Is selected, pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 20%, whereas pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 80%. According to this configuration, at the time of winning the most frequently lost game, the pattern 2 that consumes almost no game ball is selected, so that the player's dislike of consuming the game ball for production. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the winning type when the production of pattern 1 is made is often a big hit, even if a lot of game balls are lost due to the production of pattern 1, the expectation for the big win is achieved by the production of pattern 1 Since a feeling is heightened, the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

  After the effect gate passage effect pattern setting process (step S1720), the operation valid flag reset process (step S1702) and the operation value enhancement element determination process (S1703) are sequentially executed in the same manner as the above-described embodiment, and the operation value enhancement element After the values of the effective number of balls N and the effective period T2 determined by the determination process (step S1703) are set as initial values of the required number of balls n and the effective time t, respectively (step S1704), Start monitoring. Here, every time the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 (Yes in step S1705), n is decremented (step S1706). Then, it is determined whether or not the valid time t is 0 (step S1707).

  In the present embodiment, if the valid time t is not 0 (No in step S1707), it is determined whether or not the status determination flag is set (step S1711). As a result, if the situation determination flag is not set (No in step S1711), the process returns to the game ball detection process (step S1705). On the other hand, if the status determination flag is set (Yes in step S1711), it is determined whether or not the valid time t is a preset status determination time tc (step S1712). As a result, if t = tc (Yes in step S1713), a situation determination process (step S1713) is performed to determine whether the situation is to end the effect gate passage effect II or to be continued. . Here, the situation determination time tc is set as a point in time for confirming the relationship between the valid time t and the required number n, that is, how many more pass through the remaining time of the valid period T2. Yes, as will be described later, after the start of the effective period T2, for example, it is set in increments of 1 second from a predetermined time point.

  In the situation determination process (step S1713), it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the effect gate passing effect II should be continued. (No in step S1713). In this case, the process returns to the game ball detection process (step S1705). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is established, it is determined that the effect gate passing effect II should be ended (Yes in step S1713). In this case, after resetting the situation determination flag (step S1714), the process proceeds to the operation effect process (step S1710).

  The situation determination process (step S1713) is executed every time the effective time t reaches the situation determination time tc. For example, when the situation determination time tc is set to 8 seconds, 7 seconds, 6 seconds, 5 seconds, 4 seconds, and 3 seconds, the effective time t becomes 3 seconds from the time when the effective time t becomes 8 seconds. Is executed in 1 second increments. FIG. 126 exemplifies the correspondence relationship between the necessary number n (end count number) nc and the valid time t, which is a condition for determining the end of the effect gate passage effect II. The firing interval is 0.6 seconds.

  In this example, if the required number of balls n is 10 at the time when the effective time t is 8, the effect gate passing effect II is ended. If the effective time is 8 seconds, it is possible to pass 10 game balls in the meantime (maximum of 13 can be passed). However, if the required number of balls n is 10, the game ball is completely fired. Since it means that the game ball has not been fired by right-handed, the production gate passing production II is terminated. In addition, when the effective time t is 7 seconds, 6 seconds, 5 seconds, 4 seconds, 3 seconds, the required number of balls n is 9 or more, 8 or more, 7 or more, 6 or more, 5 or more, respectively. Terminate II. In these cases, it is possible to pass the game ball having the end count nc, but since the required number n is large for the effective time t, one or two game balls are not fired within the effective time t. Just because the possibility of succeeding in the mission of passing 10 game balls within 10 seconds is small, the production gate passing effect II in consideration of the disadvantage of the player who consumes game balls in vain End.

  Although not shown in FIG. 124, when the situation determination process (S1713) is executed, a warning count number process for displaying the required number of balls n as a warning count number nc is also executed. Similarly to the situation determination process (S1713), the warning count processing is started when the valid time t becomes the situation judgment time tc, for example, 8 seconds, and is executed in 1 second increments until the valid time t becomes 3 seconds. . FIG. 127 (a) illustrates one mode. A screen 1471 in FIG. 127A is displayed when the necessary number of balls n is 6 at the time when the effective time t is 6 seconds under the same conditions as the example described in FIG. A message image 1482 for reporting the warning count number nc for “6 bodies” is displayed together with a message image 1481 for reporting the remaining time of “6 seconds” in the center. This screen 1471 informs the player that the mission cannot be accomplished unless 6 zombies are defeated in another 4 seconds, and gives the player a sense of tension. Can do.

  A screen 1472 of FIG. 127 (b) is a screen that is displayed one second after the screen 1471, and the message image 1481 that notifies the remaining time is changed to a display of “5 seconds remaining”. On the other hand, since the required number of balls n has not decreased from 6, the message image 1482 for informing the warning count number nc remains “remaining 6 bodies”. In this case, if the required number of balls n remains six after the next one second, that is, when the valid time t becomes 4 seconds, it will be difficult to achieve the mission, so that information is notified. Many message images 1483 of “Warning” are displayed on the screen 1472, and the entire background of the screen 1472 is flashed and displayed in a color that draws attention such as red and yellow. This screen 1472 informs the player who is going to accomplish the mission that he will soon be unable to complete the mission unless he continues to attack the zombies. Can be fired. Further, if the required number of balls n remains six even after one second has elapsed, the effect gate passing effect II ends, and the screen 1473 of FIG. 127 (c) is displayed. On this screen 1473, a zombie image 1483 that has not been annihilated is displayed. In this case, since the effect gate passing effect II ends in a time shorter than the effective period T2, the screen 1473 in FIG. 127 is displayed from when the effect gate passing effect II ends until the operation effect process (S1710) starts. For example, the connection effect is executed for a while.

  According to the present embodiment, the operation with the effect operation medium is enabled only when the mission that the effective number N or more of the game balls pass through the effect gate (specific area) 6011 within the effective period T2 is successful. If the required number n with respect to time t is obviously large, the configuration is such that the production gate passing production II is terminated even before the expiration of the effective period T2, thereby giving a sense of achievement to the player who can operate the production operation medium. In addition, the number of game balls consumed when the operation operation medium cannot be operated is reduced, and the disadvantage of the player who wastes the game balls for production is reduced. it can.

  In the above embodiment, even if there is a possibility that the required number n of game balls can be successfully passed before the effective time t reaches 0, the required number for the effective time t is still present. When the predetermined condition with many n is established, it is determined in the situation determination process (S1713) that the stage gate passing stage II is to end, but the stage gate until the effective time t becomes zero. Even if the passage effect II is continued, it may be determined that it is determined that the effect gate passage effect II should be ended only when it is impossible to succeed in the mission. For example, assuming that the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the effective period T2 is 10 seconds, and the effective number N is 10, the effective time t is 3 seconds and when the required number n is 6 or more, the remaining 3 seconds. Then, since only a maximum of 5 can be passed, even if the effect gate pass effect II is continued until the effective time t becomes 0, it is impossible to pass a total of 10 or more game balls. In such a case, it is determined by the situation determination process (S1713) that the situation is to end the production gate passage production II. According to this configuration, it is possible to entertain the stage gate passing stage II until the last time when the player has a possibility of succeeding in the mission.

  Next, still another embodiment relating to the operation value enhancement function will be described. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern with the variation numbers 30 to 32 is selected by the main control MPU 4100a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as the effect value enhancement effect effect pattern, when the effective time t becomes 0, the effect gate passing effect II. Can be selected from either an effect pattern that always ends (pattern 1) and an effect pattern that extends the valid time t (hereinafter referred to as pattern 3) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. .

  128 is a time chart of various effects in the operational value improvement effect (variation pattern of variation numbers 30 to 32) of the present embodiment, and FIG. 129 is a time chart of the effect gate passage effect II of the present embodiment. Each is illustrated. The time charts of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 33 to 36 are the same as those in FIGS. 112 (b) and (c). As shown in FIG. 128, in the variation pattern of variation numbers 30 to 32 in the present embodiment, among the variation time of 40 seconds, the first 10 seconds is the introduction effect IA, and the next 13 seconds (T1) is the effect gate passing. Further, the next 7 seconds are assigned to the operation effect IIIA, and the last 10 seconds are assigned to the result effect IV. Then, as shown in FIG. 129, among the 13 seconds (T1) assigned to the effect gate passage effect II, the first 10 seconds are in the initial effective period (T2), and the predetermined conditions are satisfied for the remaining 3 seconds. In such a case, each is assigned to a period that can be extended (T3: extension period).

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operational value enhancement effect process in the present embodiment. Of the processes in the flow of FIG. 130, the same processes as those in the flows of FIGS. 114 to 117 and 124 are denoted by the same step numbers.

  Also in the operational value enhancement effect process in FIG. 130, if the variation pattern reception flag with the variation numbers 30 to 32 is set (Yes in step S1701), the effect gate passage effect pattern setting process (step S1720) is first executed. The Then, in the effect gate passage effect pattern setting process (step S1720), pattern 1 or pattern 3 is selected as the effect value improvement effect effect pattern.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the period in which the effect gate passage effect is made is constant in the effect mode of pattern 1, while the period in which the effect gate pass effect is made may be extended in the effect mode of pattern 3. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls fired during the production gate passage production is larger in pattern 3 than in pattern 1. Therefore, it can be said that the pattern 1 is a more preferable production mode for a player who does not want to consume a game ball for production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the effect pattern lottery process (S1721), the winning probability is distributed so that the pattern 1 is won with a higher probability than the pattern 3.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern 30 that is a big hit win is selected, the rate at which the pattern 1 is selected is 60%, whereas the rate at which the pattern 3 is selected is 40%. In addition, when the variation pattern 31 that is selected at the time of winning the small hit is selected, the rate at which the pattern 1 is selected is 70%, whereas the rate at which the pattern 3 is selected is 30%. Furthermore, when the variation pattern 32 is selected at the time of winning the loss, the rate at which the pattern 1 is selected is 80%, whereas the rate at which the pattern 3 is selected is 20%. According to this configuration, at the time of winning the most frequently lost games, the pattern 1 that consumes less game balls is almost selected, so that the player's dislike of consuming game balls for production. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the winning type when the production of pattern 3 is made is often a big hit, even if a lot of game balls are lost due to the production of pattern 3, the expectation for the big hit by the production of pattern 2 Since a feeling is heightened, the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a, after performing the effect gate passage effect pattern setting process (step S1720), after performing the processes of steps S1702 to S1704, monitors the passing and effective time of the game ball (step S1720) (step S1720). S1705 to S1707). If the valid time t is not 0 (No in step S1707), it is determined whether or not the situation determination flag is set (step S1711). If the situation determination flag is not set (No in step S1711). ), The process returns to the game ball detection process (step S1705). On the other hand, if the status determination flag is set (Yes in step S1711), it is determined whether or not the valid time t is a preset status determination time tc (step S1712). As a result, if t = tc (Yes in step S1713), a situation in which it is determined whether or not the production gate passage production II should be terminated in the initial valid period T2 or the valid time t should be extended. Determination processing (step S1713) is executed. Here, the situation determination time tc is set as a point in time for confirming the relationship between the valid time t and the required number n, that is, how many more pass through the remaining time of the valid period T2. Yes, as will be described later, after the start of the effective period T2, for example, it is set in increments of 1 second from a predetermined time point.

  In the situation determination process (step S1713), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect gate pass effect II is initially activated. It is determined that the situation should be extended without ending in period T2 (Yes in step S1713). In this case, the validity period extension process (step S1714) is executed, the situation determination flag is reset (step S1715), and the process returns to the game ball detection process (step S1705). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the effect gate pass effect II should be terminated at the end of the initial effective period T2 (No in step S1713). In this case, the process returns to the game ball detection process (step S1705) without passing through the valid period extension process (step S1714) and the situation determination flag reset process (step S1715).

  The situation determination process (step S1713) is executed every time the effective time t reaches the situation determination time tc. When the situation determination time tc is set to 3 seconds, 2 seconds, or 1 second, for example, the situation determination time tc starts from when the effective time t becomes 3 seconds and is executed in 1 second increments until reaching 1 second. FIG. 131 exemplifies the correspondence relationship between the value of the required number n (extension threshold nc) and the valid time t, which are conditions for determining the extension of the effect gate passage effect II. The firing interval is 0.6 seconds. In this example, when the effective time t is 3 seconds, 2 seconds, and 1 second, the required number of balls n is 5 or more, 3 or more, and 1 or more, the effective time t is set to the extension period T3 (in this case 3 Seconds). As a result, a sufficiently long effective time t that can pass a maximum of 10, 8, and 6 game balls is secured, so that the possibility of a successful mission can be sufficiently left. In this way, when it becomes difficult to pass a game ball having an effective number of balls N or more due to the relationship between the effective time t and the required number n, the possibility that the effective time t may be extended and the mission succeeded. Since the remaining time is reduced, it is possible to give up the achievement of the mission and prompt the player who wants to stop the game ball to be fired to continue the game ball.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 130, in the operational value enhancement effect of the present embodiment, a remaining time warning process for displaying the value as the remaining time from when the effective time t has decreased to some extent is executed. The remaining time warning process is started from the time when the valid time t becomes 5 seconds, for example, regardless of whether or not the situation determination process (S1713) is executed, and is incremented by 1 second until the valid time t becomes 1 second. Is executed. FIG. 132 (a) illustrates one mode. The screen 1474 of FIG. 133A is displayed at the moment when the effective time t becomes 5 seconds under the same conditions as the example described in FIG. 121. A message image 1484 for notifying the remaining time is displayed. The screen 1475 of FIG. 133 (b) is displayed at the moment when the valid time t becomes 4 seconds, and the message image 1484 for notifying the remaining time is changed to a display of “4 seconds remaining”. These screens 1474 and 1475 inform the player that the mission cannot be accomplished unless the remaining zombies are defeated in another 5 seconds and 4 seconds, respectively. It can give a sense of tension.

  A screen 1476 in FIG. 132C and a screen 1477 in FIG. 132D are both effect screens displayed one second after the screen 1475 in FIG. 132B is displayed. FIG. 132 (c) shows a case where the effective time t is not extended, and FIG. 132 (d) shows a case where the effective time t is extended. The remaining time notified by the message image 1484 on the screen 1476 in FIG. 132 (c) has decreased from “4 more seconds” to “3 seconds later”, but the message image 1484 on the screen 1477 in FIG. 132 (d) is notified. The remaining time is increased by 3 seconds when the effective time t becomes 3 seconds, and thus increases to “6 seconds”. In the vicinity of the message image 1484, a message image 1485 “3 seconds extended!” Is displayed to notify that the valid time t has been extended by 3 seconds.

  A screen 1478 of FIG. 132 (e) and a screen 1479 of FIG. 132 (f) are effect screens that are displayed one second and two seconds after the screen 1475 of FIG. 132 (c) is displayed. In both cases, the effective time t is extended, and the remaining time notified by the message image 1484 on the screen 1478 in FIG. 132 (e) is extended by 3 seconds when the effective time t becomes 2 seconds. Therefore, the remaining time which is increased to “5 seconds” and is notified by the message image 1484 on the screen 1479 in FIG. 132 (f) is because the effective time t is extended by 3 seconds when the effective time t becomes 1 second. It has increased to “4 more seconds”.

  In this way, the remaining time warning process is executed in 1 second increments from the start of the second half of the initial effective period T2, and the effective time t that is gradually decreasing is displayed on the screens 1474, 1475, and 1476, so that the initial effective period It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the remaining time of the period T2 will soon be exhausted. Then, every time the effective time t is extended, by displaying the extended effective time t on the screens 1477, 1478, and 1479, the remaining time has been extended, so there is still a possibility that the mission can be achieved. Can be provided to the player to encourage the continuation of the launch of the game ball and to maintain the entertainment interest.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the valid time t should be extended by the situation determination process (S1713), the valid time t is extended by a time corresponding to the extension period T3 (in the above example, 3 seconds). However, the extension time may be varied based on the relationship between the effective time t and the required number n. For example, when the required time t is 3 seconds, 2 seconds, or 1 second and the required number of balls n is 5 or more, 3 or more, or 1 or more, the effective time t is 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds, respectively. Extend. As a result, the effective times t are all 4 seconds, and it is possible to pass 6 game balls at the maximum, so when the effective time t is 3 seconds, the required number of balls n is 5 to 6 If the effective time t is 2 seconds and the required number of balls n is 3 to 4, and the effective time t is 1 second and the required number of balls n is 1 to 2, the possibility of a successful mission remains. be able to. As described above, when it becomes difficult to pass a game ball having an effective number of balls N or more due to the relationship between the effective time t and the required number n, the effective time t is slightly extended (1 to 3 seconds). If the required number of balls n is 1 or 2, leaving the possibility of succeeding in the mission, the remaining time has become little, so the player who gives up the success of the mission and tries to stop the launch of the game ball, It is possible to prompt the game ball to be continuously fired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the valid time t is not extended and when the extended time is less than the extension period T3 (less than 3 seconds in the above example), the time allocated to the effect gate passage effect II (13 Since the production ends in a time shorter than (second), the connection production is executed for some time from the end of the initial effective period T2 until the operation production process (S1710) is started. It is desirable to keep it.

  Next, still another embodiment relating to the operation value enhancement function will be described. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern with the variation numbers 30 to 32 is selected by the main control MPU 4100a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as the effect value enhancement effect effect pattern, when the effective time t becomes 0, the effect gate passing effect II. An effect pattern (pattern 1) that always ends and an effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as pattern 4) that extends the effective time t by the same time as the initial effective period T2 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Either one can be selected.

  The time chart of various effects in the operation value enhancement effect (variation pattern of variation numbers 30 to 32) of the present embodiment is the same as FIG. That is, of the 40-second fluctuation time, the first 10 seconds is the introduction effect IA, the next 13 seconds (T1) is the effect gate passing effect II, the next 7 seconds is the operation effect IIIA, and the last 10 seconds. Are assigned to the result presentation IV.

  FIG. 133 illustrates a time chart of the effect gate passage effect II in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 133, in this embodiment, among the 13 seconds (T1) assigned to the effect gate passage effect II, the first 5 seconds is the initial effective period (T2), and the next 3 seconds is the continuous effect period. In (T4), the remaining 5 seconds are assigned to a period (T3: extension period) that is extended when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  A series of processing in the operational value enhancement effect of the present embodiment is performed in the same manner as the flowcharts of FIGS. That is, in the present embodiment, pattern 1 or pattern 4 is selected as the effect pattern of the operation value enhancement effect in the effect gate passage effect pattern setting process (step S1720). If pattern 4 is selected (No in step S1722), it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation determination process (step S1713), and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Determines that the valid time t should be extended (Yes in step S1713). The situation determination process (step S1713) is executed when the effective time t is the situation determination time tc, for example, when the initial effective period T2 ends (t = 0). If the required number of balls n is not 0 at this time, It is determined that the valid time t should be extended (Yes in step S1713), and the valid period extension process (step S1714) is executed. In the valid period extension process (step S1714), the extension period value T3 is set to the initial valid period value T2.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the period in which the effect gate passing effect is made is constant in the pattern 1 effect mode, whereas the period in which the effect gate passing effect is made may be extended in the pattern 4 effect mode. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls fired during the production gate passage production is larger in pattern 4 than in pattern 1. Therefore, it can be said that the pattern 1 is a more preferable production mode for a player who does not want to consume a game ball for production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the effect pattern lottery process (S1721), the winning probability is distributed so that the pattern 1 is won with a higher probability than the pattern 4.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern 30 that is a big hit win is selected, the rate at which the pattern 1 is selected is 60%, whereas the rate at which the pattern 4 is selected is 40%. In addition, when the variation pattern 31 that is selected at the time of winning the small hit is selected, the rate at which the pattern 1 is selected is 70%, whereas the rate at which the pattern 4 is selected is 30%. Furthermore, when the variation pattern 32 is selected at the time of winning the loss, the rate at which the pattern 1 is selected is 80%, whereas the rate at which the pattern 4 is selected is 20%. According to this configuration, at the time of winning the most frequently lost games, the pattern 1 that consumes less game balls is almost selected, so that the player's dislike of consuming game balls for production. Can be suppressed. And, since the winning type when the production of pattern 4 is made is often a big hit, even if a lot of game balls are lost due to the production of pattern 4, the expectation for the big hit by the production of pattern 4 Since a feeling is heightened, the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

  Next, a specific example of the operational value enhancement effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 illustrates a series of effect screens displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 during the effect gate passing effect II. This embodiment will also be described using the effect screens illustrated in FIGS. 120, 121 (e) to (h), FIGS. 122 and 123. Further, here, the case where the pattern 4 is selected as the effect gate passing effect II, T2 = T3 = 5 (seconds), T4 = 3 (seconds), and N = 5 (pieces) will be described.

  FIG. 134A illustrates an example of a screen 1481 displayed subsequent to the screen 1410 of FIG. In this example, five zombie images 1416 are displayed using an area showing almost the entire screen 1481. In the lower left part of the screen, as in the screen 1410 of FIG. In the center of the screen, a message image 1417 of “5 zombies” is displayed superimposed on the area where the zombie image 1416 is displayed. In the upper part of the screen, a message image 1418 “A boss appears if it is annihilated within 5 seconds!” Is displayed in such a manner that it appears from the right end of the screen and disappears on the left side of the screen. With these zombie images 1416 and message images 1417 and 1418, the player is instructed to tell the story that if 5 zombies are killed within 5 seconds, boss zombies will appear. It can be expected that a big hit will occur. The player is encouraged to make a right strike on the screen 1410 in FIG. 120, and the player is expected to make a right strike more positively by increasing the expectation of the big hit on the screen 1481 in FIG. 134 (a). The monitoring of the effective time t is started from the point in time when the screen 1481 in FIG. 134 (a) is displayed.

  A screen 1482 in FIG. 134 (b) represents a scene that has attacked the first zombie. This screen 1482 is displayed when a game ball fired by right-hand strike first passes through the effect gate 6011 after the start of the operation value enhancement effect, and the required number of balls n becomes N−1, that is, four. This time is still within the initial effective period T2, and the effective time t is 4 seconds. On this screen 1482, an image 1420 of the attacked zombie is displayed. A message image 1491 of “4 seconds remaining” is displayed on the screen, along with a message image 1445 of “Defeat 1 body!” Indicating that the first zombie has been defeated, and a notification that the valid time t is 4 seconds. Has been. With the images 1420 and 1445, the player can recognize that the first zombie has been defeated, that is, the required number of balls n has reached 4, and the game ball continues to be fired to defeat the second zombie. Can be encouraged. Then, the message image 1491 allows the player to recognize that the remaining time is 4 seconds. In the upper part of the screen, as in FIG. 121B, a message image 1421 of “Chance to defeat the boss!” Is displayed. By displaying this message image 1421 during the period in which the effect gate passage effect II is being executed, it is possible to prompt the game ball to continue to be fired until a boss zombie appears.

  A screen 1483 in FIG. 134 (c) represents a scene in which an attack is made on the third zombie. This screen 1483 is displayed when a game ball launched by right-hand strike passes the effect gate 6011 for the third time after the start of the operation value enhancement effect, and the required number of balls n becomes N-3, that is, 2. . At this time, the valid time t is 0 seconds. In this screen 1483, as in FIG. 121 (c), the images 1423 and 1424 of the second and third zombies that were attacked are displayed together with the message image 1425 of “Defeat 3 bodies!” A message image 1492 “0 seconds remaining” is displayed to notify that the time t has become 0 seconds. The continuation effect is started from the next moment when this screen 1483 is displayed.

  In the continuation effect, after the screen 1440 of FIG. 122 indicating that the zombie extinction has failed is displayed once, the screen is switched to the display of the screen 1484 shown in FIG. 134 (d). On this screen 1484, a message image 1493 “not yet!” Is displayed to notify that the mission can be continued. The extension period (T3) starts from the next moment when this screen 1484 is displayed.

  When the extension period (T3) is entered, a screen 1485 of FIG. 134 (e) is displayed first. This screen 1485 is an effect screen that represents the same scene as the screen 1483 of FIG. 134 (c), but the message image 1494 that reports the valid time t is “5 more seconds” because the valid time t is extended by 5 seconds. Is displayed.

  If it succeeds in defeating the remaining two zombies within the extension period (T3), the screen 1485 of FIG. 134 (f) is displayed. If it fails, the screen 1440 of FIG. 122 is displayed. Depending on the case, screens 1429, 1432, 1434, 1437 of FIGS. 121 (e) to 121 (h) and a screen 1442 of FIG. 123 are displayed.

  Thus, when the pattern 4 is selected as the effect gate passing effect II, the effective time (remaining time) t is the initial effective period T2 if the required number of balls n is not 0 at the end of the initial effective period T2. Because it is possible to achieve the extension period T3 even if the mission has not been achieved at the end of the initial effective period T2, it is possible to achieve the initial effective period. A player who has stopped launching a game ball because the mission could not be accomplished within T2 can be urged to resume the launch of the game ball. Since the mission can be sufficiently achieved by restarting the launch of the game ball, if the mission is not achieved within the initial validity period T2, the production gate passing effect II ends without completing the mission. It can improve interest compared to In addition, after the initial effective period T2, the extended period T3 is started after the continuous production period T4, so that the mission could not be achieved within the initial effective period T2 and the jackpot reduced. Since the extended period T3 can be started after the player's expectation is raised by the continuous performance, it is possible to more effectively prompt the game ball to be restarted.

  In the above embodiment, the extension period T3 is set at the same time as the initial effective period T2. However, the extension period T3 may be set longer than the initial effective period T2. That is, the initial effective period T2 may be a period that is ½ or less of the extended effective period (T2 + T3). By setting the extension period T3 to be longer than the initial effective period T2, even if the mission is not progressing at all within the original effective period T2, that is, the required number of balls n is not reduced at all, the extension period T3 is reached. The chances of completing a mission can be greatly increased. In addition, the extended effective period will be more than twice the initial effective period T2, making it much easier to achieve the mission, so it will pass through a production gate that is easy for pachinko beginners unfamiliar with game ball launch operations, etc. The production II can be realized and the player's willingness to participate in the operational value enhancement production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the extension period T3 starts after the initial effective period T2 and then through the continuous production period T4. However, the extension period T3 may be started immediately after the initial effective period T2. Good. According to this configuration, it is possible to continue the effect gate passing effect II even in the extended period T3 without making the player aware that the initial valid period T2 has ended. Also in this configuration, when the initial effective period T2 ends, by performing a notification effect to notify that, the fact that the initial effective period T2 has ended, Suddenly, by shifting to the extension period T3, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by giving the player a surprise and a sense of expectation for the big hit, as well as the possibility that the mission can be accomplished again.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the pattern 1 or the pattern 2 is selected, the configuration in which the pattern 1 or the pattern 3 and the pattern 1 or the pattern 4 are selected in the production gate passage production pattern setting process (S1720) is exemplified. However, in the effect gate passage effect pattern setting process (S1720), one pattern may be selected from the four patterns 1 to 4. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which one pattern is selected from three patterns among these four patterns. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the diversity of the production gate passage production II and achieve a more interesting production.

  Next, an embodiment of a game process in which the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are related will be described. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position where the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the player cannot visually recognize at the same time, and can serve as an auxiliary display device for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. When the peripheral control board 4140 displays the effect image on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the lottery result, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device are always or in a specific game state. Synchronize with. In this synchronization processing, the peripheral control board 4140 is substantially the same as the moving image related to the moving image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, in particular, the moving image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. The moving image is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Substantially the same includes completely the same image and almost the same image in which the main part of the image is the same. Therefore, the player can continue the game while watching the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400.

  In the process of synchronizing the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control board 4140 validates the input to the player's upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and produces an effect based on this input information. The image is changed, and the effect image after the change is developed on both the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Input to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is made possible by touching, tapping, or the like using the touch panel 246. By using the touch panel, the player can input the entire display of the effect displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, while simultaneously inputting to a predetermined or desired portion of the display screen. Input information is supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 by the touch panel 246 as two-dimensional coordinate information. The peripheral control board 4140 determines which part of the displayed image is input based on the coordinate information, and executes image processing such as changing the area of the input part or branching the development of the moving image. To do.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), a special simulation for simulating a warrior (player character) attacking and defeating zombies (enemy characters) 8000, 8002 lurking in a Western-style building while searching for the Western-style building. In a mode or a scene (when the effect displayed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is a predetermined effect), a moving image viewed from the viewpoint of the warrior side is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. Reference numeral 8004 denotes a ceiling air-conditioning duct which is a part of the structure of the Western-style building. In the initial stage of this mode, the player advances the game while gazing at the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 before the mode.

  The peripheral control board 4140 causes the zombies A and B to appear in the western hall as the game progresses (state shown in FIG. 110 (a)). These zombies gradually approach the warrior and attack them. If the warrior can't defeat the zombie before this attack, the video will switch to a video where the warrior is killed by an attack from the zombie. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 enables an input for a counterattack on the player side. The peripheral control board 4140 enables an input 8006 (for example, an icon of the touch panel) to prompt the user to watch the side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 while enabling input to the touch panel. ) To notify the player of the input opportunity.

  When the player turns the viewpoint from the game area 5a in front of the player based on the promotion display and looks down on the upper plate outside the game area, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is substantially the same as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. An effect moving image is displayed (FIG. 110 (b)). The peripheral control board 4140 displays effective input locations on the display screen of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 so that effective input target areas for eliminating zombies can be distinguished from other areas, for example, FIG. As shown in (b), it is emphasized so that it can be clearly discriminated by the player by flashing it, making it translucent, or changing the color. In the example of FIG. 110 (b), since the zombie A area 8000 is flashed, when the player performs input processing by touching or tapping this area, the two-dimensional coordinate information of the input position is obtained. It is sent from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the two-dimensional coordinate information is included in the zombie A area 8000, the peripheral control board 4140 develops an image in which the zombie A is shot by a warrior and knocked down on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. . The same applies to the zombie B region 8002.

  Further, when the duct area 8004 is tapped, an image in which the duct falls on the zombies A and B is developed. Even if the player taps outside the flashed area, the input position is outside the area where the zombies A and B can be defeated, so that an image for attacking the zombies A and B is not developed. As described above, when the player performs an input to a desired location in almost the entire area of the display screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control board 4140 is based on the identification information (coordinates) of the input location. Judge the suitability of the input. Similarly to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 displays an image of a process that changes according to the player's input. Therefore, an effect (flash or the like) that suggests a suitable input area to the player is not performed. In order to direct the player's attention to the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, the above-described promotion display may be continuously displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel correspond to an operable display unit that can be operated by the player. indicate.

  A suitable input area changes every moment according to the development of the production. For example, when the zombie A closest to the warrior further approaches the warrior and the attack from the warrior is no longer in time, the peripheral control board 4140 displays the zombie A on the display screen of the upper side liquid crystal display device 244. The input recommendation effect (flash) for the area 8000 is terminated. The input coordinate position is within the appropriate input range (flash area) according to the distance from the warrior side of the input target (Zombie A area 8000) or the input timing without losing the recommended input effect. However, in the input result determination, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine that the input to the input target is unsuccessful.

  Since the synchronous effect image displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is based on the lottery result, the player eliminates all the attacking zombies, In order to succeed in escaping from the Western-style building, the user tries to energetically input to the touch panel 246. The peripheral control board 4140 can change the target displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 according to the lottery result. For example, if the lottery result is a big hit, you had to reduce the number of zombies appearing, increase the attack power against the zombies or decrease the defense power of the zombies, for example, you had to tap the zombie area multiple times The zombies can be defeated with a single tap, making the production easier to proceed successfully (warriors escape from the Western-style building).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is out of play or a small hit, even if the player has a good operation, the production is likely to fail (the warrior fails to escape from the Western-style building). For example, by operating the recommended input area accurately so that the number of touches is greater than that of other players, the peripheral control board 4140 reduces the number of times the player has input, or damage per enemy given to the enemy character. No matter how good the actions for the player's operation are, such as the fact that the input to the part of the recommended input area shown to the player is not actually enabled, no matter how ambitious the operation is Alternatively, no matter how fast the operation is, the result of the operation is a failure. The player can expect that the lottery result is a big hit when his input is effectively changed to the effect display, for example, when the zombies are efficiently driven out.

  The player's input is made possible by synchronizing the effect of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the effect of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and allowing the player to input the effect of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to reflect the change of the effect due to the effect of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side. Therefore, while the effect in the game area 5a is expanded and expanded beyond the game area, the player's attention is directed to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 There is also concern that attention may be neglected. Since the final branch effect of whether or not the lottery result is a big hit is performed on the game board side (game area side), it is beneficial to have the player pay attention to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 at this time. If the player keeps paying attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244 for a long time, he / she may not notice the final effect whether or not the lottery result on the game board side is a big hit, or the notice will be delayed.

  On the other hand, it may be harsh to ask the player to pay attention to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 while paying attention to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 performs an effect for giving the player an opportunity to refocus the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. For example, the peripheral control board 4140 generates a ringing sound, notifies the display of “view the front liquid crystal” from the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 244, or centers the drop movable accessory 6250 described above. The top plate immediately before the execution of the final branch effect or immediately after the start of the final branch effect by the surprise operation of the movable accessory such as suddenly dropping from the upper back side of the accessory 2300 to the front surface of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 The viewpoint of the player who is paying attention to the side liquid crystal display device 244 is drawn to the game board side.

  As described above, the form of input allowed to the touch panel 246 is not limited to the form for setting an attack on a specific display area such as a zombie. For example, the peripheral control board 4140 changes the traveling direction in the warrior's activity area (western building) depending on which direction key of the direction keys displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is touched by the player. The image is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the peripheral control board 4140. Also, other input devices (production buttons, production dials) can be used as auxiliary or reinforcement for input on the touch panel 246. As described above, the input of the touch panel is specified as two-dimensional information. However, by using information from another input device as additional dimension information, the input information can be varied. For example, the peripheral control board 4140 can utilize the pressing force of the player against the touch sensor panel in addition to the two-dimensional information by the touch by combining the touch sensor with the press sensor. The pressing force can be used as information in the z-axis direction or used as information indicating directionality. In addition, a small camera is incorporated in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control board 4140 detects the player's line-of-sight direction by face recognition technology based on information from the small camera, and the player is now using the upper plate side liquid crystal display. It can be determined whether the display device 244 is focused or not (whether the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is focused).

  Although the recommended input effect (flash) in the specific area displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is not displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, it is unique information for the player side. As other unique information, for example, there is expectation information when a zombie attack is successful and a big hit can be expected. When the player is paying attention to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the player watching the player around the player is on the upper plate side because the head of the player is tilted to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. It becomes easy to view the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 synchronized with the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 244. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 monitors the player's input status, and information according to the surrounding game viewers, for example, information that evaluates the player's input superiority or inferiority. A text display indicating that the player is likely to win) may be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 as unique information.

  The touch panel increases the degree of freedom of the player's input, and the display changes not only the display on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 but also the display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 by the input. The player can change the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 to a desired form, and as a result, the player's consciousness of participation in the performance can be improved and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Note that the peripheral control board 4140 may synchronize the display image of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 and the display image of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 while making the display formats of both different. For example, the former image may be displayed from the subjective viewpoint of the player-side character (the viewpoint of the warrior itself), and the latter image may be displayed from an objective viewpoint overlooking the player-side character. In addition, the latter video is changed to a video showing a warrior from the zombie side.

  Note that it is possible to input an image to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 side, for example, by providing a touch panel on the front glass of the game board. Applying an operation to an object is heavy, and the operation can be visually recognized from around. Therefore, the operation from the side of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is preferable. In addition, by configuring the data space for presentation from three-dimensional data, the player can change the presentation screen with more freedom by controlling the position of the virtual camera with the touch panel. Furthermore, by changing the position of the virtual camera of the effect displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the effect displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, different effect images can be displayed in the same image processing space. Can be displayed.

  The gaming machine described here has an opportunity to operate the auxiliary display device (top plate side liquid crystal display device 244) when a predetermined effect is being performed among the effects executed by the effect execution means (peripheral control board 4140). Furthermore, it is abbreviated as a predetermined effect displayed on the effect display device (game board side liquid crystal display device 1400) so that the player can grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the auxiliary display device. By displaying the same effect on the auxiliary display device, the effect can be expanded beyond the game area (5a) (cross-border means), thereby allowing the player to actively have a sense of participation in the game. As a result, the quality of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine described here is displayed when a predetermined effect is displayed on the display screen (operable display unit) of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 by the peripheral control board 4140 (operation-containing effect display means). An operation opportunity can be given to almost the entire display area of the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244 or the almost entire area of the range where the predetermined effect is displayed (global operation target means). When the entire area can be operated, regardless of which area of the entire area is operated, the predetermined effect is changed by the player's intention by changing the display mode of the predetermined effect based on the operated region. It is possible to create a creative production that reflects the game (means for creating a desired production). Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player a sense of participation in the game, and to improve the quality of the game. . It should be noted that the above-described whole-range operation possible range may be changed according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244.

  Next, an indistinct mode (latent effect state) which is an effect mode in which the game state (probability state) is not clearly notified will be described. In the unclear mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a predetermined big hit (big hit B to E) occurs, and the big hit game ends (rushes in). The ambiguity mode continues for a relatively long period (for example, 50 times) or until a gaming state (probability state) is notified (implied). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 135 to FIG. 139, the notification (implying) effect of the indistinct mode and the gaming state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.

[Unclear mode setting process]
First, the procedure of the indistinct mode setting process (step S1227) in the decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the indistinct mode setting process in the present embodiment.

  When the indistinct mode setting process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the result of the variable display game is a big hit (step S1251). If the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (No in step S1251), specifically, if the result is a small hit or a loss, this process ends.

  In the ambiguity mode setting process shown in FIG. 135, the ambiguity mode can be entered in the case of a big hit, but this is not restrictive. For example, when the big hit game in the same mode as the small hit game can be executed, the ambiguity mode may be entered even in the case of the small hit game. That is, hits (big hits, small hits) and win games that are indistinguishable by the player are defined, and if the player cannot judge whether or not the probability changing function is activated after the hit game ends, the player enters the unclear mode. You may make it rush. Further, even if no win occurs, the player may enter the indistinct mode after performing an effect in which the player cannot distinguish from the win.

  On the other hand, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit (Yes in step S1251), the peripheral control MPU 4150a further determines whether the type of the big hit is any of big hits B to E (step S1251). S1252). When the type of jackpot is not one of big hits B to E (No in step S1251), specifically, when the jackpot is A, the player grasps the probability state after the jackpot game is ended according to the mode of the jackpot game. Since this is possible, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the unclear mode lottery process (step S1253) when the type of the big hit is any of the big hits B to E (Yes in step S1251). In the indistinct mode lottery process, for example, a random number is extracted to determine whether or not to shift to the indistinct mode. It should be noted that the ambiguity mode lottery process may not be executed and the ambiguity mode may always be entered, or the ambiguity mode may be entered only when the operating state of the time reduction function does not change. In addition, even if the operating state of the short-time function changes, the player may shift to the unclear mode when the player cannot grasp the operating state of the stochastic function.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not to shift to the obscured mode as a result of the lottery processing by the obscured mode lottery process (step S1254). When the mode is not shifted to the unclear mode (No in step S1254), the present process is terminated.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4150a shifts to the indistinct mode (Yes in step S1254), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets an indistinct mode flag indicating the shift to the indistinct mode (step S1255). When the indistinct mode flag is set, a lottery and an effect for notifying a gaming state (whether it is a normal gaming state or a probable change state (highly probable gaming state, advantageous gaming state)) in a gaming state notifying process described later. Executed.

  Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a game state ambiguity effect that is an effect indicating that the ambiguity mode is being executed (step S1256). In the game state unclear effect, the effect of stimulating the player's expectation is performed without clarifying whether the game state is the normal game state or the probability variation state (FIG. 136).

  FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of the game state ambiguity effect in the ambiguity mode of the present embodiment. In the game state ambiguity effect in the ambiguity mode, as shown in FIG. 136, a decorative symbol 1412 is displayed in a variably manner on the forefront, and a plurality of clouds are arranged on the back side of the decorative symbol 1412 so as to cover the background. For example, when a character or the like (for example, a zombie) is hidden behind the cloud, it is a probable state with a high probability of being a big hit, and when there is nothing, a normal gaming state is entered.

  In a screen 1410 shown in FIG. 136, a message indicating the hitting direction (“left-handed”) and the unclear mode is displayed at the top of the screen. In the lower part of the screen, a first start memory display 1409a indicating the first start memory on the left side and a second start memory display 1409b indicating the second start memory on the right side are arranged. The first start memory is displayed as a circle, and the second start memory is displayed as a square shape. In FIG. 136, the start memory that has actually occurred is displayed with a solid line, and the start memory that has not occurred is displayed with a broken line, but the start memory that has not occurred may not be displayed.

  In addition, before the game state notification effect (game state notification notice effect) to be described later is executed in a state where the effect mode is in the indistinct mode, or independently of the game state notification effect, the possibility of the probability change state is suggested. An effect (game state suggestion effect) may be executed. For example, the display mode of a message indicating the unclear mode is changed. Specifically, to indicate that there is a high probability that the probability change state is high, display the “probability” character larger than the “normal” character, or conversely change the “normal” character to “probability”. Display smaller than text. In addition, the character size may be changed according to the expected degree of probability change. Furthermore, instead of suggesting that the probability variation state is highly likely, execution of a gaming state notification effect (game state notification notice effect) may be suggested. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation with respect to the probable change state before executing the game state notification effect.

  Further, the character color of the message indicating the unclear mode may be changed according to the expected degree of the probability change state. For example, the character color is set in the order of “blue” → “green” → “red” as the expected degree of probability variation state increases. Moreover, you may make it change the character color of a message in steps as a game progresses. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation from decreasing while the indistinct mode continues, and to maintain the player's expectation.

  Further, the entire message displayed at the top of the screen may be scrolled horizontally. At this time, the scrolling speed may be set according to the expected degree of the probability variation state. For example, the scroll speed is set to be higher as the expectation level of the probability change state is higher, and the speed is set to be lower as the expectation level of the probability change state is lower. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation of the probability variation state is high.

  In addition, the start memory that is expected to be a big hit may be changed in shape and color as a pre-read notice (pre-read suggestion effect). For example, a weapon shape for repelling a zombie may be used, and the weapon equipped to the hero character may be changed at the timing when the start memory that is the weapon shape is digested. In this way, it is possible to enhance interest by executing an effect that associates the display mode of the startup memory with the character displayed on the screen 1410.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the production | presentation (game state suggestion production | generation) which alert | reports the expectation degree of a probability change state by changing the display mode of start memory. For example, when the expected degree of the probability change state is high, the display mode of the start memory is changed. At this time, in order to distinguish from the pre-reading notice, the display mode of the start memory by the gaming state suggestion effect may be different from the case of the pre-reading notice. Further, by changing the display mode of all displayed start memories at the same time, it may be suggested that the start state is not the big hit expectation degree of individual start memories but the expectation degree for the gaming state.

  Further, the expected degree of the probable change state may be notified by the execution frequency of the prefetching notice in the unclear mode. For example, the frequency of execution of the pre-reading notice may be increased in the case of the probability change state, and conversely, the frequency of execution of the pre-reading notice may be increased in the normal gaming state in order to maintain the player's sense of expectation. Note that the game state notification based on the execution frequency of the prefetch notice will be described in detail in an embodiment described later.

[Game state notification processing]
Next, the gaming state notification process for notifying the current gaming state in the unclear mode will be described. The gaming state notification process is executed in the gaming state notification process (step S1250) in the 16 ms steady process. That is, the gaming state notification process is periodically executed every 16 ms. Then, when the condition for notifying the gaming state is satisfied (in the present embodiment, when the current time is within a specific period) when the indistinct mode is being executed, the effect of notifying the gaming state is executed. Make settings for

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of gaming state notification processing according to the present embodiment. In this embodiment, based on the time information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 described above, it is determined whether or not to notify the gaming state. At this time, by executing the effect of notifying the game state at the same timing with a plurality of gaming machines, it looks as if the effects of the plurality of gaming machines are synchronized. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a that executes the gaming state notification process serves as synchronization suggestion execution means that suggests a gaming state in synchronization with a plurality of gaming machines.

  When the gaming state notification process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the indistinct mode flag is set (step S1261). The ambiguity mode flag is set in the process of step S1245 of the ambiguity mode setting process (FIG. 135) described above when the ambiguity mode is entered after the big hit game is over. If the ambiguity mode flag is not set (No in step S1261), the process is terminated because the ambiguity mode has not been entered.

  If the ambiguity mode flag is set (Yes in step S1261), the peripheral control MPU 4150a has shifted to the ambiguity mode, and thus determines whether or not to notify the gaming state based on the current time. judge. First, time information is acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (step 1262). The time information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 may be the current time itself or an elapsed time from the reference time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the unclear mode in which the effect mode is not clearly notified, the gaming state is notified when the current time reaches a predetermined time. At this time, the player may be surprised by suddenly executing the game state notification effect, or the notice effect may be executed at a predetermined timing before the game state notification effect is executed. In the present embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 138, a notice effect is executed before the gaming state is clearly notified to increase the player's expectation.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the current time based on the acquired time information, and determines whether or not the current time is within the notice period (step S1263). If the current time is within the advance notice period (Yes in step S1263), game state notification advance notice setting is executed (step S1264).

  As described above, the gaming state notification advance notice is an effect for giving a notice (implying) execution of the game state notification effect. FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notice effect for notifying the game state according to the present embodiment. In the gaming state notification advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 138, the time until the gaming state notification is executed is counted down. Before starting the countdown display, an effect suggesting that a game state notification effect may be started, such as blinking the screen or moving an accessory, may be executed.

  In the gaming state notification advance effect shown in FIG. 138, first, an effect in which a cloud covering the background moves is started, and an effect suggesting that some character is displayed behind the cloud is executed. The effect suggesting that some character is displayed behind the cloud may be, for example, displaying the silhouette of the character as described later, or the character moves behind the cloud and The character may be made visible for a moment from an interval. The time until the player can recognize the character displayed behind the cloud is the notice period. For example, the notice period starts 15 seconds before the start of the game state notification effect.

  The effect that suggests that some character is displayed behind the cloud will be described in more detail. In the case of a configuration that displays the silhouette of the character, the character displayed in accordance with the game state is set. May be. Moreover, you may make a character respond | correspond to the expectation degree which is not a probability change state but a probability change state. At this time, the silhouette is gradually changed from the silhouette so that the player can recognize the character as the advance notice period elapses. Then, the player can specify the character at the end of the notice period, and the actual gaming state is notified when the notification effect is executed. By configuring in this way, the player's sense of expectation can be gradually increased from when the silhouette is displayed (at the start of the notice period), and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Furthermore, the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced by mixing characters that are difficult to distinguish by silhouette alone. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the character may not be displayed, and by setting the character corresponding to the normal gaming state, the player has a sense of expectation until the end of the notice effect. You may do it.

  On the other hand, in a case where the character can be seen for a moment from between the clouds, the character exists until the movement (disappearance) of the cloud is completed (until the notice period ends, until the notification effect is started). Whether or not it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not. For example, an effect is performed in which the character moves behind the clouds. At this time, the character may be displayed as a silhouette. Then, after the notice period is over (when the notification effect is started), if the gaming state is a certain change state, the character is displayed as the cloud disappears, while if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, Do not display (disappear) the character as it disappears. Further, the character may be suddenly made to appear behind the cloud that has finally disappeared while the presence of the character is expected in the first half of the notice effect and the absence of the character is predicted in the second half. By configuring as described above, it is possible to continue to the end of the notice effect while changing the player's expectation, and to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Note that the effect executed after the countdown ends may not be the game effect notification effect. By executing the countdown effect even if the effect mode is not in the indistinct mode, as described above, it becomes possible to execute the effect at the same timing with a plurality of gaming machines, and the effect as if synchronized with a plurality of gaming machines. It can appear as if it is being done. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of a game at a specific time by executing various types of effects in addition to notifying the game state at a predetermined time. Thereby, the increase in the number of visitors to the game hall at the specific time can be expected.

  In addition, it may be determined whether or not a game state notification effect is to be executed after the countdown is completed. (Trial effect) may be executed to keep the player's feeling of expectation.

  Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 137, if the current time is not within the advance notice period (No in step S 1263), the peripheral control MPU 4150 a further executes a notification effect that the current time is a gaming state. It is determined whether it is within the period (notification period) (step S1265). If the current time is not within the predetermined period (No in step S1265), this processing is terminated because neither the game notice notification effect nor the notification effect is executed.

  The predetermined period during which the game state notification effect can be executed is set for each gaming machine. For example, setting information for a predetermined period may be acquired from the information management device 5000 when the gaming machine is turned on, and a gaming state notification effect may be executed based on the acquired setting information. At this time, by synchronizing the time information of the RTC control unit 4165 with the information management device 5000, it is possible to make the performance execution timing of each gaming machine more coincident.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state (step S1266) when the current time is within a predetermined period for executing the game state notification effect (Yes in step S1265). ). If the current gaming state is the probability variation state, an effect for informing that the current gaming state is the probability variation state is set (step S1267), whereas if the current gaming state is not the probability variation state, that is, the normal gaming state In this case, an effect for notifying that the game state is normal is set (step S1268).

  Here, a screen example of the gaming state notification effect will be described. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of the gaming state notification effect of the present embodiment. In the gaming state notification effect, after the notice state effect of the gaming state notification is finished, the cloud covering the background disappears, and the player can recognize the character placed behind the cloud.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (A), when there is a zombie behind the cloud, it is notified that the current gaming state is the probability variation state, and the game is continued by switching to the effect mode of the probability variation state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), when there is nothing behind the cloud, it is notified that the current game state is the normal game state, and the game is continued in the normal effect mode.

  In order to maintain the player's expectation, the character must be displayed until the cloud completely disappears, regardless of whether the gaming state is a promiscuous state or a normal gaming state, including the notice period. It may be displayed as a silhouette or in a translucent state. Further, as described above, after the cloud disappears, the cloud may be generated again to continue the unclear mode. In this case, instead of continuing until the notification timing of the next gaming state, the gaming state notification notice effect or the gaming state notification effect may be executed as a retrying effect after a certain time has elapsed. .

  Returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4150a resets (cancels) the indistinct mode flag when the setting of the game state notification effect ends (step S1269), and ends the present process.

  In addition, when entering into the indistinct mode within a predetermined period during which the gaming state can be notified, the notice effect may be executed immediately, or the notification effect may be executed immediately without executing the notice effect. . Further, a shortened notice effect may be executed based on the time elapsed since the predetermined period. For example, after the effect mode in the indistinct mode is continued for several seconds, the notice effect is executed in a notice period shorter than a predetermined notice period (for example, 3 seconds), and then the notice effect of the gaming state is executed. Also good.

(Effect of 1st Embodiment)
Here, in game halls where pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are installed, there are days of the week when there are many players, days of the week, and times when there are many players. By securing as many visitors as possible on the days of the week and times when there are few players for the game hall, it can be expected that the operating time of the gaming machine will be increased. For example, it may be possible to encourage the player to visit during the time period by executing many effects that are a bonus for the player during the time period when there are few players.

  In the present embodiment, in the unclear mode in which the gaming state is not clearly notified, by using the clocking means (RTC control unit 4165) provided in each gaming machine, a plurality of units can be used at a predetermined time. The gaming state can be notified all at once with gaming machines. By setting a large number of predetermined times at which the gaming state is broadcast all together in a time zone with few players and notifying the players of this predetermined time, it is possible to expect an increase in the number of players who visit the time zone.

  Further, the number of players for each time zone may be totaled by the information management device 5000 or the member management device 5100 (FIG. 61A). For example, it may be counted based on the time when a member card or one-day card is inserted or removed from the CR unit 6 provided in the gaming machine, or the number of game balls fired (number of outs) for each time slot You may total based on.

  In addition, the player is notified of the game state at a predetermined timing (for example, when a predetermined time is reached) even during the execution of the unclear mode in which the game state is not notified. Can continue.

  Furthermore, even if the player does not know the timing at which the game state is notified, the notice effect is executed before the game state is notified, so the player's expectation can be enhanced. At this time, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from declining by configuring so as to execute a special effect other than the notification effect of the game state.

(Second Embodiment)
In the first embodiment of the present invention, the gaming state in the indistinct mode is reported based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means (RTC control unit 4165), but in the second embodiment, the signal received from the outside The gaming state in the indistinct mode is notified based on (command etc.). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is omitted, and only the configuration that is different will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external information transmission / reception board 5500 that enables transmission / reception of signals to / from the peripheral control board 4140. As described above, the external information transmission / reception board 5500 can transmit / receive information to / from the outside. For example, the external information transmission / reception board 5500 transmits / receives information to / from the information management device 5000 and other pachinko gaming machines. Further, information may be transmitted and received between different types of gaming machines such as slot machines.

  In the present embodiment, when pachinko gaming machines to be notified of the gaming state in the indistinct mode are grouped, and any of the pachinko gaming machines 1 in the group satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of jackpot) The pachinko gaming machine 1 transmits a game state notification effect execution command (game state notification command) to other gaming machines in the group. Details of this embodiment will be described below.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, in the initial setting (step S1001) of the sub-main process shown in FIG. Identify the pachinko machine that will be the destination. The acquired gaming machine information is stored in a storage device (for example, the peripheral control RAM 4150c) provided in the peripheral control unit 4150.

[Configuration of information management device]
FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the information management apparatus of this embodiment. As described above, the information management device 5000 is a so-called hall computer, collects game information from gaming machines arranged in the game arcade, and manages the collected game information and the like. The information management device 5000 includes a CPU 5001, ROM 5002, RAM 5003, magnetic storage device (hard disk drive, HDD) 5004, network interface (I / F) 5006, and input / output (I / O) port 5007. The CPU 5001, the ROM 5002, the RAM 5003, the HDD 5004, the network I / F 5006, and the I / O port 5007 are connected by a bus.

  The CPU 5001 executes various processes by executing programs stored in the ROM 5002 or the RAM 5003. The ROM 5002 is a storage device that is prohibited from writing, and stores programs, data that does not need to be updated, and the like.

  The RAM 5003 is a storage device that can update the storage contents, and temporarily stores programs and data stored in the HDD 5004 and temporarily stores data necessary for execution of the programs by the CPU 5001. The RAM 5003 stores gaming machine information 5030 for managing gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines installed in the gaming hall. Details of the gaming machine information 5030 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The HDD 5004 is a non-volatile magnetic storage device that can store a large amount of data. The HDD 5004 stores gaming machine information, collected gaming information, and the like. Game information collected from gaming machines and CR units is temporarily stored in the RAM 5003. However, since the capacity of the RAM 5003 is limited, it is written to the HDD 5004 when the capacity is insufficient.

  The network I / F 5006 is connected to the relay device 5200 and the member management device 5100 via the network 5250 (FIG. 61A). The relay device 5200 is connected to one or more gaming machines.

  The I / O port 5007 is, for example, an interface such as a USB port, and connects to the information management device 5000 an input device 5010 such as a mouse or keyboard, an output device 5011 such as a display device (display), or the like. The I / O port 5007 is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) that supplies power in the event of a power failure or the like, thereby preventing the collected game information from being lost.

[Game machine information]
FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an example of gaming machine information according to the present embodiment. The gaming machine information 5030 includes information such as a machine number 5031, an address 5032, a model name 5033, a manufacturer 5034, a group 5035, and a communication availability 5036. The machine number 5031 is a number for identifying a gaming machine. The address 5032 is identification information in the gaming machine network, and is, for example, an IP address. The machine number 5031 and the address 5032 are set to values that do not overlap with other gaming machines. The model name 5033 is the model name of the gaming machine, and the manufacturer 5034 is the manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine.

  The group 5035 is identification information given to gaming machines capable of cooperation (command transmission / reception), and in this embodiment, a gaming state notification command is transmitted to gaming machines in the same group. That is, it is possible to execute an effect in cooperation with gaming machines belonging to the same group.

  The communication permission / inhibition 5036 is information for designating whether or not communication with an external device such as another gaming machine is permitted. That is, when the communication enable / disable 5036 is “enabled”, it is possible to communicate with other gaming machines in the same group, and whether or not the game status notification command is transmitted / received by setting the communication enabled / disabled to “disabled”. Can be set for each gaming machine.

  Note that the chip ID of the gaming microcomputer mounted on the pachinko gaming machine may be stored in association with the machine number. By doing this, it is possible to detect that the gaming microcomputer has been replaced by transmitting a command including the chip ID and the machine number from the pachinko gaming machine at the time of initialization such as when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, Unauthorized actions such as replacing boards can be discovered.

  Each pachinko gaming machine is set with a machine number and an address. In the initial setting of the sub-main process (step S1001), the machine number is used to acquire information on other gaming machines that transmit a gaming state notification command. And a group request command including the address. Based on the machine number and address included in the received group request command, the information management device 5000 acquires information (for example, machine number 5031, address 5032) that identifies gaming machines in the same group from the gaming machine information 5030. Respond to the sending machine. When an address is used for communication between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the information management device 5000, the record of the gaming machine information 5030 may be specified from the address included in the command.

  As described above, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the transmission destination of another pachinko gaming machine that transmits and receives a gaming state notification command is acquired. Then, when a game state notification command is received from another pachinko gaming machine when the effect mode is in the indistinct mode, a game state notification effect is executed as shown in the first embodiment.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing according to the present embodiment. In the command analysis processing in this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not a gaming state notification command has been received (step S1108), and if a gaming state notification command has been received (Yes in step S1108), A gaming state notification flag is set (step S1109). Processes other than step S1108 and step S1109 are the same as in the first embodiment. As described above, the external information transmitting / receiving board 5500 constitutes game information receiving means for receiving input of game information (game state notification command) from the outside.

  Note that the command analysis processing of the present embodiment is configured to be able to receive not only commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 but also commands transmitted from the outside via the external information transmission / reception board 5500.

[Game state notification processing]
As described above, at the timing when the gaming state notification flag is received and the gaming state notification flag is set, if the effect mode is the unclear mode, the gaming state is determined in the gaming state notification processing (step S1250) in the 16 ms steady process. The gaming state notification to be notified is executed. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the gaming state notification process according to the present embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is assigned about the same process as 1st Embodiment.

  When the gaming state notification process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the indistinct mode flag is set (step S1261). If the ambiguity mode flag is not set (No in step S1261), the process is terminated because the ambiguity mode has not been entered.

  When the ambiguity mode flag is set (Yes in step S1261), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the gaming state notification flag is set because the mode has shifted to the ambiguity mode ( Step 1271). As described above, the indistinct mode flag is set when a gaming state notification command is received from the outside (another gaming machine). If the gaming state notification flag is not set (No in step S1271), peripheral control MPU 4150a does not execute the gaming state notification effect, and ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state notification flag is set (Yes in step S1271), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state (step S1266). If the current gaming state is the probability variation state, an effect for informing that the current gaming state is the probability variation state is set (step S1267), whereas if the current gaming state is not the probability variation state, that is, the normal gaming state In this case, an effect for notifying that the game state is normal is set (step S1269).

  By controlling as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a changes the effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode from the unclear mode to the mode in which the game state is clearly notified based on the input of the game information (game state notification command). Configure. In addition, in a clear performance mode that is in a probabilistic state or a normal gaming state, the likelihood of a big hit is likely to occur (if the probability changing state is high, it is highly likely that a big hit will occur early. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a may change the production mode from the unclear mode to the certain variation mode or the normal game state but to the clear production mode. The suggestion effect mode transition means for shifting to the effect mode suggesting the possibility of shifting to the special game state is configured.

  144 and 145 are diagrams showing an example of the gaming state notification effect of the present embodiment. FIG. 144A shows an example of a screen in the indistinct mode, which is configured in the same manner as the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 144 (B) is executed at the timing when a gaming state notification command is received from another gaming machine, and notifies (suggests) the start of the gaming state notification effect. A message “Something has come !!” is displayed on the screen 1410, and the effect of the cloud disappearing with the shooting star is executed. At this time, the silhouette of the character (zombie) is displayed behind the clouds, increasing the player's expectation.

  At this time, a notification effect regarding the gaming machine that has transmitted the gaming state notification command may be provided. Further, the notification effect of the command transmission source may be executed before the game state notification effect is executed. For example, when a big hit occurs, a message such as “A big hit at XX! Lucky siege” may be displayed. By comprising in this way, possibility that a game state will be notified will become so high that there are many players of the game machine which belongs to the same group, and the interest of a game can be raised. In particular, when multiple players play a game together, if a big hit occurs in their own game, it is possible to give benefits to other players, and there will be an advantage of bringing other players to the game hall Become. Note that such a message may be displayed only when the gaming state is in the probable state. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the player's sense of expectation is raised and finally discouraged, so that the interest of the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), when there is a zombie behind the cloud, it is notified that the current gaming state is a probable change state, and the game is continued by switching to the effect mode of the probable change state. . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), when there is nothing behind the cloud, it is notified that the current game state is the normal game state, and the game is continued in the normal effect mode.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart in FIG. 143, the peripheral control MPU 4150a resets (cancels) the obscuration mode flag when the setting of the game state notification effect is completed (step S1269). Further, the gaming state notification flag is reset (released) (step S1272), and this process is terminated.

[Transmission of gaming status notification command]
The process when the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has received the gaming state notification command has been described above. Next, a case where a gaming state notification command is transmitted will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to transmit a gaming state notification command to other pachinko gaming machines 1 when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game. An example of the predetermined condition is a case where a big hit or a small hit occurs. For example, when a gaming state notification command is transmitted when a small hit occurs, at the end (or start) of the small hit display process (step S1240 in FIG. 100), to other gaming machines in the group acquired by the initial setting, A gaming state notification command may be output via the external information transmission / reception board 5500.

  The gaming state notification command may be transmitted to the information management device 5000 instead of being directly transmitted to other pachinko gaming machines. When the information management device 5000 receives the gaming state notification command, the information management device 5000 identifies the gaming machine as the transmission source, and transmits the gaming state notification command to the gaming machines in the same group as the identified gaming machine. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to acquire the addresses of other gaming machines in the same group at the time of initial setting, and the processing on the gaming machine side can be simplified.

  Further, when the mode is changed to the obscuring mode, a signal is output to the information management device 5000, and the information management device 5000 holds in the gaming machine information 5030 information indicating whether or not the rendering mode is the obscuring mode. By doing so, the transmission destination of the gaming state notification command can be further limited. With this configuration, the network load can be reduced.

  In this way, when the gaming state of each gaming machine is grasped by the information management device 5000, the gaming machine belongs to the same group, and is different from the other gaming machines in which the effect mode is not in the unclear mode. You may make it transmit the command for performing an effect. In this way, by managing the gaming state of each gaming machine with the information management device 5000, it may affect the effects of other gaming machines belonging to the same group based on the establishment of a specific condition in one gaming machine. it can.

  Further, a gaming state notification command may be transmitted to all gaming machines connected to the network. With this configuration, although the load on the network increases, it is not necessary to specify the command transmission destination gaming machine, so that the load at the time of initial setting can be reduced. In addition, when the gaming machine that has received the gaming state notification command is not in the unclear mode and does not perform the gaming state notification, the received command may be discarded, or a special effect will be executed upon receiving the command. You may do it. Further, when a command from a gaming machine belonging to another group is received, the received command may be discarded or a dedicated event may be generated.

(Game state notification control by production management device)
The example in which the gaming state notification effect is executed based on the gaming state notification command from another gaming machine has been described above. Here, a configuration in which the effect control of each gaming machine is performed by the effect management device will be described.

[Game system configuration]
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the gaming system of the present embodiment. This embodiment is different from the gaming system in the first embodiment in that it includes an effect management device 5300 that controls effects. The effect management device 5300 is connected to each gaming machine via a relay device 5200 connected to the network 5250. The production management device 5300 is configured to manage production contents of each gaming machine. The detailed configuration of the effect management device 5300 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the effect management device 5300 is configured not to directly exchange data with the information management device 5000 and the member management device 5100. Therefore, a network different from the network 5250 may be configured, and only the effect management device 5300 and the external information transmission / reception board 5500 of each gaming machine may be connected to the network. With this configuration, security can be strengthened. In this case, you may enable it to connect to the production control server installed outside via the Internet. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to distribute the update data of the production contents to each gaming machine via the production management device 5300.

[Production management device]
FIG. 147 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect management device of this embodiment. The effect management device 5300 is a computer that manages information of players registered as members. The effect management device 5300 includes a CPU 5301, ROM 5302, RAM 5303, magnetic storage device (hard disk drive, HDD) 5304, network interface (I / F) 5306, and input / output (I / O) port 5307. The CPU 5301, ROM 5302, RAM 5303, HDD 5304, network I / F 5306, and I / O port 5307 are connected by a bus.

  The CPU 5301 executes various processes by executing programs stored in the ROM 5302 or the RAM 5303. The ROM 5302 is a storage device that is prohibited from writing, and stores programs, data that does not need to be updated, and the like.

  The RAM 5303 is a storage device capable of updating the storage contents, and temporarily stores programs and data stored in the HDD 5304 and stores data necessary for the CPU 5301 to execute the programs. For example, information related to the effects of each gaming machine (effect management information 5330) is stored. The production management information 5330 stores information necessary for production control, such as a gaming state for each gaming machine and a group of gaming machines that transmit gaming state notification commands. Details of the effect management information 5330 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The HDD 5304 is a non-volatile magnetic storage device that can store a large amount of data. For example, information that does not depend on the gaming state among the effect management information 5330 is stored in the HDD 5304 and is loaded into the RAM 5303 when the effect management device 5300 is turned on. Then, necessary information is collected when the power of each gaming machine is turned on or when the game is started, and the production management information 5330 is updated.

  The network I / F 5306 is connected to the relay apparatus 5200 via the network 5250 (FIG. 146). The I / O port 5307 may be connected to the information management device 5000 and the member management device 5100. As with the I / O port 5007 of the information management device 5000, an input device 5310, an output device 5311, and an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) are connected.

[Direction management information]
FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example of effect management information according to the present embodiment. The production management information 5330 includes information such as a machine number 5331, a group 5332, a communication availability 5333, a gaming state 5334, a production mode 5335, a member 5336, and a game 5337.

  The stand number 5331 is a number for identifying a gaming machine. The group 5332 is identification information given to gaming machines capable of cooperation (command transmission / reception). The communication permission / prohibition 5333 is information for designating whether or not communication with an external device such as another gaming machine is permitted.

  The gaming state 5334 is information for specifying the current gaming state. For example, “probability change state”, “normal game state”, and the like are set. In addition, you may set “time-short state” in which the time-shortening function is activated, “hit-game state (special game state)” corresponding to the big-hit game, etc., and may be set in detail as necessary. .

  The effect mode 5335 is an effect mode currently being executed. For example, “clear mode” and “unclear mode” are set, but a more detailed production mode may be set. The effect mode (effect mode) is set corresponding to the gaming state, for example, and shifts to another effect mode with a change in the gaming state, such as when winning a big hit. Note that the game state and the production mode do not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of production modes may be set for one game state. For example, in the “probability change state”, both “clear mode” and “unclear mode” may be set.

  The member 5336 is information for specifying whether or not the player is a member. “Y” is set when the member is a member, and “N” is set when the member is not a member. In-game 5337 is information for specifying whether or not a game is being played on the gaming machine corresponding to the machine number 5331. “Y” is set when the game is being played, and “N” is set when the game is not being played.

  As described above, by setting the production management information, the gaming machine that is the transmission source of the gaming state notification command transmits a transmission request for the gaming state notification command to the production management device 5300, and the production management device 5300 is the destination. It is possible to select a gaming machine and transmit a gaming state notification command from the effect management device 5300. By controlling in this way, it is possible to select a gaming machine whose effect mode is indistinct mode and transmit a gaming state notification command. In addition, since it is possible to transmit a gaming state notification command according to the gaming state of each gaming machine, for example, a different command is transmitted for each gaming machine so as to execute different effects for non-members of the member Is also possible.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to select a gaming machine capable of executing a gaming state notification effect, and further instruct to execute an effect suitable for the gaming state in the selected gaming machine. At this time, a command (execution execution command) for executing a special effect or a command for changing an effect to be executed (game execution command) for a game machine that does not execute the game state notification effect, that is, a game machine whose effect mode is not in the unclear mode. An effect change command) may be output. By configuring in this way, in addition to the game state notification effect, an effect based on a game by another player is executed, and it becomes possible to execute the effect at a timing when the player cannot predict (unexpected), It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to reduce interest.

[Produce control procedure]
Next, the processing procedure of the gaming system in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a sequence diagram illustrating a procedure for executing a gaming state notification effect in the gaming system of the present embodiment.

  (A) shows a procedure in the case where a player inserts a member card into a gaming machine in which no game is performed and starts a game. When a player inserts a member card into a gaming device (specifically, a CR unit connected to a gaming machine), a member information acquisition request is transmitted to the member management device 5100. The member management apparatus 5100 acquires the requested member information (step S3001) and responds.

  Note that the same processing is performed even when the player is not a member but inserts a one-day card. At this time, the member information indicating that the member is non-member may be generated without acquiring the member information from the member management device 5100, or the corresponding one-day card player information is acquired from the member management device 5100. You may do it.

  When the gaming machine acquires the member information, the gaming machine transmits the member information together with the gaming machine information to the effect management device 5300. When receiving the gaming machine information and the member information, the effect management device 5300 registers these information in the effect management information 5330 (step S3002).

  (B) shows a procedure for transmitting a gaming state notification command to another gaming machine. Here, the condition for transmitting the gaming state notification command is a case where a big hit occurs. When a big hit occurs during the game (step S3011), the gaming machine transmits a gaming state notification command to the effect management device 5300. The transmission timing of the game state notification command may be when a big hit occurs (at the start of a big hit game) or when the big hit game ends.

  When receiving the gaming state notification command, the effect management device 5300 refers to the effect management information 5330 and identifies the group of gaming machines that have transmitted the gaming state notification command. Then, if the value of the communication availability 5333 of the gaming machine that is the command transmission source is “enabled”, another gaming machine that is in the same group and that has the value of communication enabled / disabled 5333 is selected (step S3012). If the value of the communication possibility 5333 of the gaming machine in which the big hit has occurred is “No”, the processing is ended as it is.

  Furthermore, the effect management device 5300 transmits a gaming state notification command to the gaming machines whose effect mode is “unclear” among the other specified gaming machines. At this time, it may be further determined whether or not to transmit a gaming state notification command depending on whether or not the user is a member. Further, as described above, a plurality of types of gaming state notification commands may be prepared, and different gaming state notification commands may be transmitted in the probability variation state and in the normal gaming state.

  Thereafter, the effect management device 5300 transmits a gaming state notification command to another gaming machine as a transmission destination. Other gaming machines that have received the gaming state notification command execute a gaming state notification effect based on the content of the received command (step S3013). At this time, the effect management device 5300 may transmit a command for executing another effect different from the game state notification effect to the gaming machine whose effect mode is not in the unclear mode as described above.

  Each gaming machine notifies the effect management device 5300 every time the gaming state or effect mode changes, and the effect management device 5300 updates the effect management information 5330 based on the notified contents.

  (C) shows the procedure for ending the game and taking out the membership card. When the member card is taken out, the gaming device transmits an initialization request for gaming machine information and member information to the effect management device 5300. When receiving the request for initializing these pieces of information, the effect management device 5300 updates the effect management information corresponding to the game machine that is the transmission source (step S3021). For example, the member 5336 is blank, and the in-game 5337 is set from “Y” to “N”.

  The above is the procedure from the start of the game (insertion of the membership card) to the end (extraction of the membership card). In this embodiment, member information and gaming machine information are automatically registered in the effect management device 5300 when a member card (one-day card) is inserted, and the registered information is initialized when the card is removed. By comprising in this way, production management information can be updated appropriately. For this reason, it is not necessary to perform a special operation on the game hall side, and it becomes possible to operate the game system of the present embodiment.

  In addition, since the performance is executed when a specific condition such as the occurrence of a big hit is established, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the performance is executed, so that the interest is reduced without getting bored of the player. Can be suppressed. In addition, not only when winning a big win, but also by setting specific conditions that are more likely to be established (for example, when a small hit occurs, when a predetermined number of game balls are added to the production gate, etc.), Increasing the interest can further increase interest.

  Furthermore, the effect may be executed based on game information of a plurality of gaming machines. For example, in each gaming machine belonging to the same group, the number of game balls that have passed a specific performance gate is counted, and when the total number exceeds a predetermined number, an effect execution command is sent to each gaming machine belonging to the group. You may make it transmit. Furthermore, the total number of starts of each gaming machine belonging to the same group (the number of times a game ball has been won at the starting port) may exceed a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times), or any gaming machine in the group In this case, it may be a case where a big hit does not occur even though the variable display game is executed for a specific number of times (for example, 400 times) or more, or a specific reach has appeared a predetermined number of times (for example, a highly anticipated reach). It may be the case.

  By configuring as described above, it becomes possible for each player to cooperate and execute a special performance, and it is possible not only to play a game individually but also to enjoy a game by a plurality of people. Further, it becomes possible to encourage more players to play a game at the same time, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the above configuration, it is also possible to output a command for executing a predetermined effect at a predetermined time interval or at a predetermined time from the effect management device 5300 to each gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to execute the performance periodically (on a regular basis) without using the RTC provided in the gaming machine as in the first embodiment. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform time adjustment for each gaming machine. In addition, since the timing for executing the effect only needs to be set by the effect management device 5300, the execution timing of the effect can be set more flexibly on the game hall side.

  Here, when the game is ended while the effect mode is in the indistinct mode, it may be notified to the players who are playing with the same group of gaming machines at the timing when the membership card is taken out. FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen for informing other gaming machines when a game is ended while the effect mode is in the unclear mode. As shown in FIG. 150, when a membership card is taken out in the indistinct mode with gaming machines in the same group, the next player may be seated immediately after the player leaves. Such notification may be performed after a predetermined period. In addition, this notification may be made to a gaming machine that has not generated a big hit more than a predetermined number of times. By performing such notification, it is possible to encourage the player who is going to end the game to continue the game with another gaming machine with expectation, and to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. .

  Usually, games with pachinko machines and slot machines are often played by individuals and are rarely played in cooperation with other players. Therefore, there are many cases where the player visits the amusement hall alone. On the other hand, like the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, by playing a game in cooperation with other gaming machines, it can be expected to encourage players to come in groups, and visitors to the gaming hall Can be expected to increase. At this time, a group of players may be associated with a group of gaming machines that execute a gaming state notification effect.

  In addition, as the number of players who play with grouped gaming machines (for example, the same specific model) increases, the variation of production increases, and it becomes easier to notify the gaming state (probability state) in the indistinct mode. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of games in Japan.

  Further, if a game is continued for a long time with the same model, there is a risk that the production pattern and the like may become monotonous, and the interest of the game may be reduced. On the other hand, since it is configured to be able to execute an effect by a command transmitted based on another person's game, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect at a timing when the player cannot predict, It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

(Game state notification control based on member information)
Although the case where the notification in the group is performed has been described so far, the contents of the game state notification effect may be set based on the member information acquired from the member management device. For example, based on the information (for example, the date of birth) of the player who has registered as a member, the probability of notifying the gaming state is increased, or a special effect is executed. Hereinafter, a configuration and control for executing a gaming state notification effect based on member information will be described.

[Member management device]
FIG. 151 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the member management apparatus of this embodiment. The member management apparatus 5100 is a computer that manages information on players registered as members. The member management apparatus 5100 includes a CPU 5101, ROM 5102, RAM 5103, magnetic storage device (hard disk drive, HDD) 5104, network interface (I / F) 5106, and input / output (I / O) port 5107. The CPU 5101, ROM 5102, RAM 5103, HDD 5104, network I / F 5106 and I / O port 5107 are connected by a bus.

  The CPU 5101 executes various processes by executing programs stored in the ROM 5102 or the RAM 5103. The ROM 5102 is a storage device that is prohibited from writing, and stores programs, data that does not need to be updated, and the like.

  The RAM 5103 is a storage device capable of updating the storage contents, and temporarily stores programs and data stored in the HDD 5104 and stores data necessary for the CPU 5101 to execute the programs. For example, member information 5130 is stored. The member information 5130 stores personal information and game information of members, information on the number of game media (stored balls, stored medals) deposited in the game hall without being exchanged for prizes, and the like. Details of the member information 5130 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The HDD 5104 is a non-volatile magnetic storage device that can store a large amount of data. The HDD 5104 stores the entire member information. Since the member information 5130 has a data capacity that increases with the number of members, a part of the member information is temporarily stored in the RAM 5103. For example, in order to transmit data requested by a gaming machine or the like, necessary member information 5130 is acquired from the HDD 5104, the data is processed into a format according to the request, and the response is made to the request source. Thereafter, the member information 5130 stored in the RAM 5103 is deleted, and the used storage area is released.

  The network I / F 5106 is connected to the relay apparatus 5200, the information management apparatus 5000, and the settlement apparatus 5400 via the network 5250 (FIG. 61A). After the game is over, the settlement apparatus 5400 can perform settlement such as refunding the cash inserted on the day or depositing the remaining amount in the hall by inserting a membership card (or one-day card).

  The I / O port 5107 is an interface such as a USB port, for example, and connects to the member management apparatus 5100 an input device 5110 such as a mouse or keyboard, an output device 5111 such as a display device (display), or the like. The I / O port 5107 is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) that supplies power when a power failure occurs. Member information is input via the input device 5110.

[Member information]
Next, details of the member information will be described. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of member information according to the present embodiment. The member information 5130 includes information such as a member ID 5131, a name 5132, a gender 5133, a birth date 5134, a stored ball 5135, a stored medal 5136, the number of visits 5137, a last visit date 5138, and a registration date 5139.

  The member ID 5131 is identification information for identifying a player who is a member. The name 5132, gender 5133 and date of birth 5134 are personal information of the player. In addition to these pieces of information, for example, an address, a telephone number, a mail address, etc. are registered.

  The accumulated balls 5135 and the accumulated medals 5136 are the number of game media deposited by the player in the hall. In the present embodiment, as described above, the player can deposit the game media remaining after the game is finished in the hall. In addition, with regard to the stored ball 5135 and the stored medal, it is possible to liquidate with cash if it is the day of the game, and in the case where only replay is possible before that, the number of game media that can be liquidated is kept separately. You may do it.

  The number of visits 5137 is the number of visits to the game hall after registering as a member. The last visit date 5138 is the date when the player who is a member last visited the store. The registration date 5139 is the date when member registration was performed. Based on these store visit information, the visit frequency of the player can be specified. The store visit information may hold the number of game media (amount) spent in the game. In addition, the game history for each gaming machine of the player may be included in the member information.

  In this embodiment, a privilege according to the game situation of the player is given based on the member information. For example, for a player who frequently visits the store, an effect executed during the game may be made special, or the execution frequency of the game state notification effect may be increased. Further, when a game history is held for each gaming machine, the player may be able to refer to the game history during the demonstration. Further, the effect may be executed based on the game history of the player. For example, when the gaming frequency of a gaming machine that is currently being played is high, as a privilege, a game state notification command for executing a game state notification effect or an effect execution command (effect change command) for executing a special effect is executed. The frequency of transmission may be increased. Note that the game history may not be included in the member information but may be stored in another table linked to the member information.

[Member information acquisition processing]
In the present embodiment, as described above, when a member card is inserted into the CR unit 6 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the member information is acquired in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The member information is taken into the peripheral control board 4140. Hereinafter, the process of acquiring member information will be described.

  In this embodiment, when a member card is inserted into the CR unit 6 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, member card identification information is input from the CR unit 6 to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 acquires the identification information recorded on the member card, the main control board 4100 inputs a signal (card insertion command) including the member ID to the peripheral control board 4140.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing according to the present embodiment. In the command analysis processing in this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not a card insertion command has been received (step S1110), and if a card insertion command has been received (Yes in step S1110), member information An acquisition process is executed (step S1111). The processes other than step S1110 and step S1111 are the same as the command analysis process shown in FIG.

  When the member information acquisition process is executed, the peripheral control MPU 4150a generates a member information acquisition request including the member ID included in the card insertion command and transmits the request to the member management apparatus 5100. When the member management apparatus 5100 receives the input of the member information acquisition request, the member management apparatus 5100 acquires a corresponding member information record from the HDD 5104 based on the member ID included in the member information acquisition request, and stores it as the member information 5130 in the RAM 5103. Further, the member information 5130 is transmitted to the requesting pachinko gaming machine 1 via the network I / F. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the member information, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores the received member information in a predetermined area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the aspect of the effect related to the game based on the stored member information.

  As described above, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control unit 4150) has member information acquisition means for acquiring member information based on the member identification information (member ID) input via the external information transmission / reception board 5500. It is composed.

[Game state notification processing]
Next, a procedure for executing a gaming state notification effect based on member information will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the gaming state notification process of the present embodiment. Note that the same processes as those in the flowchart shown in FIG.

  The processing up to step S1266 is the same as the flowchart shown in FIG. If the current gaming state is a probable change state (Yes in step S1266), peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not a specific condition based on member information is satisfied (step S1281). The specific condition based on the member information is, for example, whether or not the “month” on the date of playing the game is the birth month. Further, it may be whether or not the birthday “date” is the same. For example, on the day of the birthday, a special effect (for example, a gaming state notification effect) may be executed 100%, and the probability of executing the special effect as the distance from the birthday decreases. In addition, when Ladies Day is set at the game hall, the probability of executing a special effect may be increased only when the player is a woman. Furthermore, a plurality of conditions may be set for the specific condition based on the member information, and a lottery may be performed for each condition.

  If the specific condition based on the member information is satisfied (Yes in step S1281), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a special effect for notifying that the state is a certain change state (step S1282). FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of the gaming state notification effect that is executed when the specific condition of the present embodiment is satisfied. FIG. 155 shows an example in which the specific condition is the date of birth and the specific condition is satisfied in the game in the birth month.

  150 will be further described. When a specific condition based on member information is satisfied, a zombie appears instead of a single zombie as shown in FIG. 145 (A). At this time, as shown in FIG. 155, a message indicating that the production is based on the birth month may be displayed. Further, music may be switched at the timing when the screen is switched. For example, the music may be switched from up-tempo music that makes you feel a fear of zombies to uptempo music, and the zombies may dance to the music. If the specific condition is based on the date of birth, the music may be set to celebrate the birthday. By comprising in this way, it can alert | report that it is a game state advantageous to a player, giving a surprise to a player, and can raise the interest of a game.

  Moreover, when the jackpot is included in the pending start-up memory, the number of zombies that appear may be increased. In the example shown in FIG. 155, only the center zombie's face is facing the front. However, when a big hit is included in the reserved start-up memory, the face faces the front according to the type of the big hit. You may increase the number of zombies facing you. For example, in the case of jackpot A, the faces of all the zombies face the front, and the direction of the zombie's face is changed according to the player's profits that the player can obtain by the jackpot. Even if it is in a certain change state, when the big hit is not included in the held start memory, the faces of all the zombies are set to be in the horizontal direction.

  Also, a message that celebrates the birth month is displayed until the predetermined number of games is consumed, and if a start memory that is a big hit occurs during this time, the direction of the face of the zombie is changed after the predetermined number of games is consumed. May be. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game while maintaining a high expectation without letting the player know that a big hit will not occur immediately despite being in a probabilistic state. Thus, the special gaming state notification effect executed when the specific condition is satisfied can function not only as a gaming state but also as a pre-reading notice.

  By configuring as described above, in addition to notifying the game state, when a specific condition is satisfied, a privilege such as execution of a pre-reading notice is further given, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. . Thereby, it is possible to arouse the visit to the game hall based on the individual member information of the player, and the operating rate of the gaming machine in the game hall can be improved. Note that specific conditions may be set based not only on the date of birth of the player but also on the member registration date, for example.

  In addition, the establishment of the specific condition may be configured in two stages so that switching between a case where only the game state is notified and a case where the prefetch notice is performed together with the game state notification may be configured. For example, if a game is played during the week including the birthday, a pre-reading notice is given together with the game status notification, and if it is a birth month other than this (such as two weeks before and after the birthday), a pre-reading notice is executed. The probability may be lowered, or the execution mode of the prefetch notice may be unclear (for example, the type of jackpot is not specified). By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to increase the variation of the production, and it can be prevented that the production of the same pattern is repeated and the interest of the game is lowered.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the specific condition based on the member information is not satisfied (No in step S1281), peripheral control MPU 4150a performs setting for executing a normal probability change notification effect (step S1283). The normal probability change notification effect is an effect executed regardless of specific conditions such as member information, and is, for example, the effect shown in FIG.

  Note that the special gaming state notification effect described above may also be established under conditions that are not based on lottery or membership information in a probabilistic manner even when the normal probability change notification effect is executed. For example, the lottery probability may be increased on a weather day (for example, a rainy day) with relatively few visitors or an amusement day (for example, the opening of the store). With such a configuration, it is possible to expect to attract customers on days when there are few players, and it is possible to give a privilege to the players on a special day for the game hall. Even for the player, an unusual performance can be executed and an interesting game can be expected, which can be a motivation to visit the amusement hall.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is not a probable change state (No in step S1266), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets an effect for notifying that the normal gaming state is set (step S1269). The reason why the special effect is not executed in the effect for notifying the normal gaming state is to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by making the player have excessive expectations. The subsequent processing is the same as the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the execution timing of the gaming state notification effect (for example, the upper limit number of times of execution of the game in the unclear mode) is defined in advance, based on information acquired from outside the gaming machine as in this embodiment. By executing the notification effect, the execution timing of the gaming state notification effect is changed, and the configuration of the peripheral control board 4140, the external information transmission / reception board 5500, and the like serves as state notification effect timing changing means.

(Effect of 2nd Embodiment)
As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the content of the presentation by communicating with the outside of the gaming machine (other gaming machines, the information management device 5000, the production management device 5300, and the member management device 5100). . As a result, information stored in the information management device 5000, the production management device 5300, and the member management device 5100 can be used effectively. As described above, other players' games, information for each player, etc. It is possible to execute the associated effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute more varied effects and enhance the interest of the game.

  Note that the effect management device 5300 may be provided in a gaming machine, and the effect management device 5300 may be connected to another gaming machine via a signal line. That is, each gaming machine generates game information based on information acquired from the information management device 5000 or the member management device 5100, and transmits it to the outside (other gaming machines). Then, the gaming machine that has received the gaming information may generate effect information such as a gaming state notification command and an effect execution command based on the gaming information and transmit it to the gaming machines in the group. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately install the production management device 5300 in the game hall, and the installation cost and the management cost can be reduced. At this time, it is not necessary for each gaming machine to have all the functions of the effect management device 5300. For example, the game information transmission function and the effect information reception function are implemented in all the gaming machines in the group, while the function of generating effect information such as a game state notification command and an effect execution command, and an effect information transmission destination ( The function of selecting (gaming machine) may be implemented in some gaming machines. Therefore, when a new gaming machine is introduced, one gaming machine having a management function for generating the production information and selecting a transmission destination of the production information and a gaming machine having a function for transmitting the gaming information and receiving the production information are required. It is sufficient to install as much as possible, and the introduction cost can be suppressed. Note that a function corresponding to the effect management device 5300 may be mounted on the peripheral control board 4140.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to dynamically perform an effect according to the gaming state, it is possible to execute an effect that gives a surprise that is difficult to anticipate for the player, and the content of the effect is monotonous Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating. Further, even when the performance according to the game state is dynamically performed, it is not necessary to make any special settings in the game hall, and the burden on the game hall can be minimized. In addition, since the timing for executing the production and the setting of the conditions can be changed, the content of the production can be flexibly changed on the game hall side.

(Third embodiment)
By the way, in the indistinct mode that does not clearly notify the game state, the player has a sense of expectation that the current game state may be a game state advantageous to the player (advantageous game state, here, a probable change state). It is provided for. However, if the indistinct mode period is long, the player's sense of expectation cannot be maintained, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, a third embodiment of the present invention discloses a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in interest of a game with reference to FIGS. 156 to 172. Note that the gaming machine of this embodiment is based on the gaming machine in the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, a configuration unique to the present embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is not clear (in the unclear mode), the current gaming state is notified based on the starting memory (holding number, random number information) stored in the starting memory area. A privilege is given.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a performs the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the second start hold storage process (step S203) of the first / second start opening winning process (see FIG. 86). In a command transmission process (step S17) of a timer interruption process (see FIG. 84), a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has been won at the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c is set. The winning notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with a preceding determination command (result of the preceding determination process) indicating various data (such as a jackpot determining random number, a jackpot design random number) acquired upon the winning. Features.

  Hereinafter, processing unique to this embodiment executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 156 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing according to the third embodiment. The same processes as those in the command analysis process (FIG. 99) of the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the received command (step S1102), and then determines whether or not the received command is a winning notification command (step S2001). If the received command is a winning notification command (Yes in step S2001), the pending number counter provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is updated by 1 (step S2002). The holding number counter is provided with a first holding number counter and a second holding number counter corresponding to the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c. The counter is updated. The values of the first reserved number counter and the second reserved number counter become the same value in conjunction with the number of random numbers stored in the special symbol random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (see FIG. 94) of the main control MPU 4100a. Note that when the number-of-holds information is included in the winning notification command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a, the number-of-holds information may be stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a hold display command setting process for setting a hold display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the winning notification command (step S2003). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  The hold display command thus set is transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in the information output process (step S1500) of the 16 ms steady process (see FIG. 98) described above. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 updates the current number of holds quickly, for example, by turning on the hold display in the liquid crystal display device 1400, and notifies the player so that the player can correctly recognize the winning at the start port. Yes.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a winning notification command (No in step S2001), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the processing from step S1103 onward.

[Unclear mode setting process]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the indistinct mode setting process according to the present embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the above-described obscuration mode setting process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  If the result of the current variable display game is not “big hit” (No in step S1251), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the result of the variable display game is “small hit in the second effect mode”. Is determined (step S2011). If the result of the variable display game is not “small hit in the second effect mode” (No in step S2011), the process ends.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the ambiguity mode flag when the result of the current variable display game is “small hit in the second effect mode” (Yes in step S2011) (step S2012). After setting the game state unclear effect after the small hit game (step S2013), the process is terminated. The game state ambiguity effect after the small hit game is an effect or the like that displays after entering the obscuration mode in which the game state is not notified on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  As described above, the present embodiment is characterized in that the gaming state is not clearly notified in the game after the small hit game even in the small hit in the second effect mode. As described above, in the first effect mode, when the small hit game is executed, the player is prevented from being aware that the game machine 1 is equipped with “small hit”. On the other hand, in the second production mode, “small hit” is treated as one of the winning opportunities for winning a prize ball, and the player receives a prize ball not only for “big hit” but also for “small hit”. I try to make them aware of what can be done.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an opportunity to enter the indistinct mode after the small hit game is given to the “small hit in the second effect mode”. As a result, the player has the expectation (the illusion) that he / she has won the “big hit”, which is given an opportunity to win a prize ball equivalent to the small win (opening mode of the big prize opening 2003), and has not shifted to a probable state. It is possible to make it disappear.

[Game state notification processing]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of the gaming state notification process of the present embodiment.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the indistinct mode flag is set (step S2021). In the present embodiment, as described above, the result of the variable display game is any one of “big hit B” to “big hit E” and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won, or When the result is “small hit” in the second performance mode, the game mode after the big hit game or the small hit game is set to an unclear mode that does not clearly indicate the game state (big hit probability state). If the indistinct mode flag is not set (No in step S2021), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the indistinct mode flag is set (Yes in step S2021), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the pending number counter in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S2022), and the value of the read pending number counter is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value has been reached (step S2023). If the value of the hold count counter has not reached the upper limit value (No in step S2023), this process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the holding upper limit value (4) is set for each of the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c, but the holding number counter of either starting port may be read. In the winning to the second starting port 2005c, the movable piece 2005b must be in an open state, and since it is preferentially digested from the starting memory by winning to the second starting port 2005c, it is more than the second starting port 2005c. The holding number counter of the first starting port 2001 having a high frequency of reaching the holding upper limit value may be the target, and when the time reduction function is operating, the holding number counter of the second starting port 2005c may be the target.

  In addition, some gaming machines digest start memories in the order of winning to the first starting port and the second starting port, and those having a distribution device that can distribute winnings to the first starting port and the second starting port. is there. In such a gaming machine, the total value of both of the number-of-holds counters may be targeted without being limited to either the number-of-holds counter of either the first start port or the second start port.

  Next, when the value of the hold count counter reaches the upper limit value (Yes in step S2023), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a privilege determination process for determining a privilege to be given to the player (step S2024). In the privilege determination process, the privilege allocation table of FIG. 159 is used, and any of privilege numbers “0”, “1”, and “2” is selected according to the winning information in the start memory (fourth hold) when the hold upper limit is reached. To decide. Details of the privilege distribution table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a branches the process according to the determined privilege number (step S2025).

  When the privilege number is “0”, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the setting of one-shot clear notification that clearly notifies the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) (step S2026). Thereafter, the indistinct mode flag is reset (step S2027), and this process is terminated.

  When the privilege number is “1”, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a clear notification lottery process for performing a lottery as to whether or not to clearly notify the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) ( Step S2028). In the clear notification lottery process, the lottery is executed based on the winning probability set differently for each winning information in the privilege distribution table (FIG. 159). And the setting of the lottery effect in a clear alert | report lottery process is performed (step S2029).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not a clear notification lottery has been won (step S2030). When the lottery is won (Yes in Step S2030), the clear notification setting for clearly informing the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) is executed (Step S2031). Thereafter, the indistinct mode flag is reset (step S2032), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a is lost in the lottery (No in step S2030), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the setting of the retry effect for urging to accumulate the start-up memory in order to acquire the privilege again (step S2034). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  When the privilege number is “2”, the peripheral control MPU 4150a increases the execution probability of clear notification that clearly notifies the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) (step S2033). Specifically, the privilege distribution table used in the above-described privilege determination process (step S2024) is switched from table A to table B (see FIG. 159) so that the privilege number “2” is not given next time. . And the setting of the retry production which urges to accumulate the start-up memory in order to acquire the privilege again is executed (step S2034). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

[Bonus distribution table]
FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example of a privilege distribution table according to the present embodiment. The privilege distribution table is used in the privilege determination process (step S2024) of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 158) described above.

  In the privilege distribution table of the present embodiment, the distribution ratios of privilege numbers “0” to “2” are set according to the winning storage winning information (distribution information) when the hold upper limit value is reached. Table A and table B having different rates are provided. Normally, table A is used.

  In the privilege distribution table A, specifically, when the winning information is “big hit”, the privilege number “0” is selected at the allocation rate of 30%, and the privilege number “1” is allocated at the allocation rate of 50%. Is selected, and the privilege number “2” is selected at a distribution rate of 20%. When the privilege number “1” is selected, the winning probability in the clear notification lottery process (step S2028) is set to 70%.

  In addition, when the winning information is “small hit”, the privilege number “0” is selected at the allocation rate of 45%, the privilege number “1” is selected at the allocation rate of 50%, and 5% The privilege number “2” is selected based on the distribution rate. When the privilege number “1” is selected, the winning probability in the clear notification lottery process (step S2028) is set to 80%.

  When the winning information is “losing”, the privilege number “0” is selected at the 50% allocation rate, the privilege number “1” is selected at the 50% allocation rate, and the privilege number “2” is selected. Is not selected. When the privilege number “1” is selected, the winning probability in the clear notification lottery process (step S2028) is set to 90%.

  In this way, when the winning information is “losing” that discourages the player, a clear notification or clear notification lottery is always performed, and the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) with high probability. Is clearly notified. The higher the probability of occurrence and the more disadvantageous the player is, the higher the probability that the clear notification will be selected and the probability of winning the clear notification lottery will be set high, so that even if the privilege grant conditions are met, the clear notification of the essential The state that is not achieved is prevented from being repeated, and the original purpose (notification of the gaming state due to establishment of the privilege grant condition) is achieved.

  In the present embodiment, when the starting memory count reaches the holding upper limit value, some privilege related to clear notification of the gaming state is always granted, so the player who established the privilege granting condition is not discouraged, A highly reliable privilege providing effect can be provided. Further, as long as the starting memory number is less than the holding upper limit value, no privilege related to clear notification of the gaming state is given.

  In the present embodiment, the winning information of the start-up memory when the privilege granting condition is satisfied (when the holding upper limit value is reached) is given as the distribution information, but is not limited thereto. Depending on whether or not there is a start memory that includes winning information for “big hit” in all pending start memories, the allocation number of the privilege number may be set, or a uniform distribution regardless of the information in the start memory A fraction may be set.

  The privilege distribution table B is used in place of the table A in the next privilege determination process when the privilege number “2” is selected in the privilege determination process (step S2024) of the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 158). It is a privilege distribution table. Here, switching to the privilege distribution table B is performed only once for the next privilege determination process, and thereafter, the privilege distribution table A is restored again.

  In the privilege distribution table B, specifically, when the winning information is “big hit”, the privilege number “0” is selected at the allocation rate of 50%, and the privilege number “1” at the allocation rate of 50%. Is selected, and the privilege number “2” is not selected. When the privilege number “1” is selected, the winning probability in the clear notification lottery process (step S2028) is set to 90%.

  In addition, when the winning information is “small hit” or “losing”, the privilege number “0” is selected at the allocation rate of 50%, and the privilege number “1” is selected at the allocation rate of 50%. The privilege number “2” is not selected. When the privilege number “1” is selected, the winning probability in the clear notification lottery process (step S2028) is set to 100%.

  In this way, if the player has failed to acquire any of the benefits of the one-shot clear notification and clear notification lottery despite having accumulated the start-up memory up to the hold upper limit value, one of the following must be acquired next. By being able to do so, it is possible to improve the game characteristics in granting the privilege and enhance the interest of the game without departing from the original purpose of granting the privilege.

  Further, since the privilege distribution table B is valid only in the privilege determination process immediately after the privilege number “2” is given in the above-described privilege determination process (step S2024), the privilege distribution table A is newly generated when the ambiguity mode occurs. Is used. By limiting the benefit effect of privilege number “2” to once in this way, privilege numbers “0” to “2” may be selected every time the indistinct mode occurs, and a two-stage effect (retry effect) Since there is also a great possibility of clear notification), privilege provision is not made monotonous. Therefore, the game nature in privilege provision can be improved and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the privilege distribution table B is used once, but the privilege distribution table B may be used continuously after switching. For example, if the privilege distribution table B is used as long as the same player continues to play the game, the game state is clearly notified with high probability even when a new ambiguity mode occurs. Since the benefit effect of the privilege number “2” acquired once also affects the subsequent game, the privilege value of the privilege number “2” can be increased and the player can be encouraged to continue the game.

[Screen transition example]
Next, FIGS. 160 to 162 are diagrams showing an example of effects related to the gaming state notification of the present embodiment. An example of screen transition on the screen 1410 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 162.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (A), when the result of the variable display game is a big open big hit, the corresponding decorative symbol 1412 (“555”) is displayed on the screen 1410 of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the big hit is made. Is notified. Here, it is assumed that the ambiguity mode lottery is won in the ambiguity mode setting process (FIG. 157) of the decorative symbol variation start process for the variation display game.

  When the unclear mode lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 160 (B), on the end screen of the last round (9R) of the big hit game, it is not clearly notified whether the game state after the big hit game is a high probability state or a normal probability state. It is notified that the ambiguity mode is entered. In the game state ambiguity here, a plurality of clouds are displayed on the background of the decorative symbol.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 160 (C), on the screen 1410 after the big hit game is finished, a message (“probability change? ) Is displayed. At this time, a message “pick up hold” is displayed near the hold display area 1409 at the bottom of the screen, suggesting that something will happen if the player holds the hold. Note that the display related to the obscured mode in FIGS. 160B and 160C is set by the process in step S1256 of the obscured mode setting process (FIG. 157).

  Then, when the number of pending displays corresponding to the start memory of the first start port 2001 reaches the upper limit of 4, based on the privilege distribution table A in the privilege determination process (step S2024) of the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 158). The privilege number to be given is determined. Here, it is assumed that the privilege number is “0” and one clear notification is set (step S2026).

  At this time, on the screen 1410, as shown in FIG. 161 (A), the effect that the lightning runs is displayed on the fourth hold display that becomes the trigger for executing the privilege determination process (establishment of the privilege granting condition), and the next moment 161 (B1) or (B2), the current gaming state (probability state) is clearly notified. FIG. 161 (B1) is a screen for informing that the probability change is in progress (high probability state), and a zombie appears when the background cloud disappears. FIG. 161 (B2) is a screen for informing the normal state, and nothing appears even when the background cloud disappears.

  If the privilege number is “2”, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), the lightning runs on the fourth hold display that is the trigger for executing the privilege determination process (establishment of the privilege granting condition). However, on the next screen 1410, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), the current gaming state (probability state) is not clearly notified, and it is urged to reserve again. The re-try effect is displayed. In this case, in the next privilege determination process, clear notification is performed with a probability of almost 100%, so that a zombie that appears behind the background cloud is displayed on the screen 1410 as a retry effect.

  During this time, the pending start-up memory is sequentially digested and the hold display number is once subtracted from the upper limit value, but in the privilege determination process (step S2024) performed at the timing when the upper limit value is reached again, the privilege distribution table Is switched from the table A to the table B (step S2033), the clear notification is performed with a probability of almost 100%. After the retry effect, if the number of held displays reaches the upper limit again and the one-time clear notification is set based on the privilege distribution table B, the probability is not set as shown in FIG. 162 (C). The state (here, the probability change is in progress) is notified. At this time, on the screen 1410, an effect is produced in which a zombie appears when the background cloud disappears.

(Effect of the third embodiment)
As described above, in this embodiment, when the game state is not clearly notified and the game continues (unclear mode), the hold number counter (hold storage number) has reached the upper limit value. Is established as a privilege granting condition, and a privilege related to notification of the current gaming state is granted based on the establishment of the privilege granting condition. Specifically, in the privilege determination process (step S2024) of FIG. 158 described above, one-time clear notification (privilege number “0”), clear notification lottery (privilege number “1”) whether or not to perform clear notification, One of the improvements in the clear notification execution probability (privilege number “2”) is determined as the privilege. Then, in the gaming state notification process (FIG. 158), notification effect setting (step S2026, step S2031, step S2034) corresponding to the determined privilege is executed.

  Originally, the indistinct mode was provided in order to give the player a sense of expectation that the game state is advantageous for the player (advantageous game state). There was a possibility that the adverse effect of lowering the interest of the game could not be maintained and the adverse effect was brought about. In addition, there are cases in which the lottery for switching the effect mode is executed by internal control for each winning game ball, and the expectation level for the advantageous game state is expressed by switching the effect mode in the game state. As a result, it is difficult to induce the player to participate in the lottery and the game is not very interesting. Furthermore, in the case where the player guesses the gaming state from the effect mode after switching, the grasping of the gaming state largely depends on the skill level of the player, which is difficult for an unskilled player. For these reasons, there was a concern that the interest of the game in the unclear mode could not be maintained.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved memories is used as an index for deciding the timing for ending the indistinct mode, that is, the game state clearly, and reaching the upper limit of the number of reserved memories is set as the privilege granting condition. .

  In the present embodiment, the end timing of the indistinct mode (game state notification) is determined using the number of reserved memory in the start memory that can occur only when the player has a game intention. Therefore, the timing is different for each player. Furthermore, the timing varies depending on the player's degree of willingness to play. In this way, the end timing of the indistinct mode changes according to the situation at that time, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, the player launches a game ball so as to accumulate (generate) the start-up memory in order to grasp the current game state. Since the privilege related to the game state notification can be acquired by the player's own action, the player's willingness to participate (participation consciousness) can be increased, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. In addition, the player who wants to know the game state tries to accumulate the start-up memory quickly up to the upper limit value. In this way, by increasing the player's willingness to play the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine, which is caused by a decrease in the interest of the game due to the prolonged indistinct mode.

  In addition, a player who does not want to grasp the current game state (want to keep a sense of expectation) launches a game ball so as not to accumulate the starting memory up to the upper limit value. Thereby, the player can fully enjoy the game in the unclear mode. Since it is possible to acquire a privilege that the gaming state notification is not performed by the player's own action, he is dissatisfied with the gaming state being automatically notified by the internal control of the gaming machine so far. The player's willingness to play (participation consciousness) can be increased, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. In this way, it is possible to guide the player who has been the cause of the interruption of the game when the gaming state becomes clear, so that the gaming machine's interest has been reduced due to the unintentional termination of the unclear mode. It is possible to suppress a decrease in operating rate.

  In this embodiment, as long as the starting memory number is less than the holding upper limit value, no privilege related to clear notification of the gaming state is given, and when the starting memory number reaches the holding upper limit value, the gaming state clear notification is performed. Since a certain benefit is always given, it is possible to play a game in a state desired by the player by changing a method of launching the game ball according to whether or not the player wants to grasp the game state. Since it is possible to provide a game based on the intentions of both a player who wants to grasp the current game state and a player who does not want to grasp the current game state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest of the game.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved memories is used as an index, and the upper limit of the number of reserved memories is reached as a privilege granting condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information based on the start memory stored in the start memory area is used. It may be an indicator. For example, the specific change pattern information contained in the startup memory may be set as the specific provision condition.

  Moreover, the privilege (privilege number) determined with establishment of privilege provision conditions differs in the distribution rate according to distribution information. Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution information indicates the start memory when the upper limit is reached, that is, the winning information of the start memory that is generated when the privilege granting condition is established. At this time, the clear notification execution probability (single clear notification selection rate, clear notification lottery selection rate and lottery winning rate) is set higher as the winning information is more disadvantageous to the player. Thereby, it is prevented that the state where the clear notification is not executed even if the privilege granting condition is established is repeated, and the original purpose (notification of the gaming state due to the fulfillment of the privilege granting condition) is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to balance the diversification of the benefits related to the notification of the game state and the execution of the notification, and to suppress the lowering of interest in the game.

  In addition, when the privilege (privilege number) determined in accordance with the establishment of the privilege granting condition is an improvement in the clear notification execution probability (privilege number “2”) or the clear notification lottery (privilege number “1”). In the case of a loss, it is not possible to obtain a clear notification at a privilege granting opportunity even though the start-up memory has been accumulated up to the upper limit value. During this time, the starting memory accumulated up to the upper limit value is digested sequentially, so it is highly possible that the starting memory number is once subtracted from the upper limit value. So it doesn't burden the player. And since the execution probability of a clear alert | report is set high in the privilege provision opportunity when it reaches | attains an upper limit again, the game property in privilege provision can be improved, without deviating from the original purpose of privilege provision.

  In addition, even if the start memory is accumulated up to the upper limit value, when the clear notification cannot be obtained at the privilege granting opportunity, the execution of the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 158) is prohibited for a predetermined period thereafter. It may be. Since the prohibition is canceled when the starting memory number is subtracted to some extent and reaches a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the player has a period in which subtraction is required in addition to the addition of the starting memory number. The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the distribution information includes the winning information of the start-up memory that has established the privilege granting condition (when the hold upper limit value is reached), but is not limited thereto. It may be the number of start memories that include specific winning information (eg, “big hit”) in all pending start memories.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the above-described third embodiment, when the game state is an unclear mode, the privilege for informing the current game state based on the start memory (holding number, random number information) stored in the start memory area Is granted. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, when the game state is an unclear mode, a privilege related to the notification of the current game state is given based on the number of times of pre-reading effects in the unclear mode. Is done.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 172. Note that the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is based on the gaming machine of the third embodiment described above. In the following, the configuration unique to the fourth embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the present embodiment as well, the main control MPU 4100a, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2005c occurs, similarly to the third embodiment, the winning control command and the winning notification command. A prior determination command indicating various data (random number for jackpot determination, random number for jackpot symbol, etc.) acquired at an opportunity is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

[Characteristics of big hit and small hit]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the big hit and small hit characteristics in the fourth embodiment. In the present embodiment, a big hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is operated with the same operation mode (or an approximation) as the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2006 when the small opening per game (small hit game) corresponding to the winning of the small hit is performed. It is characterized by having a big hit F that becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (A), in this embodiment, not only “big hit A” to “big hit E” but also “big hit F” are prepared as types of hits (big hits) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The characteristics of “big hit A” to “big hit E” are the same as those in the first embodiment (FIG. 95), and the selection ratio of “big hit D” and “big hit E” is changed from “18%” to “12%”. It is only a change and will not be described.

  In the case of winning the “hit F”, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a normal gaming state or a highly probable gaming state, after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot F is performed, The short-time function (open extension function) is not activated, and is controlled to a highly probable gaming state (probability varying external disadvantage gaming state) in which only the probability variation function is activated. In addition, when the winning game state is the short-time game state, after the big hit game of the big hit F, the game state continues the operation of the short-time function (open extension function) as it is, the probability variation function also operates. Controlled to an external advantageous gaming state. The characteristic of the function given by winning the “big hit F” is the same as the above “big hit C”.

  In the big hit game corresponding to “big hit F”, the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated a small number of times (in this embodiment, twice) in a short time opening / closing pattern. That is, a game similar to the above-described game per small opening (small game) is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 163B, the “small hit” characteristic will be described. The “small hit” characteristic is the same as the “small hit” characteristic in the first to third embodiments of the present invention. As described above, the gaming state does not change when the small win is won.

  In the present embodiment, “big hit F” and “small hit” are determined from the provided effects and the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006 depending on whether the big hit type is “big hit F” or “small hit”. It is set so that it cannot be distinguished.

  Therefore, when the result of the big hit lottery is “big hit F” or “small hit”, the winning clarification effect that clearly indicates the result of the big win lottery is not performed as in the extended production pattern of the first embodiment, In this case, it will be unclear whether or not the winner of the jackpot lottery is won. The winning ambiguity effect is, for example, an effect in which a battle between a specific character and an enemy character ends in an unsettled state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Also, when the result of the big hit lottery is “big hit F”, the big hit game (opening the big winning opening 2003) in the second closing control period (see FIG. 104 (a)) in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit. Is done.

  Further, the challenge bonus performance pattern of the first embodiment differs depending on the open mode (small open, medium open, large open) of the big prize opening 2003, and the result of the big hit lottery is “big hit F” and “small hit” ”, The same game per small opening will be played, so if the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n within the first closed control period, there is a difference between“ big hit F ”and“ small hit ” There is no. If the result of the big hit lottery is “hit F” and the game ball does not pass through the effective gate 6010n within the first closing control period, the first closing is performed as in the case of “small hit”. When the control period ends, the game per small opening may be started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed to the valid gate 6010n.

  When the big hit type is “big hit F”, the selection rate of each variation number in the big hit variation pattern table may be set to be the same as the selection rate of each variation number in the small hit variation pattern table.

  Next, processing unique to this embodiment executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

[16ms steady processing]
FIG. 164 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process according to the present embodiment. The same processes as those in the 16 ms steady process (FIG. 98) of the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs a prefetch effect setting process (step S2060) after performing the effect control process (step S1200) as the control related to the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Details of the prefetch effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a gaming state notification process that performs notification control of the gaming state according to the number of executions of the prefetch effect (step S1250), and executes the processes after step S1300. Details of the gaming state notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Unclear mode setting process]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the indistinct mode setting process according to the present embodiment. The same process as the unclear mode setting process (FIG. 157) of the third embodiment described above is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted.

  When the result of the current variable display game is “big hit” (Yes in step S1251), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the big hit type is “big hit F” (step S2051). If the big hit type is not “big hit F” (No in step S2051), the process ends.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the big hit type is “hit F” (Yes in step S2051), a process for making the game state after the big hit game not clearly notified (step S1255). And after executing step S1256), the present process is terminated.

  Further, when the result of the current variable display game is “big hit” (No in step S1251), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the result of the variable display game is “small hit”. (Step S2052). If the result of the variable display game is not “small hit” (No in step S2052), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display game is “small hit” (Yes in step S2052), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets an unclear mode in which the game state after the small hit game is not clearly notified. After executing the process (step S2012 and step S2013), this process ends.

  As described above, the present embodiment is characterized in that the game state is not clearly notified when the result of the variable display game is “big hit F” or “small hit”.

  In the process of step S2051, “big hit B” to “big hit E” may be targeted as in the third embodiment. “Big hit B” to “Big hit E” may be shifted to the obscured mode with a predetermined probability, or may be shifted to the obscured mode only when the operating state of the time-shortening function does not change. .

[Pre-reading effect setting process]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch effect setting process according to the present embodiment. The prefetch effect setting process (preliminary notification means) is executed in the 16 ms steady process (FIG. 164) described above. The prior notification means is a means capable of notifying the lottery game result information before a lottery game (variable display game) that can shift the game state to the advantageous game state (probability change state) based on the start memory is executed. is there.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not a preceding determination command has been received from the main control MPU 4100a (step S2061). If the preceding determination command has not been received (No in step S2061), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the preceding determination command (Yes in step S2061), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the unclear mode flag is set (step S2062).

  Then, if the ambiguity mode flag is not set (No in step S2062), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the hold display mode determination table A (FIG. 167) (step S2063). If the unclear mode flag is set (Yes in step S2062), the hold display mode determination table B (FIG. 167) is set (step S2064). Details of the hold display mode determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines the hold display mode according to the table set in the process of step S2063 or step S2064 (step S2065). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the hold display mode and whether the unclear mode flag is set (step S2066).

  Here, the start-up memory that is on hold in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is normally displayed on hold in white. As a result of the process of step S2065 of this process, it is assumed that the pre-reading effect of the hold display is executed when the start-up memory is hold-displayed in another display color.

  If there is no change in the hold display mode or the indistinct mode flag is not set (No in step S2066), the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the pre-read display with the normal display as the hold display of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Since there is not, this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4150a, when there is a change in the hold display mode and the indistinct mode flag is set (Yes in step S2066), the hold display of liquid crystal display device 1400 performs pre-read display. The prefetch execution counter is updated by 1 (step S2067). The prefetch execution counter is provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

[Pending display mode determination table]
FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example of the hold display mode determination table of the present embodiment. The hold display mode determination table is set in the process of step S2063 or step S2064 of the above-described prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 166).

  The hold display mode determination table according to the present embodiment holds hold display according to pre-read information determined before the start memory is digested based on the target start memory advance determination command (winning lottery win, variation pattern, etc.). The selection rates of the modes “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are set. The hold display mode indicates that the degree of expectation (reliability) of “big hit” is high in the order of “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red”. A table A and a table B having different selection rates are provided.

  In the hold display mode determination table A, specifically, when the winning information is “big hit”, the prefetch effect of the hold display is performed with a probability of 70% or more. In the case of “big hit A”, a pre-reading effect (change of hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 100%, and at this time “red” is selected with a probability of 50% and “green” with a probability of 30%. And “blue” is selected with a probability of 20%. In the case of “big hit B” to “big hit E”, a prefetch effect (change of hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 90%, and at this time “red” is selected with a probability of 25% and 35% “Green” is selected with probability, and “blue” is selected with 30% probability. In the case of “big hit F”, a pre-reading effect (change of the hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 70%. At this time, “red” is selected with a probability of 10%, and “ “Green” is selected, and “Blue” is selected with a probability of 35%.

  In addition, when the winning information is “small hit”, a pre-reading effect (change of hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 40%, and at this time “green” is selected with a probability of 15%, and 25% “Blue” is selected with probability. “Red” with high read-ahead reliability is not selected.

  When the winning information is “losing”, the prefetch display execution rate is set to be different depending on the variation pattern (with reach, without reach). When the variation pattern is “with reach”, a pre-reading effect (change of hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 30%, and at this time “green” is selected with a probability of 10%, and with a probability of 20%. “Blue” is selected. “Red” with high read-ahead reliability is not selected. When the variation pattern is “no reach”, a pre-reading effect (change of the hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 10%, and “blue” is selected with a probability of 10%. “Red” and “green” having high read-ahead reliability are not selected.

  As described above, the start display hold display that is advantageous to the player is set to have a higher probability that a pre-reading effect will be performed and a higher probability of selecting a hold display mode with high reliability. .

  Next, the hold display mode determination table B is the same as the table A when the winning information is “big hit”. In addition, when the winning information is “small hit”, a pre-reading effect (change of the hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 40%, and at this time “red” is selected with a probability of 10%, and 50% “Green” is selected with probability, and “blue” is selected with 30% probability.

  When the winning information is “losing”, the prefetch display execution rate is set to be different depending on the variation pattern (with reach, without reach). When the variation pattern is “with reach”, a pre-reading effect (change of the hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 80%. At this time, “red” is selected with a probability of 10%, and with a probability of 30%. “Green” is selected, and “blue” is selected with a probability of 40%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is “no reach”, a pre-reading effect (change of the hold display mode) is performed with a probability of 30%, and at this time “red” is selected with a probability of 5% and 10% “Green” is selected with probability, and “blue” is selected with 15% probability.

  As described above, the hold display mode determination table B used for the hold display generated during the indistinct mode provides a pre-reading effect when the small hit and the loss occur compared to the normally used hold display mode determination table A. All the prefetch effect display modes (“red”, “green”, and “blue”) are set to be selectable.

  Therefore, the processing in steps S2063 and S2065 for selecting one mode from a plurality of modes using the hold display mode determination table A in the above-described prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 166) is the notification mode selection means, the hold display mode determination table. The process of step S2064 for setting the hold display mode determination table B instead of A can be positioned as a probability changing unit. In addition, the processing of step S2064 includes execution rate changing means for changing the probability that prefetching effects are performed as compared with the hold display mode determination table A, and a hold display mode with a higher expectation than the hold display mode determination table A. And a mode selection probability changing means for changing the probability of selection. In the present embodiment, a hold display mode determination table B in which the execution rate change unit and the mode selection probability change unit are executed in advance is prepared from the hold display mode determination table A, and the table is switched in the process of step S2064. However, you may make it perform at least one of an execution rate change means and an aspect selection probability change means with respect to the pending | holding display aspect determination table A based on predetermined conditions (for example, winning information). In the process of step S2064, it is only necessary to set a table that is different from the on-hold display mode determination table A in at least one of the pre-reading effect execution rate and the selection probability of the pre-read mode (set higher than the table A).

  As a result, even if the gaming state (whether or not it is a high probability state) is unknown, the hold display that occurs during this time has a high pre-reading display execution rate, so it is possible to continue the player's sense of expectation. Yes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests.

[Game state notification processing]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the gaming state notification process according to the present embodiment. The same processing as the gaming state notification processing (FIG. 158) of the third embodiment described above is denoted by the same reference numeral, and description thereof is omitted. The gaming state notification process is executed in the aforementioned 16 ms steady process (FIG. 164).

  If the indistinct mode flag is set (Yes in step S2021), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the prefetch execution counter of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S2071), and the read prefetch execution counter value is a predetermined value ( Here, it is determined whether or not 7) has been reached (step S2072). If the value of the prefetch execution counter has not reached the predetermined value (No in step S2072), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the prefetch execution counter reaches a predetermined value (Yes in step S2072), the peripheral control MPU 4150a proceeds to the processing of step S2024 to step S2034, determines the privilege to be granted, and sets the effect. Execute.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes clear notification setting (step S2026, step S2031) to clearly notify the gaming state, the peripheral control MPU 4150a resets the prefetch execution counter (step S2073, step S2074), and ends this processing.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the setting of the retry operation that prompts the user to increase the number of times of prefetching for privilege acquisition again instead of clear notification (step S2034), the peripheral control MPU 4150a decrements the prefetching execution counter that has reached the upper limit by three. (Step S2075), and this process is terminated.

[Screen transition example]
Next, FIGS. 169 to 172 are diagrams illustrating an example of effects related to the gaming state notification of the present embodiment. An example of screen transition on the screen 1410 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 172.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (A), when the result of the variable display game is “big hit F”, the corresponding decorative symbol 1412 (“357”) is displayed on the screen 1410 of the liquid crystal display device 1400. “F” is not notified. The screen display here is the same as the case where the result of the variable display game is “small hit”. Here, the obscuration mode is set in the process of step S1255 of the obscuration mode setting process (FIG. 165) of the decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 101) for the variation display game.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 169 (B), on the screen 1410, a winning ambiguity effect (for example, an effect in which the battle is not determined) in which it is unknown whether or not the result of the variable display game is a big hit is performed. When the message “Which !?” is displayed, the screen is covered with clouds and the camera enters the indistinct mode. Here, in the process of step S1256 of the ambiguity mode setting process (FIG. 165), a winning ambiguity effect (game state ambiguity effect) is set.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (C), on the screen 1410 after the game per small opening, a pre-reading gauge in which points are charged from the lower side to the upper side is displayed on the right side of the screen. At the top of the look-ahead gauge, a message “Probability? Normal? Tell me!” Is displayed, prompting the player to charge points for the look-ahead gauge. Note that the display (clouds, messages, prefetch gauge) in the obscured mode in FIGS. 169 (B) and 169 (C) is set in the process of step S1256 of the obscured mode setting process (FIG. 165).

  As shown in FIG. 169 (C), if the hold display newly displayed in the first hold display area 1409a during the unclear mode is the pre-read display mode, one point of the pre-read gauge is charged. The display mode of the hold display and the charge of the prefetch gauge are set based on the processes of steps S2065 and S2067 of the prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 166) described above, respectively.

  Subsequently, when the number of executions of the pre-reading effect in the unclear mode reaches 7 (the pre-reading gauge is full), the privilege distribution table A in the privilege determination process (step S2024) of the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 168). A privilege number is determined based on the above. Here, it is assumed that the privilege number is “1”, the lottery effect for winning the clear notification lottery is set, and the clear notification for notifying the probability change state is set (step S2028 → step S2029 → step S2030). Yes → Step S2031).

  At this time, on the screen 1410, as shown in FIG. 170 (A), the message at the upper end of the prefetch gauge is changed to “achieve!”, And a lightning bolt image is displayed as a mark on the hold display that is the target of the seventh prefetch effect. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 170 (B), a message “Lottery! Do you know !?” is displayed at the upper end of the pre-reading gauge, and it is determined whether or not to notify the gaming state until the target hold is exhausted. A clear notification lottery determined by lottery is performed. At this time, as a lottery effect, the zombies are displayed behind the clouds in the background of the screen so that they are hidden and displayed, and the user is interested in the clear notification lottery. In addition, if a battle game or the like in which a player can participate as a lottery effect is performed, participation in the game is also a privilege for the player as well as a chance to acquire a clear notification opportunity, so that the satisfaction with more benefits can be obtained. Can be given to a person.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (C), the gaming state (in this case, the probability variation state) is notified at the timing when the subject hold is consumed and the corresponding variable display game is started. On the screen 1410, the message area at the upper end of the pre-reading gauge is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen, and a message “Changing! Hit it!” Is displayed, and the cloud disappears and a zombie appears.

  The clear notification of the gaming state may be performed at the timing when the prefetch gauge becomes full, not at the start timing of the start memory change when the prefetch gauge becomes full. If the benefit number is “1” and the clear notification lottery is won and the notification result is in the normal gaming state, the player's advantageous gaming state even if the player's expectation is extended until the start of the target start-up memory changes Because it is not a notification of, it may be a fall of interest in gaming. Therefore, the lottery effect (step S2029) may be set in a short time so that the clear notification (step S2030) is performed regardless of the progress of the variable display game.

  In addition, when the privilege number is “0” and the one-time clear notification is executed, it is performed at the timing when the prefetch gauge becomes full, not at the start timing of the start memory change when the prefetch gauge becomes full. In the one-time clear notification, since it is not necessary to secure the effect time of the clear notification lottery as shown in FIG. 170 (B), after the screen display shown in FIG. 170 (A), the above-described FIG. A screen display for notifying the current gaming state as shown in C) is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of the retry performance that is performed when clear notification is not given as a privilege, such as when the privilege number is “1” and the clear notification lottery is lost, or when the privilege number is “2” and the execution probability of clear notification is increased. To do.

  First, with reference to FIG. 171, an example of screen transition in the case where the benefit number is “2” and the retry effect is performed after reaching the prefetch execution count 7 times (step S2033 → step S2034) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (A), when the number of executions of the pre-reading effect reaches seven times and the pre-reading gauge becomes full, the message at the upper end of the pre-reading gauge is changed to “achieved!” On the screen 1410. A lightning image is displayed as a mark on the hold display that is the target of the pre-reading effect for the second time (the same screen as FIG. 170A described above).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 171 (B), on the screen 1410, the message area at the upper end of the pre-reading gauge is changed to a layer that expands radially to three layers, and a message “More! Three more!” Is displayed. Is done. Here, in the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 168), a retry effect setting (step S2034) is performed and the prefetch execution counter is decremented by 3 (step S2075). For this reason, the prefetch execution counter does not reach the predetermined value (seven times) in the process of step S2072 of the gaming state notification process again unless three prefetch effects are executed. In view of this, on the screen 1410, an effect of prompting a game ball to win is performed so as to increase the number of executions of the prefetch effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171 (C), when the prefetch display is suspended, on the screen 1410, the three layers at the upper end of the prefetch gauge are point-charged from the outside, and a countdown message is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 171 (D), when the three layers become full, the pre-read gauge message “Achievement!” Is displayed in front of the layer, and the reserved display with the layer full is marked. A lightning bolt is displayed. In the privilege determination process (step S2024) at this time, since privilege distribution table B (FIG. 159) is used, “0” or “1” is selected as the privilege number.

  For this reason, when the privilege number is “0”, the subsequent screen display is a one-time clear notification screen that clearly notifies the gaming state (probability state) as shown in FIG. 170 (C) described above. Become. When the privilege number is “1”, a clear notification screen as shown in FIG. 170 (C) is displayed after the lottery effect screen as shown in FIG. 170 (B). In the bonus distribution table B, when the winning information in the start memory that satisfies the bonus granting condition is other than the big hit, the winning probability of the notification lottery (privilege number “1”) is set to 100%. The game state is always notified. Further, in the privilege distribution table B, when the winning information in the start memory that satisfies the privilege granting condition is a big hit, the winning probability of the notification lottery (privilege number “1”) is not 100%. However, even if the game state is not notified when the winning of the lottery result is determined, that is, when the variable display game corresponding to the start memory is started, the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit and a new Since the game state is shifted, the player's discouragement that the game state is not notified is not continued.

  Next, referring to FIG. 172, the screen is displayed when the retry number is given after the privilege number is “1” and the clear notification lottery is performed (No in step S2028 → step S2029 → No in step S2030 → step S2034). An example of the transition will be described.

  FIG. 172 (A) is the same screen display as that of FIG. 170 (A) and FIG. 171 (A) described above, and is a screen display when the privilege granting condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 172 (B) is another example of the screen display of the same lottery effect (step S2029) as in FIG. 170 (B) described above, and a player participation type battle game is performed as the lottery effect. For example, a game of defeating a zombie is performed using the production operation unit 220. At this time, the message “Defeat!” Is displayed in the message area at the top of the prefetch gauge. And when winning the lottery effect (clear notification of the game state), the zombie can be defeated by the start of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory that established the privilege grant condition, and the victory effect is displayed, In the case of a loss (retry effect display), the defeat effect is displayed without defeating the zombies in time.

  Here, since it is lost in the clear notification lottery, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), a message of “sorry” is displayed on the screen 1410 informing that the gaming state is not notified together with the zombie that has not fallen. In the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 168), the retry performance setting (step S2034) is performed and the prefetch execution counter is decremented by 3 (step S2075). Is reduced by three times, and a message “Retry!” Is displayed in the message area at the top of the gauge.

  In the re-try effect from the privilege number “2” in FIG. 171 (B) described above, a layer for additionally charging the message area without reducing the charge of the prefetch gauge is provided. This is because there is a possibility that the player will be discouraged if the previous charge is subtracted without a lottery effect such as a battle game, so that an additional charge is required as a retrial effect. Production is performed. On the other hand, in the retrial effect from the privilege number “1”, an effect of subtracting a predetermined amount from the charge amount so far as a penalty for lottery is performed in connection with the lottery effect. In this way, a certain benefit can be given by providing an effect that can be enjoyed by the player, such as a battle game, as a lottery effect, so the discouragement of charge subtraction can be compensated by the interest of the lottery effect, Can keep.

(Effect of 4th Embodiment)
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game state is not clearly notified and the game continues (unclear mode), the number of executions of the prefetch hold display during the unclear mode is set to a predetermined value. The achievement of the privilege granting condition is reached, and the privilege related to the notification of the current gaming state is given based on the satisfaction of the privilege granting condition. Specifically, in the privilege determination process (step S2024) in FIG. 168 described above, one-time clear notification (privilege number “0”), clear notification lottery for determining whether or not clear notification is performed (privilege number “1”), One of the improvements in the clear notification execution probability (privilege number “2”) is determined as the privilege. Then, in the gaming state notification process (FIG. 158), notification effect setting (step S2026, step S2031, step S2034) corresponding to the determined privilege is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of executions of the pre-reading effect in the obscured mode is used as an index for deciding the timing at which the obscured mode is ended, that is, the gaming state is clearly notified, and the pre-reading effect in the obscured mode is used as a privilege granting condition. Is set to reach a predetermined number of times. Here, the end timing of the indistinct mode (notification of the gaming state) is determined using the pre-reading effect of the start memory that can be generated only when the player has a game intention. In addition, in order to grasp the current gaming state, the player generates a starting memory and launches a game ball to obtain a pre-reading effect. For this reason, the same effects as those of the third embodiment described above can be obtained, and not only the occurrence of the start memory but also the improvement effect of the game property can be expected due to the additional consideration of the internal control of the pre-reading effect.

  In addition, specifically, in the embodiment, the number of executions of the pre-reading effect in the obscured mode is used as an index, and the privilege granting condition is that the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and pre-reading effect information may be used as an index. . For example, the appearance of a specific prefetch effect may be set as the specific provision condition.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the unclear mode, the prefetch effect is controlled using a table in which the selection rate of the prefetch display mode having a high prefetch execution probability and high reliability is set higher than usual. To do. Specifically, in the above-described prefetching effect setting process (FIG. 166), when in the unclear mode (Yes in step S2062), the prefetching of the hold display is performed using the hold display mode determination table B (FIG. 167). An effect mode is determined (set) (step S2064 → step S2065).

  Generally, when the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result, the gaming state shifts from a normal gaming state (normal state) to an advantageous gaming state (high probability state, probability variation state) advantageous to the player, The game machine that maintains the normal gaming state is set so that the distinction between the small opening per game and the performance mode cannot be made with specific results such as “big hit F” and “small hit” in this embodiment, and then The game state is set to the indistinct mode. And even in the case of “small hit” in which the normal state is maintained, the player is expected to shift to a probable state, and the interest of the game is enhanced. However, in the case of a specific result in which the normal gaming state is maintained, since the internal probability state is normal when the player's expectation is high, it is unlikely that a highly reliable performance can be obtained. On the contrary, there was a risk that the interest of the game would be reduced.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect in the indistinct mode is the hold display mode determination table in which the selection rate of the prefetch display mode having a high prefetch execution probability and high expectation is set higher than normal (pending display mode determination table A). The effect mode is determined using B. As a result, the execution frequency of the prefetching effect in the unclear mode and the appearance frequency of the prefetching effect with high expectation are increased, so that the player expects that the current gaming state is an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state). . Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation in the indistinct mode, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Moreover, the determination method and provision method of the privilege (privilege number) provided with establishment of privilege provision conditions are the same as that of the above-mentioned 3rd Embodiment. Therefore, an effect equivalent to that of the third embodiment is achieved. Here, the distribution information in the present embodiment indicates start-up memory when the number of executions of the pre-reading effect in the indistinct mode reaches a predetermined number, that is, winning information of start-up memory generated when the privilege granting condition is established.

  In this embodiment, as the distribution information, the winning information of the start memory that has established the privilege provision condition (when the number of executions of the pre-reading effect in the indistinct mode has reached the predetermined number) is given, but the distribution information is not limited thereto. . For example, it may be presence / absence of specific winning information (for example, “big hit”) in the pending start-up memory.

  In addition, if the condition for setting the indistinct mode flag to ON, such as winning of “small hit”, is established before the number of executions of the pre-reading effect reaches the predetermined number, the pre-reading execution counter has reached the predetermined value. At least the privilege determination process (step S2024) of the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 168) may be executed, or the privilege determination process is omitted and the one-time clear notification (step S2026) is executed immediately. You may do it. Further, as a privilege in this case, a subtraction lottery of a set predetermined value (threshold value in the process of step S2072) may be executed. As a result, even if the bonus grant conditions of the present embodiment are not established, a bonus that is beneficial to the player is provided when a “small hit” or the like occurs. (Mental burden) is not put on the player. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the concern that the interest of the game is reduced when the player feels stress.

  Furthermore, when the condition for setting the indistinct mode flag to ON is satisfied, the predetermined value of the prefetch execution counter may be reset. As described above, a game in which a prefetch gauge for counting the number of prefetching executions (point charge) is displayed on the screen 1410 is started (FIG. 169 (C)). The change in the amount of charge that fills up increases the game characteristics and can make the player have more expectation, and can increase the interest of the game.

(Modification 1 of 4th Embodiment)
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the prefetch effect is controlled using the table B (FIG. 167) in which the selection rate of the prefetch display mode having a high prefetch execution probability and high reliability is set higher than usual in the unclear mode. The On the other hand, the modification 1 is characterized in that the prefetching effect is controlled using the table B only in the unclear mode and in the normal state.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 173, a gaming machine of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that the gaming machine of Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment is based on the gaming machine in the above-described fourth embodiment. Below, the structure peculiar to the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated.

[Pre-reading effect setting process]
FIG. 173 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch effect setting process according to the first modification of the present embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the prefetch effect setting process (FIG. 166) of the present embodiment described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the indistinct mode flag is set in the process of step S2062 (Yes in step S2062), it further determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state. (Step S2080). If the indistinct mode flag is not set (No in step S2062), hold display mode determination table A (FIG. 167) is set as before (step S2063).

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is in a high probability state (Yes in step S2080), the peripheral display MPU 4150a sets the hold display mode determination table A (FIG. 167) (step S2063). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (No in step S2080), hold display mode determination table B (FIG. 167) is set (step S2064). The processing after step S2065 is the same as described above.

(Effects of Modification 1 of Fourth Embodiment)
As described above, in the first modification, only in the case of the unclear mode and the normal state, that is, in the case of the internal low-accuracy state, the pre-reading effect is easily executed and the pre-read display mode with high reliability is set to be easily set. Thereby, in the game after the small hit game in which the normal state is maintained, the execution frequency of the prefetch effect is higher than that of the conventional game, and the appearance frequency of the highly reliable prefetch effect is increased. Therefore, the player expects that the current gaming state is an advantageous gaming state (probability variation state). In the first modification, by limiting to the normal state in the indistinct mode, it is possible to provide prefetch effect control that is sharper in accordance with the purpose than in the above-described fourth embodiment. And a player's expectation can be maintained, and the interest fall of a game can be suppressed.

  In addition, the hold display mode determination table B (FIG. 167) is set in the above-described gaming state notifying process (FIG. 168) with one-time clear notification setting (step S2026) or clear notification setting by lottery winning (step S2031). Although it is used until the clear mode flag is reset to OFF (step S2027 or step S2032), it is not limited to this. Conditions for stopping the use of the hold display mode determination table B include, for example, execution of a reach effect with high expectation of jackpot, display of a hold display mode with high expectation of jackpot, achievement of a predetermined number of variable display games in the unclear mode, etc. It may be set.

  Furthermore, when the condition for setting the indistinct mode flag to ON occurs due to the winning of “small hit”, the condition for stopping the use of the hold display mode determination table B is reset according to the gaming state. Or continue. For example, if it is a condition that the predetermined number of times of the variable display game in the indistinct mode is achieved, if the variable display game of 1/2 of the predetermined number has already been digested, the condition is reset and 1/2 is digested. If not, the condition may be continued.

  In this way, with regard to the timing for returning from the hold display mode determination table B to the hold display mode determination table A in the prefetch effect, by providing conditions and making it possible to change the condition contents according to the gaming state, the prefetch effect control can be more diverse. Can enhance the interest of the game.

(Fifth embodiment)
The second start opening 2005c in the above-described embodiment is a start opening that can be won by winning the normal lottery of the normal gate 2005a by passing the game ball and operating the movable piece 2005b. Further, the second start memory is preferentially digested with respect to the first start memory. For this reason, it is difficult to reach both the first start memory number and the second start memory number to the upper limit value, and only one of the first start memory number and the second start memory number is an index of the privilege granting condition. I couldn't.

  On the other hand, the fifth embodiment of the present invention includes a sorting device (not shown) that can sort the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c. Therefore, the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c can win game balls by sorting by the sorting device. Further, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order of winning a prize without superiority. Thereby, it is actually possible to make both the first start memory number (first hold number counter) and the second start memory number (second hold number counter) reach the upper limit value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the total start memory number of the first start memory number and the second start memory number is used as an index of the privilege granting condition.

  Further, in the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, when the privilege granting condition is satisfied, as a privilege related to notification of the current gaming state, one-time clear notification (privilege number “0”), whether or not clear notification is performed is clear. Either the notice lottery (privilege number “1”) or the improvement of the clear notice execution probability (privilege number “2”) was given to the player. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of privilege granting conditions are separately provided until the privilege granting condition in which the upper limit value of the total startup memory number is “8” is established, and the reliability of notification according to the total startup memory number Are given to the player.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 178. Note that the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is based on the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment described above. In the following, the configuration unique to the fifth embodiment will be mainly described.

  Also in this embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a notifies the winning notification when a game ball wins to the first starting port 2001c or the second starting port 2005c as in the third and fourth embodiments. A prior determination command indicating various data (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) acquired with the winning along with the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

[Variation start processing]
FIG. 174 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a change start process according to the present embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the fluctuation start process (FIG. 87) of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  If neither the first start memory number nor the second start memory number is “0” (No in step S301), main control MPU 4100a determines whether the start memory corresponding to the next digestion order is the second start memory. Is determined (step S2081).

  If the start memory to be digested is the second start memory (Yes in step S2081), the main control MPU 4100a obtains the second special symbol random number (step S303) and executes the shift process in the random number storage area. After that (step S304 to step S306), in the processing after step S312, it is set so that the second start game can be advanced in response to the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2005c.

  On the other hand, if the start memory to be digested is not the second start memory (No in step S2081), main control MPU 4100a obtains the first special symbol random number (step S307) and executes the shift process in the random number storage area. After (step S308 to step S310), the first start game is set so that the first start game is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001 in the processing after step S312.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 175 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing according to the present embodiment. The same processes as those in the command analysis process (FIG. 99) of the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the received command, and if the received command is a winning notification command (Yes in step S1101 → Yes in step S1102 → Yes in step S2001), based on the winning notification command A hold display command setting process for setting hold display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S2091).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the total pending number counter provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c by 1 (step S2092). The total number-of-holds counter is a counter that measures the number of winnings of game balls to the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2005c, and is a value obtained by adding the first hold number counter value and the second hold number counter value. . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the received command, and if the received command is not a winning notification command (Yes in step S1101 → No in step S1102 → No in step S2001), executes the processing after step S1103. To do.

[Game state notification processing]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the gaming state notification process according to the present embodiment. The same processing as the gaming state notification processing (FIG. 168) of the fourth embodiment described above is denoted by the same reference numeral.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the indistinct mode flag is set (step S2021). If the indistinct mode flag is not set (No in step S2021), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the indistinct mode flag is set (Yes in step S2021), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the total pending number counter in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S2101) and reads the value of the read total pending number counter Is determined to have reached the upper limit (here, “8”) (step S2102).

  If the read value of the total pending number counter has not reached the upper limit value (here, “8”) (No in step S2102), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines the second predetermined value (here, “6”). Is determined (step S2103). If the value of the total holding number counter has not reached the second predetermined value (here, “6”) (No in step S2103), it has reached the first predetermined value (here, “4”). It is determined whether or not (step S2104). If the value of the total hold number counter has not reached the first predetermined value (here, “4”) (No in step S2104), the process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the value of the total pending number counter has not reached the second predetermined value “6” but has reached the first predetermined value “4” (Yes in step S2104), will be described later. Based on the setting table (FIG. 177), the setting of the effect of the first notification to notify the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) with about 33% reliability is executed (step S2105). The process ends.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the total pending number counter value has not reached the upper limit value “8” but has reached the second predetermined value “6” (Yes in step S2103), will be described later. Based on the setting table (FIG. 177), the setting of the effect of second notification for notifying the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) with a reliability of about 66% is executed (step S2106), and this process is performed. finish.

  Further, when the value of the total pending number counter reaches the upper limit value “8” (Yes in step S2102), the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a reliability of 100% based on a notification setting table (FIG. 176) described later. Then, a clear notification setting for clearly informing the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) is executed (step S2107). Thereafter, the indistinct mode flag is reset (step S2108), and this process is terminated.

[Notification setting table]
FIG. 177 is a table showing an example of the notification setting table of the present embodiment. The notification setting table is used in the first notification setting (step S2105), the second notification setting (step S2106), and the clear notification setting (step S2107) in the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 176).

  The notification setting table is provided so that a notification mode corresponding to each notification stage and the current gaming state (high probability state or normal probability state) can be selected. In the present embodiment, when the number of reservations reaches 4, the first notification of the lowest level 1 out of the reliability level 3 steps is performed, and when the number of reservations reaches 6, the intermediate level 2 of the reliability level 3 steps is performed. When the second notification is performed and the number of holds reaches the upper limit of 8, clear notification of the highest level 3 (reliability 100%) is performed among the three reliability levels.

  In the first notification, when the current gaming state is a high probability state, the effect A is selected with a one-third probability, and the effect B is selected with a two-thirds probability. For example, in the production A, an effect that an ally character rises is performed, and in the production B, an effect that one enemy zombie stands up is performed. When the current gaming state is the normal probability state, the effect A is selected with a two-thirds probability, and the effect B is selected with a one-third probability.

  In the second notification, when the current gaming state is a high probability state, the effect C is selected with a probability of two thirds, and the effect D is selected with a probability of one third. For example, in the production C, an ally character stands up and a weapon is held, and in the production D, an enemy zombie stands up. When the current gaming state is the normal probability state, the effect C is selected with a one-third probability, and the effect D is selected with a two-thirds probability.

  In the clear notification, when the current gaming state is a high probability state, the effect E is selected. For example, in the production E, the teammate character defeats enemy zombies and wins. Further, when the current gaming state is the normal probability state, the effect F is selected. For example, in the production F, the enemy zombie defeats the teammate character and wins.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the notification reliability is set to increase in the order of the first notification, the second notification, and the clear notification. That is, a notification with a high degree of reliability is given as a privilege as the player accumulates start-up memory.

[Screen transition example]
Subsequently, FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects related to the gaming state notification of the present embodiment. An example of screen transition on the screen 1410 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the ambiguity mode is entered when the result of the variable display game is “big hit F” and “small hit”. Here, the screen transition after the big hit game corresponding to “big hit F” will be described as an example. Note that the screen display when “big hit F” (“small hit”) is won is the same as FIG. 169 (A) described above.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (A), on the screen 1410 after the big hit game corresponding to “big hit F”, it is unclear whether or not the result of the variable display game has been a big hit (for example, battle The screen is covered with clouds and enters the indistinct mode with the message “Changing? Normal? Which is it !?”. Here, in the process of step S1256 of the ambiguity mode setting process (FIG. 165), a winning ambiguity effect (game state ambiguity effect) is set. In the present embodiment, the first start memory (round shape) and the second start memory (square shape) are alternately displayed on hold in the hold display area 1409 where there is no distinction between the first hold display area and the second hold display area. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), when the number of hold displays displayed in the hold display area 1409 reaches four (first predetermined value), the first notification is executed. Here, the first notification of reliability level 1 is set in the process of step S2105 of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 176). Then, the effect B is set by the notification setting table (FIG. 177) as the notification mode in the first notification. Even if the current gaming state is a high-probability state, the first notification selects an effect B that suggests a normal probability state (a state that is not advantageous to the player) with a two-thirds probability. For this reason, on the screen 1410, an effect is produced in which an integrated zombie stands up from a state in which both the ally character and the zombie have fallen in the center of the screen and the conclusion of the battle is unknown. Then, the first stage notification is performed to produce an effect of reducing the number of clouds displayed symbolizing the indistinct mode. In the upper part of the screen, a message and an image display that the current notification is the first notification and the notification reliability is the lowest level 1 out of three levels. In this way, in the privilege (first notification) given when the number of the on-hold display reaches four, an effect that suggests that the current gaming state is not advantageous to the player is performed. In addition, an effect of increasing the display luminance is performed on the fourth hold display at the mark that has triggered the execution of the first notification (the privilege granting condition has been established).

  In the present embodiment, the first notification is also executed when there are five hold displays displayed in the hold display area 1409. At this time, in the process of step S2105 of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 176), the effect A or the effect B is newly set by the notification setting table (FIG. 177). When the effect A is set, the effect that the ally character rises is performed, and when the effect B is set again, the effect that the integrated zombie is further raised is performed. Here, it is assumed that the effect B is set as a privilege (first notification) given when the number of hold indications reaches five.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), when six hold displays (second predetermined value) are displayed in the hold display area 1409, the second notification is executed. Here, the second notification of the reliability level 2 is set in the processing of step S2106 of the gaming state notification processing (FIG. 176). And the production | generation C is set by the alerting | reporting setting table (FIG. 177) as an alerting | reporting aspect in 2nd alerting | reporting. In the second notification, an effect corresponding to the current gaming state is selected with a probability of two-thirds. For this reason, on the screen 1410, the teammate character stands up at the center of the screen and an effect is held with a weapon. And the effect that a cloud reduces further from 1st alerting | reporting by performing alerting | reporting of a 2nd step is performed. Further, on the upper part of the screen, a message and an image display that this time is the second notification and the reliability of the notification is level 2 out of three levels. In this way, in the privilege (second notification) that is given when the number of on-hold displays reaches six, an effect that suggests that the current gaming state is advantageous to the player is performed. In addition, an effect of increasing the display brightness is performed on the sixth hold display at the mark that has triggered the execution of the second notification (the grant condition is satisfied).

  In the present embodiment, the second notification is also executed when there are seven hold displays displayed in the hold display area 1409. At this time, effect C or effect D is newly set by the notification setting table (FIG. 177) in the process of step S2106 of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 176). When the effect C is set again, an effect that the ally character with the weapon stands up and takes offense is performed, and when the effect D is set, an effect in which another zombie rises is performed. Here, it is assumed that the production C is set as a privilege (second notification) given when the number of held displays reaches seven.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 178 (D), when the number of hold displays displayed in the hold display area 1409 reaches eight (upper limit), clear notification is executed. Here, in the process of step S2107 of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 176), clear notification of reliability level 3 (100%) is set. And production E is set based on a notice setting table (Drawing 177) as a notice mode in clear notice. In the clear notification, an effect corresponding to the current gaming state is selected. For this reason, on the screen 1410, an effect that the ally character repels the zombie and wins in the center of the screen is performed. In the upper part of the screen, a message and an image display that this time is clear notification and the reliability of notification is the highest level 3 among the three levels. Then, the current gaming state is clearly indicated on the screen as “Probably changing!”, And the cloud symbolizing the indistinct mode disappears. As described above, the privilege (clear notification) given when the hold display reaches the upper limit of 8 clearly notifies that the current gaming state is a high-probability state (probability change) advantageous to the player. Production to be performed. In addition, an effect of increasing the display luminance is performed on the eighth hold display at the mark that has triggered the clear notification (the grant condition is satisfied).

(Effect of 5th Embodiment)
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game state is not clearly notified and the game continues (unclear mode), it is determined that the reserved memory number has reached the predetermined value in the privilege granting condition. It is assumed that a privilege relating to notification of the current gaming state is granted based on the establishment of the privilege granting condition. Specifically, in the above-described gaming state notification process (FIG. 176), when the reserved memory number reaches the first predetermined value (“4”), the first notification with low reliability (step S2105), the reserved memory When the number reaches the second predetermined value (“6”), the second notification of medium reliability (step S2106), and when the number of reserved storage reaches the upper limit (“8”), the high reliability Clear notification (step S2107) is set as a privilege.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved memory number is used as an index for determining the timing at which the unclear mode is ended, that is, the gaming state is clearly notified, and the reserved memory number is set to reach a predetermined value as the privilege granting condition. The present embodiment has a wide range of “0” to “8” as the number of reserved storages that can be actually stored, and provides a notification privilege that increases the reliability in stages as the number of stored storage increases. And

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the indistinct mode (game state notification) is determined using the reserved storage number of the start memory that can be generated only when the player has a game intention. In order to reach the end of the indistinct mode, a plurality of privilege grant conditions and a plurality of privileges are provided, and stepwise notification is performed according to an increase in the number of reserved memories. For this reason, while being able to produce the same effect as the third embodiment in which only the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is a privilege granting condition, it is possible to further increase a series of game values (game characteristics) related to privilege granting. it can.

  In addition, the privilege in the present embodiment is exemplified by giving notifications (first notification, second notification, clear notification) with different stepwise reliability according to the increase in the number of reserved memories, but is not limited thereto. Absent. One-time clear notification (privilege number “0”), clear notification lottery (privilege number “1”) on whether or not to perform clear notification, and improvement of clear notification execution probability in the third and fourth embodiments described above ( Any of the privilege numbers “2”) may be given. In the gaming state notification process (FIG. 158) of the third embodiment described above, if the “total number of held counters” is changed to “total number of held counters” in this embodiment and the upper limit value is set to “8”, the privilege grant condition Since sufficient time from the establishment to the digestion of the starting memory that satisfies the condition can be secured, the degree of freedom of the lottery effect is high even when the clear notification lottery is performed, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming state notification process (FIG. 176) of the present embodiment, when the total pending number counter reaches the first predetermined value (“4”), the clear notification execution probability increases, and the second predetermined value (“6”). The clear notification lottery may be performed when the value becomes, and the clear notification lottery may be performed when the upper limit value (“8”) is reached. In addition, whenever it reaches each predetermined value, the above-mentioned privilege determination process (step S2024) may be performed.

  In addition, when the third start memory is generated in the first start memory or the second start memory (that is, when the total number-of-holds counter becomes 5), the variation time is shortened relatively short as the next variation variation pattern. The rate at which the fluctuation is selected may be increased to make it difficult to reach the reserved storage number “6” (second predetermined value). By changing the reach difficulty level according to the target hold count counter value, it is possible to give a full sense of achievement to the player when reaching.

  In addition, there is a large difference in the degree of difficulty in which the total number-of-holds counter reaches “8” (upper limit value) between when the reach effect is executed and when the reach effect is not executed. Therefore, a reach effect execution determination unit that determines whether or not a reach effect is executed may be provided, and the privilege may be changed depending on whether or not the reach effect is executed. For example, when the reach effect is not executed, a higher reliability notification may be given than when the reach effect is executed.

  Moreover, you may make it set each predetermined value according to a game state. For example, each predetermined value may be changed in accordance with a state in which the shortening variation is selected in different states, whether or not a reach effect is performed, and the like.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the number of stored memories obtained by adding the first reserved number counter and the second reserved number counter varies in a wide range of “0” to “8”, the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment are provided. It is possible to diversify the production patterns related to the establishment of the privilege granting conditions and the privilege granting rather than the form, and to enhance the interest of the game.

(Modification 1 of 5th Embodiment)
In the fifth embodiment described above, a privilege (first notification, second notification, clear notification) is given based on the number of pending start memories (the sum of the first start memory number and the second start memory number), and the privilege Is given each time the start-up memory is generated if the reserved memory number has reached the set predetermined value (first predetermined value, second predetermined value, upper limit value). On the other hand, in the first modification, a privilege is given based on the number of start memories (the number of winnings) that occurred during the indistinct mode, and the privilege is given only when the number of winnings matches the set predetermined value.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 179 to 181, a gaming machine of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that the gaming machine of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment is based on the gaming machine in the fifth embodiment described above. Below, the structure peculiar to the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment is demonstrated.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 179 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing according to the first modification of the present embodiment. The same processes as those in the command analysis process (FIG. 175) of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  If the received command is a winning notification command, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the hold display command setting process and the update of the total hold number counter (Yes in step S1101 → Yes in step S1102 → Yes in step S2001) Step S2091 → Step S2092), it is determined whether or not the unclear mode flag is set (Step S2111). If the indistinct mode flag is not set (No in step S2111), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the unclear mode flag is set (Yes in step S2111), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the winning number counter provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c by 1 (step S2112). Here, the winning number counter is a counter that measures the number of winnings of game balls to the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c during the unclear mode.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a winning number effect command setting process for setting effects in the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the winning number counter (step S2113). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

[Game state notification processing]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the gaming state notification process according to the first modification of the present embodiment. The same processes as those in the game state notification process (FIG. 176) of the present embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  In the first modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the value of the winning number counter (step S2121) when the unclear mode flag is set (Yes in step S2021). Then, when the value of the read winning number counter reaches the first predetermined value (“4”) (Yes in step S2104), it is determined whether or not the first notified flag is set (step S2122). ). If the first notification completion flag is set (Yes in step S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, if the first notified flag is not set (No in step S2122), first notification setting is executed (step S2105), the first notified flag is set (step S2123), The process ends.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the second notified flag is set when the value of the read winning number counter reaches the second predetermined value (“6”) (Yes in step S2103). Determination is made (step S2124). If the second notified flag is set (Yes in step S2124), the process ends. On the other hand, if the second notified flag is not set (No in step S2124), the second notification setting is executed (step S2106), the second notified flag is set (step S2125), The process ends.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the value of the read winning number counter reaches the upper limit (“8”) and executes clear notification setting and reset of the unclear mode flag (Yes in step S2102) S2107 → step S2108), the winning number counter is reset (step S2126), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the first modification, a privilege is given only when the number of winnings in the unclear mode reaches a predetermined value (first predetermined value, second predetermined value, upper limit value). Specifically, the first notification is executed only when the number of winnings reaches the first predetermined value (here, “4”), and when the number of winnings reaches “5”, the first predetermined value is reached. Even if it is doing, the 1st information is not performed. The second notification is executed only when the number of winnings reaches a second predetermined value (here, “6”), and when the number of winnings reaches “7”, the second predetermined value is reached. However, the second notification is not executed.

[Screen transition example]
Subsequently, FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects related to the gaming state notification of the first modification of the present embodiment. An example of screen transition on the screen 1410 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. The screen displays in FIGS. 181A, 181B, and 181C correspond to the screen displays in FIGS. 178A, IB, and D described above. Here, differences from the above-described screen display (FIG. 178) of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (A), the screen 1410 is provided with a count display area 1408 for notifying the number of winnings (starting memory number) generated during the unclear mode. In the count display area 1408, when the winning number effect command is set in the process of step S2113 of the command analysis process (FIG. 179), an effect such as lighting the corresponding area is performed. Therefore, on the screen 1410 after the big hit game corresponding to “big hit F”, the winning ambiguity effect (game state ambiguity effect) set in the process of step S1256 of the ambiguity mode setting process (FIG. 165) described above. As one example, a count display area 1408 is displayed. Here, the count display area 1408 has an area divided by the number of upper limit values to be set (here, “8”), and it is easy for the player to win the number of winnings by displaying one area for each winning. And illuminate the entire region (start memory). Here, since the winning number counter at the start of the unclear mode is 0, all the eight areas of the count display area 1408 are turned off.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), when four start memories occur after entering the indistinct mode, four areas of the count display area 1408 are turned on on the screen 1410, First notification is performed. Here, the lighting of the count display area is set in the winning number effect command setting process (step S2113) of the command analysis process (FIG. 179). Further, it is determined in the process of step S2104 of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 180) that the value of the winning number counter has reached the first predetermined value (“4”), and the first notified flag is set in the process of step S2122. Since it is determined that it has not been performed, the first notification is set in the process of step S2105. At this time, the fourth start memory in the count display area 1408 can be grasped so that the player can grasp that the fourth start memory triggers the execution of the first notification (the privilege granting condition is satisfied). A balloon is displayed from the area corresponding to, and an effect is displayed in which a message or the like related to the first notification is displayed in the balloon.

  In the first modification, the first notification is made only when the number of winnings reaches the first predetermined value of four, and the first notification is made when the number reaches five (greater than the first predetermined value and less than the second predetermined value). There is no notification. When the fifth start memory is generated, on the screen 1410, five areas of the count display area 1408 are turned on. Here, in the process of step S2104 of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 180), it is determined that the value of the winning number counter has reached the first predetermined value (“4”). Since the first notified flag is set when one notification is set, it is guided to end the gaming state notifying process without setting the first notification in the process of step S2122.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the sixth start memory is generated, on the screen 1410, the six areas of the count display area 1408 are turned on, and the second notification is performed. Here, it is determined that the value of the winning number counter has reached the second predetermined value (“6”) in the process of step S2103 of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 180), and the second notified flag is set in the process of step S2124. Since it is determined that it has not been set, the second notification is set in the process of step S2106. When the seventh start memory is generated, only the lighting area of the count display area 1408 is added, and the second notification is not performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (C), when the eighth start memory is generated, all eight areas of the count display area 1408 are turned on on the screen 1410, and clear notification is performed. Here, since it is determined that the value of the winning number counter has reached the upper limit (“8”) in the process of step S2102 of the gaming state notification process (FIG. 180), clear notification is set in the process of step S2107. .

(Effect of Modification 1 of Fifth Embodiment)
As described above, in the first modification, the number of winnings in the obscured mode is used as an index for deciding the timing at which the ambiguity mode is ended, that is, the game state is clearly notified, and a predetermined value of the number of winnings is reached as a privilege granting condition. It is set. The number of winnings that occurred during the obscure mode is not limited to an upper limit of “8” as with the number of stored memories (the total value of the first held number counter and the second held number counter). Since the value can be set (there may be more than 8), in addition to the same effect as the fifth embodiment, a step-by-step privilege grant and a high degree of freedom in accordance with the increase in the number of winnings in a wider range Can be provided. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the number of winnings in the unclear mode includes not only the reserved memory number (startable memory that can be held) but also the so-called overflow number (startable memory that cannot be held). Since the player who wants to grasp the current game state launches the game ball in order to win the game ball up to the maximum number of winnings, the player's willingness to play is further increased than using only the reserved memory number as an index of the privilege grant condition At the same time, the operating efficiency of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, in the first modification, the notification privilege is given only when the number of winnings in the unclear mode reaches a predetermined value (first predetermined value, second predetermined value, upper limit value). Since the privilege corresponding to each predetermined value is executed only once, the premium feeling (rare value) of the privilege can be enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. However, even a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused, The invention can be applied. In consideration of the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the “game ball” in each of the above configurations may be used as a “game medium”.

  A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium such as a game ball, which is a medium that a player inputs into the game machine, and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. There is a kind of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” In general, a lottery means for performing lottery by assigning game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening, represented by what is commonly referred to as a “multifunction machine” "One" is represented by a predetermined number of game balls, for example, sixteen, etc., represented by what is generally referred to as "Alepati", for example, a game ball entering mode into a plurality of entrances in one game And the like which pays out a predetermined number of game balls in accordance with the above.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of the fluctuation stop of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be an EL display device, a plasma display device, a display device such as a CRT, or the like.

1 Pachinko machine 4 Game board 5a Game area 220 Production operation unit 244 Upper plate side liquid crystal display device (production display means)
246 Touch panel (production operation means)
257 Top plate production button (production operation means)
504 Handle lever (launching operation means)
1400 Game board side liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
4100 Main control board (lottery means, game state setting means, start memory means)
4140 Peripheral control board (operation change effect means, detection validation means, detection frequency measurement means, operation value improvement means, effective period extension means, effective period notification means, consumption degree suggestion means, effect mode setting means, effect mode change means, Suggestion effect mode transition means, unclear mode setting means, expectation mode setting means, privilege granting means, gaming state notification means, lottery game execution means, prior notification means, notification mode selection means, mode selection probability change means, execution rate change means , Probability changing means, information providing means, gaming state notification prohibiting means)
4165 Real Time Clock (RTC) Control Unit (simultaneous suggestion execution means)
5500 External information transmission / reception board (game information receiving means)
6011 Production gate (specific area)

Claims (1)

Start memory storage means capable of storing as a start memory that a game medium has passed through a predetermined area in the game area;
Lottery game execution means for executing a lottery game that can shift the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the start-up memory;
An ambiguity mode setting means capable of setting an ambiguity mode that does not clearly notify the gaming state in the gaming state;
Prior notification means capable of notifying the result information of the lottery game before the execution of the lottery game;
As a prior notification mode by the prior notification unit, a notification mode selection unit that selects one mode from a plurality of modes that suggest the degree of expectation as the result information advantageous to the player step by step;
A mode selection probability changing unit that sets a probability of selecting the mode having a higher expectation than the notification mode selection unit;
Execution rate changing means for changing the advance notification execution rate;
Probability changing means for executing at least one of the execution rate changing means and the mode selection probability changing means in the unclear mode and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising